JP2021151541A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of optimizing a state of the game machine during the execution of power-saving.SOLUTION: A main control device 71 can detect whether a Pachinko machine 10 is in a non-game state by executing power-saving mode shift processing as game state detection means. If the non-game state is detected, the Pachinko machine 10 is shifted to a power-saving mode. When shifted to the power-saving mode, an output switch circuit 231 blocks power supply from a power-on power source part 113 to a display control device 121 and a sound light-emission control device 72. A movable accessory 200 notifies a player of the power-saving state by being shifted from a non-notification state to a notification state with the blockage of the power supply to the display control device 121 and the sound light-emission control device 72 as a trigger.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a plurality of control devices such as a main control device, a payout control device, and a display control device are provided to execute processing regarding the progress of the game. Further, a prize detection sensor is connected to the main control device, a payout motor is connected to the payout control device, and a plurality of devices such as a symbol display device and a lamp are connected to the display control device (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The plurality of control devices are connected to a power supply device, and power is supplied from the power supply device.

JP-A-2007-7465

In recent years, it has been desired to reduce the power consumption of pachinko gaming machines and the like, and when the game has not been played for a predetermined period of time, the power consumption (power saving) of the device used for the production such as the symbol display device and the lamp is to be implemented. Is being considered.

However, with the existing technology, it has been difficult to optimize the state of the gaming machine during power saving. That is, it is difficult to control each of the plurality of control devices in a desired state in the power-saving gaming machine, or the gaming machine is in the power-saving state for the player from the state in front of the gaming machine. It may be difficult to recognize.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of optimizing the state of the gaming machine during power saving.

The present invention
Multiple control means for controlling various operations of the gaming machine,
With the external power supplied to the gaming machine, the power supply means for supplying the driving power required by each of the control means to the plurality of control means, and the power supply means.
With
The plurality of control means include a first control means and a second control means.
A drive power generation circuit provided in the power supply means and generating the drive power,
A suppression circuit provided in the power supply path between the drive power generation circuit and the control unit of the second control means to suppress power supply from the drive power generation circuit to the control unit of the second control means.
With
Power is supplied to the control unit of the first control means from the drive power generation circuit without going through the suppression circuit.
A means for determining the necessity of power saving in the gaming machine is provided.
When the suppression circuit determines that power saving is to be performed by the power saving necessity determination means in a state where the external power supply is supplied to the game machine, the drive power generation circuit determines that the second control means The power supply to the control unit is suppressed, and when the determination that power saving is performed by the power saving necessity determination means is canceled, the power is supplied from the drive power generation circuit to the second control means.
The first control means sequentially updates the numerical information within a predetermined numerical range in the control unit of the first control means, and acquires the numerical information when the predetermined acquisition conditions are satisfied. It is a main control means for carrying out a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the acquired numerical information, and power is supplied from the drive power generation circuit to the control unit of the second control means. The numerical information is updated at the same cycle in both cases where the power supply is suppressed and when the power supply is suppressed.
The gaming machine is provided with a notification means for notifying the player that power is being saved when the power supply from the driving power generation circuit to the control unit of the second control means is suppressed. It is a feature.

According to the present invention, it is possible to optimize the state of the gaming machine during power saving.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a perspective view which shows the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a rear view which shows the pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of the symbol display apparatus (a), (b). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a), (b) a movable accessory. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of the movable accessory in FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the driving state of each driving part, and the position of each movable plate, (a)-(c). (A) A perspective view of the launch operation device viewed from the front, and (b) a perspective view of the launch operation device viewed from the rear. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning or failing lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for demo display executed in MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power saving mode transition process executed by MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power saving processing executed by MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the configuration for executing a power cutoff process and a power recovery process. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure which concerns on the display control of a symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the software structure of a character ROM. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing in a display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the initial transfer processing in VDP. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of drawing data in VDP. It is a flowchart which shows the output processing of the drawing signal in VDP. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process in a display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the game times control processing in a display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing by a normal symbol in a display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the display table in a display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during change by a normal symbol in a display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the background image control processing in a display CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the configuration for executing the power cutoff process and power recovery process in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by MPU in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure information storage process executed by MPU in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for demo display executed by MPU in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the power saving mode control process executed by the payout control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the power saving mode transition process executed by the payout control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process in power saving mode executed by the payout control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure about the display control of the symbol display device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the power saving mode transition process executed by MPU in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which is executed by the display CPU in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the demo display process executed by the display CPU in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the power saving display process executed by the display CPU in 3rd Embodiment. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the movable accessory in 4th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the driving state of each driving part and the position of each movable plate in (a)-(c) 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure which concerns on the driving of the movable accessory in 4th Embodiment. This is a power saving mode transition process executed by the MPU according to the fourth embodiment. This is a movable accessory drive process executed by the voice emission control device according to the fourth embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the game area is omitted.

The pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a game machine main body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. And have. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. It is said that. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation tip side when viewed from the front. It is supposed to be movable.

As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11. And also has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a front view of the game board 24.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating port 33, a lower operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a main display unit 43, an accessory display unit 44, and the like. ing. A plurality of general winning openings 31 are provided, and a plurality of through gates 35 are also provided.

Each general winning opening 31, variable winning device 32, upper working opening 33, lower working opening 34, and each through gate 35 are provided with a winning detection sensor in a one-to-one correspondence. All of these detection sensors are arranged on the back side of the game board 24, and the detection result is output to the main control device described later. An electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used as the detection sensor, but the sensor to be used is arbitrary as long as it can individually detect the winning of the game ball.

When the occurrence of a ball entering the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, and the lower operating port 34 is detected, a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, when a ball enters the upper operating port 33 and a ball enters the lower operating port 34, three prize balls are paid out and a general prize is won. When a ball enters the mouth 31, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the variable winning device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary, for example, the number of prize balls related to the lower operating port 34 is larger than the number of prize balls related to the upper operating port 33, and the number of prize balls of both operating ports 33 and 34 is large. It may be different. Further, the number of prize balls related to the variable winning device 32 is not limited to a configuration larger than the number of other prize balls, and for example, the number of prize balls related to the general winning opening 31 may be smaller than the number of prize balls.

In addition, an out port 37 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and a game ball that does not enter various winning openings or the like is discharged from the game area through the out port 37. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 38 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Aspects that are not included are also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the ball from entering the game ball into the out port 37, the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, the lower operating port 34, or the through gate 35 The entry of a game ball is also referred to as a prize.

The upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24. Both the upper actuating port 33 and the lower actuating port 34 are opened upward. Further, both operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper operating port 33 faces upward. The lower operating port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric accessory 34a is connected to an electric accessory drive unit 34b mounted on the back side of the game board 24, and is driven by the electric accessory drive unit 34b to be in a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) and in a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state). It is placed in either the open state (support state or guide state). When the electric accessory 34a is closed, the game ball cannot win the lower operating port 34, and when the electric accessory 34a is opened, the lower operating port 34 can be won.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and the state in which the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 34 is likely to occur and the state in which the winning is not impossible but the winning is more difficult to occur than the above-mentioned state in which the winning is likely to occur. The accessory 34a may be switched. Further, the electric accessory 34a may be inadequate, and switching between a state in which winning is likely to occur and a state in which winning is less likely to occur may be performed by displacement of the lower operating port 34 itself.

The variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening 32a leading to the back side of the game board 24, and also includes an opening / closing door 32b for opening and closing the large winning opening 32a. The opening / closing door 32b is connected to a variable winning drive unit integrally provided as the variable winning device 32 (the connection location is not shown), and is driven by the variable winning drive unit to be in either the closed state or the open state. Placed in the door. Specifically, it is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize, and when the transition to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery, the game ball is switched to an open state in which a prize can be won.

Further, the variable winning device 32 is formed with a winning passing portion at a position where the game ball winning the variable winning device 32 always passes through the large winning opening 32a, and further, at the position of the winning passing portion. The big winning opening detection sensor is provided so that the detection unit exists. The game balls that have won the variable winning device 32 are individually detected by the large winning opening detection sensor.

In the main display unit 43, the variation display of the pattern is performed by triggering the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is performed. The result of the internal lottery based on this is clearly indicated by the display. The display result by the main display unit 43 is information representing the internal lottery result, and corresponds to a so-called special symbol (special symbol). In the pachinko machine 10, the winning of the upper operating port 33 and the winning of the lower operating port 34 are not distinguished in the internal lottery, and the winning is performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. The result of the internal lottery is clearly shown on the main display unit 43, which is a common display area. Then, when the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the main display unit 43. After being displayed and the variable display is stopped, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

The main display unit 43 is composed of a segment display unit in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and the like. It may be composed of other types of display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display. Further, as a pattern (display information) that is variablely displayed on the main display unit 43, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, and a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed are displayed. A configuration or a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the accessory display unit 44, the variation display of the pattern is performed by triggering the winning of the through gate 35, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35 is obtained. Explicitly indicated by the display. The display result by the accessory display unit 44 corresponds to a so-called ordinary symbol (normal diagram). If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the through gate 35 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric service open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 44 and the variable display is displayed. After being stopped, it shifts to the electric service open state. In the electric service open state, the electric accessory 34a provided in the lower operating port 34 is in the open state in a predetermined mode.

The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 for variable display (or variable display or switching display) of a symbol which is a kind of symbol, and a center frame 42 is arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 41. Has been done. The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device having a display screen such as a CRT, and may be a dot matrix display. It may be a vessel.

In the symbol display device 41, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. That is, when the main display unit 43 performs the variable display, the symbol display device 41 performs the variable display accordingly.

The display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

The design, which is a kind of design, is composed of nine types of main designs with numbers "1" to "9", and sub-designs consisting of shell-shaped patterns. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as an octopus are assigned numbers "1" to "9" to form a main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 6A, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols.

As shown in FIG. 6B, on the display screen G, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has become like. Further, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set on the display screen G.

When the effect for game rotation is performed on the display screen G based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled in a predetermined direction with periodicity. The variable display starts at. Then, the variable display is switched to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are statically displayed in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 for game use. The production of is finished.

In addition, when the production for the game round is completed, if the game round corresponds to the occurrence of the probability variation jackpot result described later, a combination of symbols with the same odd number is formed on one of the effective lines. If it is a game round corresponding to the occurrence of a normal jackpot result described later, a combination of symbols having the same even number is formed on one of the effective lines. Further, it may be configured such that a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, "3.4.1") is formed although it is not a combination of symbols in which the same number is attached to any of the effective lines.

It should be noted that, based on the winning of any of the operating ports 33 and 34, the variation display is started on the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41, a predetermined stop result is displayed, and the variation display is stopped. Corresponds to one game.

Further, the mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern to be variablely displayed by the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned symbol, and for example, only numbers may be variablely displayed as the symbol.

As shown in FIG. 5, a first holding lamp unit 45 corresponding to the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41 is provided on the upper left portion on the front surface side of the center frame 42. The maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the first holding lamp unit 45.

A second holding lamp portion 46 corresponding to the accessory display portion 44 is provided in the upper right portion of the center frame 42. The number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 is held up to four times, and the number of holdings is displayed by lighting the second holding lamp unit 46.
It should be noted that the functions of the holding lamp units 45 and 46 may be fulfilled by the display in a part of the area of the symbol display device 41.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the game board 24 is provided with a magnet detection sensor 24a and a radio wave detection sensor 24b as abnormality detection means.

The magnet detection sensor 24a is installed on the back side of the game board 24 around the upper operating port 33. As described above, since the upper operating port 33 triggers an internal lottery, an act of bringing a magnet close to the vicinity of the upper operating port 33 in front of the window panel 57 to illegally guide the game ball to the upper operating port 33 is performed. is assumed. On the other hand, by providing the magnet detection sensor 24a, it is possible to detect when a fraudulent act using the magnet is performed.
The magnet detection sensor 24a is electrically connected to a main control device described later, and the detection result of the magnet detection sensor 24a is input to the main control device.

The position of the magnet detection sensor 24a is not limited to the above, and for example, in order to suppress fraudulent acts that attempt to illegally win a prize in the general winning opening 31 using the magnet. A magnet detection sensor 24a may be arranged around the general winning opening 31.

The radio wave detection sensor 24b is installed on the back side of the game board 24 around the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34. More specifically about this position, the radio wave detection sensor 24b is arranged at substantially the same height position as both the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 in the height direction, and the upper operating port 33 and the upper operating port 33 in the lateral direction. It is arranged closer to the rotation base end side of the gaming machine main body 12 than the lower operating port 34. Here, since the payout device described later for executing the payout of the game ball is arranged at a position closer to the rotation base end side of the game machine main body 12, the radio wave detection sensor 24b is laterally connected to the actuating port device and the payout device. It can be said that it is placed between.

As described above, since the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 trigger an internal lottery, radio waves are illegally output toward the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 in front of the pachinko machine 10 to be used for the upper operating port. It is assumed that the detection sensor or the detection sensor for the lower operating port erroneously detects the passage of the game ball. On the other hand, since the radio wave detection sensor 24b is provided, it is possible to detect when a fraudulent act using the radio wave is performed. The radio wave detection sensor 24b is electrically connected to a main control device described later, and the detection result of the radio wave detection sensor 24b is input to the main control device.

The position of the radio wave detection sensor 24b is not limited to the above, and may be, for example, closer to the rotating tip side of the gaming machine main body 12 than the operating port device, and the operating port device and the variable winning device. It may be arranged at a height position between 32 and 32. Further, although the radio wave detection sensor 24b can detect a radio wave of 50 MHz to 3 GHz as a predetermined frequency, it should be able to detect a radio wave having a frequency that can cause erroneous detection to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. For example, the frequency range is arbitrary, and the frequency range to be detected may be changed.

Further, the variable display unit 36 is provided with a movable accessory. The movable accessory will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 9. FIG. 7 is an explanatory view for explaining a movable accessory provided on the game board 24, FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of the movable accessory in FIG. 7, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship with the position of a plate.

As shown in FIG. 7A, the variable display unit 36 includes a movable accessory 200. As shown in FIG. 8, the movable accessory 200 has two movable plates 201 and 202 that overlap each other in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, and shaft portions 201a and 202a are provided at one ends of the movable plates 201 and 202. Each is provided. The shaft portions 201a and 202a are provided at positions above the front opening 42a of the center frame 42 and on the back side of the front plate 42b, and the movable plates 201 and 202 rotate about the shaft portions 201a and 202a as center points. As a result, the position hidden behind the center frame 42 (the position indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 7A) and the position appearing from the center frame 42 and becoming the front of the screen of the symbol display device 41 (FIG. 7 (a)). ) And the position shown by the solid line). Of the two movable plates 201 and 202, the movable plate 201 on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is a moving member for notification for notifying that the pachinko machine 10 is in a power saving state, and the movable plate 202 on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is , Is a movable member for effect used for game effect by the variable display unit 36.

As shown in FIG. 7B, both movable plates 201 and 202 are members having a substantially T shape and having the same shape and dimensions. The movable plate 201 has an information display unit 203 that displays notification information for power saving notification, and the information display unit 203 contains a notification message such as "Power saving is in operation. A game is possible." Has been done. In addition to this, the information display unit 203 may be provided with information regarding recovery from the power saving state, and may include, for example, a notification message such as "recover when the handle is touched."

Further, the movable plate 202 has an information display unit 204 for displaying notification information for game production, and the information display unit 204 describes, for example, a notification message such as "It's super hot !!". There is.

As shown in FIG. 8, the shaft portion 201a of the movable plate 201 has a solid shape, whereas the shaft portion 202a of the movable plate 202 has a hollow shape, and the shaft portion 201a is formed in the hollow portion of the shaft portion 202a. By inserting the shaft portions 201a and 202a, the shaft portions 201a and 202a are arranged in a double inner and outer shape and coaxially. The movable plate 202 on the rear side is formed with a through hole 202b for penetrating the shaft portion 201a of the movable plate 201 on the front side.

Drive units 205 and 206 made of motors and the like are provided on the shaft units 201a and 202a, respectively, and the movable plates 201 and 202 can operate independently by the drive units 205 and 206. .. When the drive units 205 and 206 are in a non-drive state (motor non-energized state), the movable plates 201 and 202 appear at a position in front of the screen of the symbol display device 41 due to their own weight, and each drive unit is displayed. By driving 205 and 206 (by energizing the motor), the movable plates 201 and 202 are lifted and held behind the center frame 42 against their own weight.

Since both movable plates 201 and 202 are members having the same shape and dimensions, the movable plates 201 and 202 appear in front of the screen of the symbol display device 41 due to their own weight when the motor is not energized. In particular, when both movable plates 201 and 202 are overlapped in the front-rear direction, the movable plate 202 for directing is hidden by the movable plate 201 for power saving notification so that it cannot be seen or becomes difficult to see from the front of the pachinko machine 10. .. By making the movable plate 201 for power saving notification larger than the movable plate 202 for the effect, the movable plate 202 for the effect can be more visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where both the movable plates 201 and 202 are overlapped in the front-rear direction. It can be difficult.

As shown in FIG. 9A, both the movable plates 201 and 202 of the movable accessory 200 are held at the back positions of the center frame 42 as the basic game positions during the game of the pachinko machine 10. In this state, the player cannot visually recognize the movable accessory 200 (movable plates 201, 202) from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

Then, as a predetermined game effect is performed during the game of the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 9B, the movable plate 202 for the game effect appears at a position in front of the screen of the symbol display device 41. Put out. At this time, if the drive unit 206 on the movable plate 202 side is not driven (motor is not energized), the movable plate 202 appears at a predetermined appearance position by its own weight, but the drive control of the drive unit 206 causes a predetermined speed. It is desirable to move the movable plate 202 to a predetermined appearance position. The movable plate 201 for power saving notification remains arranged behind the center frame 42.

On the other hand, when the power is not turned on for the pachinko machine 10, both the drive units 205 and 206 are in the non-drive (motor non-energized) state as shown in FIG. 9 (c). Both the movable plates 201 and 202 appear at a predetermined appearance position, that is, at a position in front of the screen of the symbol display device 41 due to their own weight. At this time, of the two movable plates 201 and 202, the movable plate 201 for power saving notification is located on the front side. In the power saving mode, the movable plate 201 for power saving notification is present in front of the screen, so that when the player in the game hall selects, for example, a new pachinko machine to play a game, the symbol display device 41 By looking at the movable plate 201 at the same time as looking into the machine, it is recognized that the pachinko machine 10 (a non-gaming game machine in which the player has not played a game) is in a power saving state. In this case, even if the symbol display device 41 displays the display in a display form different from that during the game, it can be recognized that the game is possible at any time for the purpose of saving power. For example, in the power saving mode, even if the stop image is still displayed on the symbol display device 41 or the display form is changed due to the illuminance of the liquid crystal backlight being reduced, it can be recognized that it is for power saving. .. The power saving mode will be described in detail later.

Returning to the description of FIG. 5, the inner rail portion 48 and the outer rail portion 49 are attached to the game board 24, and the guide rail is composed of the inner rail portion 48 and the outer rail portion 49 to launch the game ball. The game ball launched from the mechanism 51 is guided to the upper part of the game area.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launch mechanism 51 is attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21, and is stored in the launch rail 52 extending toward the guide rail and the upper plate 61a described later. It includes a ball feeding device 53 that supplies a game ball onto the launch rail 52, and a solenoid 54 that is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied on the launch rail 52 toward the guide rail. By operating the launch operation device 55 provided on the front door frame 14, the solenoid 54 is driven and controlled, and the game ball is launched.

Next, the configuration of the launch operation device 55 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10A is a perspective view of the launch operation device 55 viewed from the front, and FIG. 10B is a perspective view of the launch operation device 55 viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, the launch operation device 55 includes a base 220 fixed to the front door frame 14, a front unit 221 constituting the front side of the launch operation device 55, a base 220, and the base 220. It is provided between the front units 221 and includes an operation handle 222 that is rotated (rotated) when the game ball is launched.

The base 220 is formed in a cylindrical shape by an opaque material such as ABS resin, and the inner and outer diameters of one opening side are both expanded (hereinafter, this expanded region is expanded. 223). Further, the base portion 220 is integrally formed with a shaft hole portion extending in the same direction as the axis on the same axis as the diameter-expanded region 223. A shaft member for a handle is rotatably supported in the shaft hole portion about the above axis, and an operation handle 222 is provided by fixing the shaft member to a fixing ring portion formed at an intermediate position of the shaft member for the handle. Has been done.

The operation handle 222 is made of ABS resin, and a metal film is plated on the entire peripheral surface thereof. The metal film serves as an operation detection electrode for detecting the presence or absence of a game operation by the player. It should be noted that the metal film is not plated on the entire peripheral surface of the operation handle 222, but a metal film is plated on a part of the operation handle 222, for example, a finger hook portion provided in a protruding shape on the outer peripheral portion of the operation handle. The operation handle 222 may be made of metal.

The operation handle 222 is provided with a handle touch sensor 224 for detecting that the player is operating the operation handle 222. The handle touch sensor 224 includes a touch detection unit 225 composed of electrodes (the metal film described above) provided on the operation handle 222, and a signal processing unit 226 electrically connected to the touch detection unit 225. ing. A capacitor is built in the signal processing unit 226, and when the player's hand comes into contact with the outer surface of the touch detection unit 225 and the capacitance of the capacitor changes, a predetermined electric signal corresponding to the handle operation detection (hereinafter referred to as , Touch detection signal) is output to the firing control unit. The steering wheel touch sensor 224 outputs a HI level signal when the steering wheel is operated, and outputs a LOW level signal when the steering wheel is not operated. The relationship between LOW and HI may be reversed. Based on the touch detection signal, the launch control unit recognizes that the player's hand is in contact with the outer surface of the operation handle 222, that is, the player is playing a game.

The front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 56 so that almost the entire area of the game area can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 56 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 57 is fitted therein. The window panel 57 is formed colorless and transparent by glass, but is not limited to this, and may be formed colorless and transparent by synthetic resin, and the game area can be visually recognized through the window panel 57 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. If possible, it may be formed to be colored and transparent.

Light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the window 56. An indicator lamp portion 58a is provided above the window portion 56 as a part of various lamp portions. Further, a pair of left and right error lamp portions 58b are provided on both the left and right sides of the indicator lamp portion 58a and at the upper corner portions of the front door frame 14. Further, a pair of left and right speaker units 59 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided adjacent to the error lamp unit 58b.

Below the window portion 56 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 61 and a lower bulging portion 62 that bulge toward the front side are arranged vertically. An upper plate 61a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 61, and a lower plate 62a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 62. The upper plate 61a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 51 side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 62a has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 61a.

In the region of the upper bulging portion 61 facing the front of the pachinko machine 10, for example, an effect operating device 60 including a push button device and an operating portion manually operated by the player is provided. The operation unit of the effect operation device 60 is manually operated by the player in order to make the effect content on the display screen of the symbol display device 41 or the like a predetermined effect content.

In the pachinko machine 10, the display mode on the display screen of the symbol display device 41 is switched based on the operation of the effect operation device 60. Specifically, a plurality of types (for example, three types) of background images are set in the standby image displayed until the game round is started and the game round image displayed in the situation where the game round is being executed. The background image can be switched by operating the effect operation device 60 in a situation where the game times or the open / close execution mode is not executed. Further, based on the fact that the effect operation device 60 is operated under a predetermined condition in the situation where the game round is being executed, the image corresponding to the operation is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24), a main control device 71 that controls the main control of the game, and a voice or lamp display and a display control device (not shown) are controlled. The voice emission control device 72, which controls the sound emission control device 72, is installed.

The substrate box 71a of the main control device 71 may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or may be provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box 71a are inseparably bonded, and a bonding portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of separation is formed, and an adhesive layer is adhered at the time of peeling. It is conceivable that a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being peeled off by remaining on the case is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box 71a can be considered.

The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 71 and the sound emission control device 72.

The back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4.

The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 73 formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism portion 74 and a control device collecting unit 75 are attached to the back pack 73. The back pack 73 has a base portion 119 to which the payout mechanism portion 74 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion 122 that protrudes rearward of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape.

The base portion 119 is provided with an external terminal plate 81 at the upper right portion thereof. Various output terminals are provided on the external terminal plate 81, and various signals are output to the management computer on the game hall side through these output terminals.

A payout mechanism portion 74 is arranged on the base portion 119 so as to bypass the protective cover portion 122. That is, a tank 76 opened upward is provided at the uppermost portion of the back pack 73, and the tank 76 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. A tank rail 132 that gently inclines toward the downstream side is connected below the tank 76, and a case rail 133 that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 132. A payout device 77 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 133. The game ball paid out from the payout device 77 is discharged to the upper plate 61a or the lower plate 62a through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 77.

A back pack substrate 135 is installed in the payout mechanism portion 74. For example, an AC 24V main power supply is supplied to the back pack board 135, and the power is turned on or off by the switching operation of the power switch 135a.

A control device assembly unit 75 is attached to the lower end of the base portion 119. The control device collective unit 75 generates and outputs predetermined electric power required by the payout control device 78 having a function of controlling the payout device 77 and various control devices, and is accompanied by the operation of the launch operation device 55 by the player. It includes a power supply and a launch control device 79 for controlling the launch of the game ball. The payout control device 78 and the power supply and launch control device 79 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 78 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

The back pack 73 is provided with an external terminal plate 81 in addition to the payout mechanism unit 74 and the control device collecting unit 75. The external terminal plate 81 is installed at the upper corner portion on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 on the rotation base end side of the back pack unit 15. The external terminal board 81 is a board for outputting a predetermined signal in order to make the management computer of the game hall recognize the state of the pachinko machine 10.

The payout control device 78 includes a payout control board that controls the payout device 77 in the board box 144. The signal of the payout command from the payout control device 78 to the payout device 77 is relayed by the back pack substrate 135 described above. Further, the payout control device 78 is provided with a state return switch 145. For example, when the state return switch 145 is pressed when a payout error such as a ball jam in the payout device 77 occurs, the ball jam is cleared.

In the power supply and launch control device 79, the power supply and the launch control board are housed in the board box 146, and the board generates and outputs predetermined electric power required by various control devices and the like, and further, the launch operation by the player. The launch of the game ball is controlled according to the operation of the device 55.
Further, the power supply and the firing control device 79 are provided with a RAM erasing switch 147. This pachinko machine 10 has a storage and retention function for various data so that it can retain the state at the time of a power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure and can return to the state at the time of a power failure when recovering from the power failure. It has become.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 11, the supply line of operating power and other power from the power supply and emission control device 79 to the main control device 71, the voice emission control device 72, the payout control device 78, the display control device 121, and the symbol display device 41. The supply line is indicated by a double line arrow, and the other signal lines are indicated by a solid line arrow.

The main control device 71 includes a main control board 91 that controls the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board (power failure monitoring board) 96 that monitors the power supply. The MPU 92 is mounted on the main control board 91. The MPU 92 contains a ROM 93 and a RAM 94.

The ROM 93 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention, such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory, as read-only. The ROM 93 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 92.

The RAM 94 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access and is the same. When compared with the data capacity of, the time required for reading is faster than that of ROM 93. The RAM 94 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed.

In addition to the above elements, the MPU 92 or the main control board 91 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be individually chipped. This also applies to control devices other than the main control device 71.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. An input / output port is provided, and the configuration may be such that the input / output port can be switched as needed. This also applies to the MPU of the control device other than the main control device 71. Various control devices are connected to the input side and the output side of the MPU 92, and various sensors, various drive units, and various display units are connected. First, a configuration related to connection with various sensors, various drive units, and various display units will be described.

On the input side of the MPU 92, winning detection sensors 31a, 32d, 33a provided for the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, the lower operating port 34, and the through gate 35 in the game area, 34c and 35a (hereinafter collectively referred to as winning detection sensors) are electrically connected via electrical wiring. In this case, the main control board 91 and each winning detection sensor may be connected via one electric wiring, or a relay board may be interposed in the middle of each signal path. This also applies to the configuration related to the connection with other devices. The MPU 92 receives a signal from each winning detection sensor, and makes a winning determination (ball winning determination) for each winning unit based on the reception result.

In addition to the above-mentioned winning detection sensors, a magnet detection sensor 24a and a radio wave detection sensor 24b are electrically connected to the input side of the MPU 92 via electrical wiring. The MPU 92 receives signals from the magnet detection sensor 24a and the radio wave detection sensor 24b, and determines the presence or absence of an abnormality to be detected based on the reception results.

On the output side of the MPU 92, an electric accessory drive unit 32c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 32b of the variable winning device 32 and an electric accessory drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 are electrically wired. It is electrically connected via. Further, on the output side of the MPU 92, the main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are electrically connected via electrical wiring. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 91, and the MPU 92 executes drive control of various drive units 32c and 34b and display control of various display units 43 and 44 through the driver circuits.

That is, the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 32c is executed in the MPU 92 so that the large winning opening 32a is opened and closed in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the electric accessory 34a is won in the open state, the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b is executed in the MPU 92 so that the electric accessory 34a is opened and closed. Further, at each game round, the display control of the main display unit 43 is executed in the MPU 92. Further, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a is clearly indicated, the display control of the accessory display unit 44 is executed in the MPU 92.

Incidentally, although the description by illustration is omitted, an external terminal plate 81 is connected to the output side of the MPU 92. The MPU 92 sets information in the RAM 94 according to the progress of the game. Then, the external terminal board 81 is set for signal output according to the information set in the RAM 94, and the state of the pachinko machine 10 is recognized by the management computer of the game hall.

The payout control device 78 includes a payout control board 101 that controls the payout of game balls through the payout device 77.

The payout device 77 is switched between a state in which the game ball supplied from the tank 76 to the payout device 77 is prevented from flowing down to the downstream side and a state in which the game ball is sent out to the downstream side. A payout motor 77a for driving a ball stop member such as a rotating body is provided, and a payout detection sensor 77b for individually detecting a game ball sent out to the downstream side is provided. A payout motor 77a is electrically connected to the output side of the payout control device 78 via electrical wiring, and a payout detection sensor 77b is electrically connected to the input side of the payout control device 78 via electrical wiring. Has been done. In the payout control device 78, the game ball is paid out by supplying a drive signal to the payout motor 77a through the driver circuit provided on the payout control board 101, and the payout is completed based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor 77b. Grasp the number of game balls played.

Further, the payout control board 101 is electrically connected to the ball rental connection terminal plate 105 provided on the back pack unit 15 through electrical wiring, and the ball rental connection terminal plate 105 is ball rental through electrical wiring. It is electrically connected to the device Y.

The ball lending device Y is a so-called CR unit, which is provided on the side of the outer frame 11 although the description by illustration is omitted, and a card insertion slot is provided on the front side of the ball lending device Y. By inserting the card into the card insertion slot and manually operating the ball lending operation device (not shown) provided in the pachinko machine 10, a number of game balls corresponding to the amount stored in the card can be rented out. You can receive it. The payout control device 78 executes ball lending control by transmitting and receiving an electric signal to and from the ball lending device Y.

It should be noted that what is inserted into the ball lending device Y when receiving the lending of the game ball is not limited to the card, and may be cash or a coin in which cash information is stored.
Further, in addition to the payout device 77 and the ball lending device Y, a fullness detection sensor for detecting whether the ball tray such as the lower plate 62a is full of game balls is electrically connected to the payout control board 101. At the same time, a ballless detection sensor for detecting whether the tank 76 is in a ballless state is electrically connected.

The voice emission control board 72a of the voice emission control device 72 is connected to the output side of the MPU 92. The voice emission control board 72a drives and controls the display lamp unit 58a, the error lamp unit 58b, and the speaker unit 59 based on the command received from the MPU 92, and transmits the command to the display control board 121a of the display control device 121. Further, the effect operation device 60 is connected to the voice emission control device 72, and the control of the indicator lamp unit 58a, the speaker unit 59, and the display control device 121 is executed based on the manual operation on the effect operation device 60. It is also designed to be. Further, a movable accessory 200 is connected to the voice emission control device 72, and the voice emission control device 72 drives and controls the drive units 205 and 206 based on the command received from the main control device 71.

The display control board 121a analyzes various commands received from the voice emission control device 72, performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the analysis result, and controls the display of the image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

The power supply and launch control device 79 includes a power supply and launch control board 111, and the power supply and launch control board 111 include a main control device 71, a payout control device 78, a voice emission control device 72, and a display control device 121. A power supply circuit 112 having a function of generating operating voltages required for various electric devices such as a control device, a symbol display device 41, a drive unit of various motors, lamps, and sensors is provided. The power supply circuit 112 is provided with a power supply unit 113 for turning on power and a power supply unit 114 for turning off power.

The power supply unit 113 for power-on is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like via a power switch 135a, and the main control device 71, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, The operating voltage required for each control device such as the payout control device 78, the voice emission control device 72 and the display control device 121, and various electric devices such as the symbol display device 41 is generated, and the generated operating voltage is used as each of the above. It supplies to control devices and various electric devices. As an outline, the power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on takes in the AC 24V power supply via the power supply switch 135a provided in the back pack unit 15, and supplies the + 24V voltage to the power failure monitoring board 96 of the main control device 71. , Generates + 12V voltage for driving various sensors, motors, etc., + 5V voltage for logic, etc. The power-on power supply unit 113 supplies a + 24V voltage to the power failure monitoring board 96 of the main control device 71, and supplies a + 5V voltage to each control device other than the main control device 71. Further, a + 12V voltage is supplied to each of the above control devices and the symbol display device 41. Here, the payout control device 78 and the voice emission control device 72 carry out various controls for various electric devices such as drive units of various motors and lamps and sensors, respectively, and the control targets thereof. + 12V voltage is supplied from each control device to each of the various electric devices. For example, a + 12V voltage is supplied to the various lamp units 58a and 58b and the drive units 205 and 206 of the movable accessory 200 via the voice emission control device 72.

As described above, the power switch 135a is provided on the back pack board 135, and can be switched on and off by the operation of the hall manager, and the power supply (main power supply) of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by the switching operation.・ It is turned off.

The main control device 71 is another control device (payout control device 78, voice emission control) that also receives power supply from the power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on while receiving power from the power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on. The device 72 and the display control device 121) have a function of controlling the power supply state. That is, the main control device 71 is configured to output a power supply permission signal (power supply command) to the power supply permission unit 113 at the time of power supply, and based on the power supply permission signal, the power supply for power supply at the time of power supply. In unit 113, a state of supplying + 5V voltage and + 12V voltage (power supply state) and + 5V voltage to each control device (payout control device 78, voice emission control device 72, display control device 121) other than the main control device 71. And, switching to a state in which + 12V voltage is not supplied (power cutoff state) is performed.

When the power is turned on by turning on the power switch 135a, the power supply permission signal output from the main control device 71 is operated to, for example, the HI level, so that a predetermined control device or a predetermined control device or a predetermined control device is used via the power supply unit 113 for power-on. Power is supplied to the electrical equipment of. Further, after the power is turned on, the power supply permission signal is operated to, for example, the LOW level, so that the power supply to the predetermined control device and the predetermined electric device is cut off. By such power interruption, it is possible to reduce the power consumption (power saving) of the pachinko machine 10 in the power-on state of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, the power switch 135a is on). However, the details of the power saving process will be described later.

In the main control device 71, a power failure monitoring board 96 is provided at a position in the middle of the power supply path between the power supply unit 113 for power-on and the MPU 92. The power failure monitoring board 96 monitors the voltage of + 24V, which is the maximum voltage generated by the power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on, converts + 24V into a + 5V voltage, and outputs the voltage to the MPU 92. Then, when this voltage becomes less than + 22V, it is determined that a power failure has occurred, and the output setting of the power failure signal (power failure signal) to the MPU 92 is assumed to correspond to the occurrence of the power failure (power failure). Specifically, a LOW level power failure signal is transmitted when it is determined that the power cutoff has not occurred, and a HI level power failure signal is transmitted when it is determined that the power cutoff has occurred. .. The relationship between LOW and HI may be reversed.

The power supply unit 114 for power interruption is composed of a capacitor as a power storage means, and is supplied from the power supply unit 113 for power on when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON (when power is supplied from a commercial power supply). It is charged by the electric power generated. Further, in a power cut state (when the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off) such as when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF or when a power failure occurs in the commercial power supply, the RAM 94 is discharged from the power supply unit 114 for power failure. The storage holding power (backup power) is supplied to the power supply. Therefore, even in such a situation, the information stored in the RAM 94 is stored and held without being erased while the storage holding power is being supplied from the power supply unit 114 at the time of power failure.

By the way, the capacity of the power supply unit 114 at the time of power failure may be any capacity as long as the information stored in the RAM 94 before the power supply is cut off can be held within a predetermined period of time, and in this embodiment, one day. It has a capacity that allows memory retention for about 2 days. Further, the power supply unit 114 for power failure is not limited to a capacitor, and may be a storage means such as a battery or a non-rechargeable battery. In the case of a non-rechargeable battery, it is not necessary to store electricity in the power supply unit 114 at the time of power failure when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is ON, but it is necessary to replace the battery periodically.

Further, when the voltage of + 24V becomes less than 22V, the drive voltage supplied to the MPU 92 via the power failure monitoring board 96 may fluctuate with respect to + 5V, and even if the MPU 92 is operated under such a situation, there is no problem. There is concern that it will reach. In this regard, in the power supply and the emission control board 111, even after the + 24V power supply becomes less than 22V, the control system is driven with respect to the MPU 92 by discharging the power supply unit 114 for a predetermined time from the power supply unit 114 at the time of power failure. It is configured to maintain the output of + 5V, which is the power supply, at a normal value. In this pachinko machine, for example, when the + 24V power supply becomes less than 22V, the MPU 92 executes the processing for power failure according to the power failure signal = HI output from the power failure monitoring board 96, but at the time of the power failure. Power is supplied to the MPU 92 from the power supply unit 114 at the time of power failure in a time sufficient for carrying out the processing for power failure (a time longer than several msec required for one processing of the MPU 92). As a result, the MPU 92 can normally execute and complete the process for power failure.

Further, as described above, the power failure monitoring board 96 outputs a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power failure to the MPU 92 when the input voltage from the power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on becomes + 22V. Here, the power failure monitoring board 96 is determined to have a drive voltage (for example, + 5V) required to output a power failure signal. When the input voltage to the power failure monitoring board 96 suddenly drops from a value larger than + 22V to a value smaller than the drive voltage, the power failure signal to the main control device 71 cannot be output. In this pachinko machine 10, the power failure monitoring board 96 has a parasitic capacitance not intended by design, and in reality, it is possible to operate for about 1 second after the input voltage becomes smaller than the drive voltage. ing. Therefore, even if the power supply from the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the main control device 71 is suddenly cut off, the main control device 71 is supplied with power by the power supply unit 114 for power failure and power failure monitoring. The power failure signal from the board 96 can be received, and the occurrence of a power failure can be detected. The operating time of the power failure monitoring board 96 in the situation where the input voltage suddenly drops is not limited to about 1 second, and is determined by the size of the parasitic capacitance of the power failure monitoring board 96.

Here, the configuration related to the supply of operating power from the power supply circuit 112 to the main control device 71, the payout control device 78, the voice emission control device 72, the display control device 121, and the symbol display device 41 will be described in detail.

The electric power from the power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on is supplied to the VCS terminal of the MPU 92 of the main control device 71, the input terminal of the payout control board 101, the input terminal of the sound emission control board 72a, and the input terminal of the display control board 121a. .. In a situation where power is supplied from a commercial power source by the power supplied to each terminal, various control processes are executed by each control device 71, 72, 78, 121.

On the other hand, the power from the power supply unit 114 for power failure is supplied to the VBB terminal of the MPU 92 of the main control device 71, but is supplied to the payout control device 78, the voice emission control device 72, and the display control device 121. No. That is, the memory holding power from the power supply unit 114 at the time of power failure is supplied to the RAM 94, but is not supplied to the RAM provided in the payout control device 78, the voice emission control device 72, and the display control device 121. Therefore, in a situation where the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off, the RAM 94 of the main control device 71 stores and holds the information, but the payout control device 78, the voice emission control device 72, and the display control device 121 are provided. Information is not stored and retained in the RAM.

As described above, the memory holding power from the power supply unit 114 at the time of power failure is supplied to the RAM 94 of the main control device 71, but the RAM provided in the payout control device 78, the voice emission control device 72, and the display control device 121. By adopting a configuration in which the power supply unit 114 is not supplied to the power supply unit 114, the capacity of the power supply unit 114 at the time of power failure can be reduced. As a result, the initial cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In addition to the power supply circuit 112, the power supply and launch control board 111 is provided with a launch control circuit 115 that controls the launch of the game ball. The launch control circuit 115 is provided with a transmission circuit 116 for satisfying the conditions, a launch permission receiving circuit 117, and a launch IC 118.

The condition-satisfying transmission circuit 116 has a function of transmitting a condition-satisfying signal in a predetermined signal form to the MPU 92 when a predetermined launch condition of the game ball is satisfied.

In the launch control circuit 115, the touch sensor 224 for the handle that detects that the operation handle 222 of the launch operation device 55 is touched by the player and the operation handle 222 are rotated as a configuration for determining the establishment of the launch condition. The ball stop switch 55b, which is manually operated by the player to stop the firing of the game ball even in the operated situation, is electrically connected. Although not shown, the launch control circuit 115 is electrically connected to the payout control board 101, and whether or not the ball lending device Y is electrically connected to the ball lending connection terminal plate 105. Input a signal indicating.

The transmission circuit 116 that satisfies the condition receives a signal (touch detection signal) indicating that the operation handle 222 is being touched by the player from the handle touch sensor 224, and is manually operated by the player from the ball stop switch 55b. When a signal indicating that the condition is not satisfied is received and a signal indicating that the ball lending device Y is connected is received from the payout control device 78, a HI level condition satisfying signal (condition is satisfied) to the MPU 92. Corresponding signal) is transmitted. If any of the above signals is not received, a LOW level condition satisfaction signal (a signal that does not correspond to the condition satisfaction) is transmitted to the MPU 92. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed.

The steering wheel touch sensor 224 is also connected to the main control device 71, and the touch detection signal output from the steering wheel touch sensor 224 is also input to the main control device 71. The main control device 71 determines whether or not the player is playing a game by monitoring the touch detection signal from the touch sensor 224 for the steering wheel, and based on the determination result, the mode from the normal mode to the power saving mode. Performs a determination as to whether or not to carry out the migration. By shifting to the power saving mode, it is possible to reduce the power consumption in the situation where the game is not played. The process for the power saving mode will be described in detail later.

The launch permission receiving circuit 117 is a HI level launch permission signal (launch permission) transmitted from the MPU 92, provided that the HI level condition satisfaction signal is transmitted from the condition satisfaction transmission circuit 116 to the MPU 92. It has a function of continuously supplying the signal corresponding to the launch permission signal to the launch IC 118 when the launch permission signal is received. When the MPU 92 does not receive the HI level condition satisfying signal from the condition satisfying transmission circuit 116, the MPU 92 transmits a LOW level launch permission signal (a signal that does not correspond to the launch permission), but the launch permission signal. The relationship between the LOW level signal and the HI level signal may be reversed. In addition, the MPU 92 newly starts transmitting the HI level emission permission signal each time it starts receiving the HI level condition satisfying signal, and launches the HI level when the reception of the HI level condition satisfying signal is completed. End the transmission of the permission signal.

When the launch IC 118 receives the HI level launch permission signal or the corresponding signal from the launch permission receiving circuit 117, the launch IC 118 is directed to each of the launch solenoid 54 and the ball feed device 53 of the game ball launch mechanism 51. It has a function to output a drive signal on a regular basis. In this case, the launch IC 118 outputs each drive signal as a pulse signal, and the output cycle is 0.6 sec. Further, the output timing of the drive signal is set earlier in the ball feeding device 53 than in the launch solenoid 54 so that the game ball is launched after one game ball is supplied to the launch rail 52. ..

The launch operation device 55 is provided with an operation handle 222 as described above, and the larger the amount of operation of the operation handle 222, the stronger the launch intensity of the game ball by the launch solenoid 54. In this case, the firing operation device 55 is provided with a variable resistor as an operation amount detecting means for detecting the operation amount of the operation handle 222, and the firing IC 118 is provided with a firing solenoid 54 through a voltage input from the variable resistor. The voltage of the drive signal supplied to the vehicle is adjusted to adjust the firing intensity. It is not essential that the adjusting function is provided in the firing IC 118, and an adjusting circuit may be provided in the middle of the signal path between the firing IC 118 and the firing solenoid 54.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery at MPU92>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery in the MPU 92 will be described with reference to FIG.

The MPU 92 uses various counter information during the game to perform a big hit generation lottery, a display setting of the main display unit 43, a symbol display setting of the symbol display device 41, a display setting of the accessory display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12, when the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery for generating jackpots, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 41 are displaced and fluctuate. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the variable type counter for determining the display duration in the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41. CS and are to be used. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 used for the lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 is set to the electric service open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter area 94a of the RAM 94.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. The information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the hold storage area 94b as the acquisition information storage means when a prize is generated in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. Will be done.

The hold storage area 94b includes a hold area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, according to the winning history of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. , Each numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer is stored as hold information in any of the hold areas RE1 to RE4.

In this case, in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, when the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first holding area RE1 → the second holding area RE1 → the second holding area. Each numerical information is stored in the order of RE2 → 3rd holding area RE3 → 4th holding area RE4 in chronological order. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls in the upper working port 33 or the lower working opening 34 can be held and stored. Further, the hold area RE is provided with a hold number storage area NA, and the hold number storage area NA is used to specify the number of winning histories stored in the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. Information is stored.

The number that can be stored on hold is not limited to 4, and may be any other number such as 2, 3, or 5 or more, or may be a single number.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first hold area RE1 of the hold area RE when starting the variable display of the main display unit 43, and at the start of one game round. Win / fail determination is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

The jackpot random number counter C1 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 94b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored as a hit / miss table (hit / miss information group) in the hit / miss table storage area as the hit / miss information group storage means in the ROM 93. As the pass / fail table, a pass / fail table for the low-probability mode (low-probability pass / fail information group) and a pass / fail table for the high-probability mode (high-probability pass / fail information group) are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning / losing lottery means.

In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the big hit is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the big hit is 20. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 94b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results are subject to two conditions: (1) a lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (2) a support mode in the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 after the opening / closing execution mode ends. By providing a difference, a plurality of jackpot results are set.

As an mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, the game is executed up to a predetermined number of round games. Here, the round game is a condition that either the predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses or the predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the large winning opening 32a. It is a game that continues until is satisfied. Further, the number of round games in the open / close execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is the same as the fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result triggered by the transition. Specifically, the maximum number of round games is set to 15 rounds (15R) regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, as one opening mode of the variable winning device 32, the opening duration (opening continuation period) from the opening of the large winning opening 32a to the closing is set to 29 sec.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the launch operation device 55 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 51 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec. NS. In addition, the maximum number of end conditions for round games is set to nine. Then, in the above-mentioned opening mode, the opening duration is set to be longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and one round game. Therefore, when the variable winning device 32 is opened once, it is expected that a maximum number of prizes will be awarded to the large winning opening 32a in one round game.

As a support mode in the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34, the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 is compared in a situation where the firing of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area. High-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency guide state) and low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) so that the frequency of opening states per unit time is relatively high or low. And are set.

Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery using the electric accessory release counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened when the electric accessory open state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and one more opening. The time is set long. In this case, when the electric accessory open state is won in the high frequency support mode and the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times, the electric accessory 34a is closed from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, a shorter time is secured as the minimum secured time for the next electric accessory opening lottery to be performed after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Is set to be selected.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the lower operating port 34 is won is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the upper operating port 33 is higher than that of the lower operating port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower operating port 34 is more likely than the upper operating port 33. The probability of winning a prize increases. Then, when a prize is won in the lower operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls held so much. be able to.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to be in the electric service open state per unit time is not limited to the above, for example, the electric accessory open lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric service open state in. In addition, the securing time secured for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed (for example, on the accessory display unit 44 based on the winning of the through gate 35). In a configuration in which multiple types of variable display times are prepared, the high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter reservation time is easier to select or the average reservation time is shorter than the low-frequency support mode. It may have been done. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed is shortened (that is,). , Shortening the one-time variable display time on the accessory display unit 44), shortening the average time of the securing time, and increasing the winning probability, any one condition or any combination of conditions is applied. This may increase the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 93. Then, a normal jackpot result and a probabilistic jackpot result are set as such distribution destinations.

The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

The probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the winning / losing lottery becomes a big hit state and the state shifts to the big hit state.

In relation to each of the above game states, the normal game state is not an open / close execution mode, but a state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode.

In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 14" corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and "15 to 29" corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result.

The reach random number counter C3 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 238, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 94b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, reach display is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. The reach display includes a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of a symbol (picture), and stops after the variable display in a game in which the open / close execution mode of the variable winning device 32 is executed. In a gaming machine in which the display result is a display result (special display result) corresponding to a jackpot, the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 41 is started. In the previous stage, it refers to a display state that makes the player think that it is a variable display state that tends to result in a special display result.

In the reach display, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode can be obtained by stopping and displaying some of the symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. A display state is included in which a combination of reach symbols that may be established is displayed, and in that state, the symbols are variablely displayed in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background image to produce a reach effect. , A combination of reach symbols is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G to perform a reach effect.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. Further, in the game round that does not shift to the open / close execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display by referring to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 93. If so, it will be executed.

The variation type counter CS has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 198, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 92 to determine the variation display time (display continuation period) in the main display unit 43 and the variation display time (display continuation period) of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated in each of the main processing and the timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, and is used to determine the variation pattern at the start of the variation display on the main display unit 43 and at the start of the symbol variation by the symbol display device 41. The value of CS is acquired. When determining the variable display time, the variable display time table stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area of the ROM 93 is referred to.

The electric accessory opening counter C4 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 250, and after reaching the maximum value, the counter returns to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric service holding area 94c provided in the RAM 94 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state according to the value of the stored electric accessory opening counter C4.

<About various processes executed by MPU92>
Next, each process executed for advancing the game in the MPU 92 will be described. The processing of the MPU 92 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S101, the power-on wait process is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until 1 sec elapses after the main process is started. Further, an HI level signal is output as a power supply permission signal from the output port of the main control device 71 to the power supply unit 113 at the time of power supply. The power supply permission signal is a signal for permitting power supply from the power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on to a predetermined control device or a predetermined device.

In the following step S102, access to the RAM 94 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the MPU 92 is set.

After that, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch provided in the power supply and the firing control device 79 is manually operated, and in the following step S105, whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag of the RAM 94. Is determined. Further, in step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed, and in the following step S107, whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined. judge.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality of the data stored and held by the checksum is confirmed, the process proceeds to step S108 in the same manner. In step S108, the RAM 94 is cleared as the initialization of the RAM 94. Then, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch is not pressed, step S109 is performed without executing the process of step S108, provided that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. Proceed to. In step S109, the power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 94 such as initialization of the power failure flag is set as an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the voice emission control device 72 in order to recognize the current gaming state. do. In addition, a payout initialization command indicating that the RAM of the payout control device 78 should be initialized is transmitted to the payout control device 78. Furthermore, interrupt enable is set to allow the occurrence of timer interrupt processing.

In step S109, the initialization process of the movable accessory 200 is also executed. In the initialization process of the movable accessory 200, the drive units 205 and 206 are driven and controlled so that the movable plates 201 and 202 of the movable accessory 200 are arranged at the game basic positions as shown in FIG. 9A. Command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 72.

After that, the process proceeds to the residual processing of steps S110 to S113. That is, although the MPU 92 has a configuration in which timer interrupt processing is periodically executed, a residual time is generated between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. This residual time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, and the residual process of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed by utilizing the irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual processing in steps S110 to S113 is an irregular process that is executed irregularly.

In the residual processing, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In the following step S111, the random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S112, the variation counter update process for updating the variation type counter CS is executed. The random number initial value counter CINI is provided in the RAM 94, and is used as an initial value of the jackpot random number counter used for lottery as to whether or not to generate a jackpot. Further, the variation type counter CS is also provided in the RAM 94, and is used as a random number for determining the display duration in the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41.

In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the RAM 94, the read numerical information is added by 1, and then the read source counter is overwritten. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, in step S113, the interrupt enable setting for switching from the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is permitted is set. After executing the process of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the process of steps S110 to S113 is repeated.

Here, as described above, in the residual processing, only the random number initial value update processing and the fluctuation counter update processing are set so as to be sandwiched between the interrupt prohibition processing and the interrupt permission processing, so that the timer interrupt processing is performed. Is always started immediately before step S110. Then, after the timer interrupt processing is completed, it is always sufficient to start from step S110, and the return address after the timer interrupt processing becomes unique. Therefore, it is not necessary to store the current return address at the start of the timer interrupt processing, and the processing load at the start of the timer interrupt processing is reduced.

Further, since the timer interrupt processing does not occur during the calculation of the predetermined data in the MPU 92, the data stored in the register of the MPU 92 at that time is saved to the RAM 94 at the start of the timer interrupt processing. It is not necessary to execute the above, and similarly, it is not necessary to execute the data return processing to the register of the MPU 92 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the processing load at the start of the timer interrupt processing is reduced, and the processing load at the end of the timer interrupt processing is also reduced.

Further, since the timer interrupt processing is not started during the update of the random number initial value counter CINI or the update of the variation type counter CS, the timer interrupt processing of these counters is performed even though these are being updated. It is possible to prevent the numerical information from being acquired and further update processing from being executed.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, a hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing in the MPU 92 will be described. A clock circuit is provided on the main control board 91 as a pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle, and a frequency dividing circuit is provided so as to exist in the middle of a signal path between the clock circuit and the MPU 92. Is provided.

The frequency dividing circuit functions as a frequency changing means for changing the cycle of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the start timing of the timer interrupt processing by the MPU 92. That is, the pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 92 at intervals of 4 msec, which is a specific period. The MPU 92 executes a process for confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as a rising edge or a falling edge of the pulse signal, and activates and executes the timer interrupt process on the condition that the occurrence of the specific signal form is confirmed as at least one condition. do.

In this case, if the occurrence of the above specific signal form is confirmed in a situation where the activation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer is changed from the state in which the interrupt is prohibited to the state in which the interrupt is permitted. Interrupt processing is started. That is, depending on the processing execution status of the MPU 92, the next timer interrupt processing may be started after 4.1 msec has elapsed from the start of the previous timer interrupt processing. If such an event occurs, the next timer interrupt processing may be started. The timer interrupt processing will be started after 3.9 msec has elapsed from the start of the immediately preceding timer interrupt processing.

However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency divider circuit is performed in a specific cycle such as 4 msec regardless of the progress of the process in the MPU 92, the timer interrupt process is basically started in the specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the MPU 92 is such that even if the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific cycle has elapsed since the previous timer interrupt processing was started, the timing next to the predetermined timing is used. In the timer interrupt processing in, the portion exceeding the specific cycle is absorbed, and in the timer interrupt processing in the next timing, it is set to be started at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed.

In the timer interrupt process, first, in step S201, it is determined whether or not the power saving mode flag is set. The power saving mode in-progress flag is provided in the RAM 94 and is set when the game has not been played for a predetermined period by the player. When the power saving mode flag is set, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the power saving mode. When the mode shifts to the power saving mode, the power supply to the predetermined control device and the predetermined electric device is stopped, and the power consumption is suppressed as compared with the normal mode. In addition, the power saving mode flag is cleared when the game is started by the player. When the power saving mode flag is cleared, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the normal mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S201, the normal mode processing of steps S202 to S225 is executed.

In step S202, the power failure information storage process is executed. In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board 96, and when the occurrence of a power failure is identified, the information on the gaming state at the time of the power failure is stored. Execute the power failure processing to do so. By executing the power failure information storage process, it is possible to restart the game in the same state as the game state before the power failure when the power failure is restored.

In the following step S203, the lottery random number update process is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. The jackpot random number counter C1 is a counter used for a lottery for generating jackpots, the jackpot type counter C2 is a counter used for determining the type of jackpot, and the reach random number counter C3 is when the symbol display device 41 comes off and fluctuates. It is a counter used for the reach generation lottery. Each of the above counters is provided in the RAM 94, and the counter value at the time of winning is stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 94 when the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is won. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is a counter used for lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 is in the electric accessory open state, and is provided in the RAM 94. In the electric accessory opening counter C4, the counter value at the time of winning is stored in the electric service holding area of the RAM 94 when the through gate 35 is won.

Specifically, as the lottery random number update process, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, and the read numerical information is added by 1 to each. After executing the process of overwriting the counter of the read source, the process of overwriting is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively.

After that, in step S204, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S205, the fluctuation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112. In the following step S206, the game stop determination process is executed. In the game stop determination process, it is determined whether or not the fraudulent activity is detected by the detection signal of the magnet detection sensor 24a or the radio wave detection sensor 24b in the timer interrupt process of the previous time or the previous time, and the fraudulent activity is detected. It is determined that the situation should stop the progress of the game, and the execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped. The fraud detection process is a process performed in step S212, which will be described later.

After that, in step S207, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped, and the processes after step S208 are executed on condition that the progress of the game is not stopped.

In step S208, the port output process is executed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, the process for outputting the output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32c and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the large winning opening 32a to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 32c is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set. The output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information for switching the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory drive unit 34b is started, and the information for switching to the closed state is set. If so, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

In the following step S209, the reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

In the following step S210, the signal received from each prize detection sensor is read, and the prize detection process for performing the process corresponding to the read information is executed. Further, in step S211 a timer update process for collectively updating the numerical information of a predetermined timer counter provided in the RAM 94 is executed.

In the following step S212, fraud detection processing for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred is executed. Specifically, the magnet detection sensor 24a or the radio wave detection sensor 24b monitors whether or not the detection signal is output. When the detection signal is output by the magnet detection sensor 24a or the radio wave detection sensor 24b, it is determined that the progress of the game should be stopped in step S206 of the next timer interrupt process.

In the following step S213, a launch control process for executing launch control of the game ball is executed. Further, in step S214, as the input state monitoring process, the disconnection confirmation of each winning detection sensor and the opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed based on the information read in the reading process of step S209. ..

In the following step S215, the special figure special electric control process for performing the execution control of the game times and the execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed. In the special figure special electric control process, when a prize is generated in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 in a situation where the number of reserved information stored in the holding storage area 94b is less than the upper limit number, at that time. The processing of storing each numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as hold information in the hold storage area 94b in chronological order is executed. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, it is determined whether or not the hold information corresponds to the jackpot winning on the condition that the hold information is stored and not during the game rotation or the open / close execution mode. Processing, and if it corresponds to the jackpot winning, the distribution determination processing for determining which jackpot result the pending information corresponds to is executed. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, not only the hit / fail judgment process and the distribution judgment process, but also whether or not the hold information corresponds to the reach occurrence when the hold information does not correspond to the jackpot winning. In addition to executing the reach determination process for determination, the duration selection process for selecting the duration of the game round is executed using the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time. Then, a variable command including information on the duration according to the result of each of these processes and a type command including information on the game result are transmitted to the voice emission control device 72, and the pattern on the main display unit 43 is changed. Start the display. As a result, one game round is started, and the effect for the game round is started on the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41.

If the jackpot is won, or if the jackpot is not won and the processing result of the reach determination process is the result corresponding to the occurrence of reach, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS is used to continue the game. By determining the duration corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display as the time, the voice emission control device 72 can specify the type of the reach display from the variation command.

Further, in the special figure special electric control process, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the game round during the execution of one game round, and if it is the end timing, the display corresponding to the game result is performed. , Execute the process of ending the game. In this case, a final stop command indicating that the game round should be ended is transmitted to the voice emission control device 72. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, when the result of the game round is the result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the process for starting the open / close execution mode is executed. At the time of this start, an opening command indicating that the open / close execution mode is started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 72. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. At each of these processes, an open command indicating that the round game is started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 72, and a closing command indicating that the round game is completed is transmitted to the voice emission control device 72. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, an ending command indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is terminated is transmitted to the voice emission control device 72, and a winning / failing lottery mode or a support mode after the opening / closing execution mode is set. Execute the process.

After executing the special figure special electric control process of step S215 in the timer interrupt process, the normal figure general electric control process is executed in step S216. In the Fuzu Fuden control process, when the through gate 35 has won a prize, the process for acquiring the numerical information of the electric accessory opening counter C4 is executed, and the numerical information is stored. The numerical information is determined to be open, and the opening determination is used as an opportunity to execute a process for producing an effect for a general drawing. Further, based on the result of the opening determination, a process of opening and closing the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 is executed.

In the following step S217, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S215 and S216, the output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the main display unit 43 in the first hold lamp unit 45 is set, and the output information is set. The output information is set so that the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the accessory display unit 44 is reflected in the second hold lamp unit 46. Further, in step S217, the output information for updating the display content of the main display unit 43 is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S215 and S216, and the display content of the accessory display unit 44 is set. Set the output information to be updated.

In the following step S218, the display content of the symbol display device 41 is set for standby display by shifting the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the demo display state in a situation where both the game times and the open / close execution mode are not executed. Execute the demo display process for.

The demo display state is a state in which the symbol display device 41 is performing a demo display (that is, a standby display). Further, the demo display is a predetermined demo waiting time (for example, after the confirmation time elapses after displaying the stop result of the previous game round or after the ending of the previous opening / closing execution mode is completed. When 0.1 sec) has elapsed, it means that the image of the start waiting effect is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, and the display lamp unit 58a and the speaker unit 59 perform the effect accordingly. ..

By the way, in the demo display on the symbol display device 41, an image in which the symbol displayed on the effective line is performing a predetermined operation, such as being in a horizontal swaying state without changing the symbol, is displayed. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a maker name, a model name, or a moving image with a predetermined character may be displayed. It may be a display configuration.

In the following step S219, processing for mode transition from the normal mode to the power saving mode (power saving mode transition processing) is executed based on the detection signal of the steering wheel touch sensor 224 after the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo display state. do. In this power saving mode transition process, when the detection signal of the handle touch sensor 224 is not input for 30 seconds in the demo display state, the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the power saving mode. When the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the power saving mode, a predetermined control device or a predetermined electric device other than the main control device 71, that is, a payout control device 78, a voice emission control device 72, a display control device 121, and various lamp units 58a, 58b. And the electric power to the drive units 205 and 206 is not supplied from the power supply circuit 112.

The mode transition conditions in the power saving mode transition process may be other than the above. For example, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the symbol variation in the symbol display device 41 ends, a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) elapses from the last winning of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. In any of these cases, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to shift to the power saving mode.

In the following step S220, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 78 are confirmed, and the payout state reception process for performing the process corresponding to the check result is executed. Further, in step S221, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed.

In the following step S222, in order to switch the state of the signal output to the external terminal board 81 so as to control the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time. Executes the external information setting process of. Further, in step S223, a process for editing the test firing test information is executed.

The demo display process in step S218 and the power saving mode transition process in step S219 will be described later individually.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S207, or after the processes of steps S208 to S223 are executed, the process proceeds to step S224. In step S224, the interrupt end declaration is set. In the MPU 92 of the main controller 71, once the timer interrupt processing is started, it is stipulated that the interrupt end declaration is set as one of the conditions for starting the next timer interrupt processing, and step S224. Now, the interrupt end declaration is set to enable the execution of the next timer interrupt process. Further, in step S225, interrupt permission is set. In the MPU 92, once the timer interrupt processing is started, it is set to the interrupt disabled state. Therefore, in step S225, the interrupt permission is set in order to enable the execution of the next timer interrupt processing. After that, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S201, the process proceeds to step S226 to execute the power saving time processing as the processing for the power saving mode and end the timer interrupt processing.

<Demo display processing>
The demo display process of step S218 will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric counter is "0". The special figure special electric counter is a counter whose value changes according to the processing executed in the special figure special electric control processing in the timer interrupt processing, and is provided in the RAM 94. When the special figure special electric counter is "0", it means that the effect for the game round is not executed and the open / close execution mode is not executed.

If it is determined in step S301 that the special figure special electric counter is not "0", the demo display process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that the special figure special electric counter is "0", the step Proceed to S302. In step S302, it is determined whether or not the demo display state is displayed. Specifically, whether or not the demo display state is set is determined by whether or not "1" is set in the demo display flag of the MPU 92.

If it is determined in step S302 that the demo display state is present, the demo display process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that the demo display state is not present, the process proceeds to step S303. In step S303, it is determined whether or not the demo display is waiting. The demo display waiting state means that the measurement of the demo waiting time has already started, and "1" is set in the demo waiting flag of the MPU 92.

If it is not in the demo display waiting state, the process proceeds to step S304, the demo waiting time information stored in advance in the ROM 93 is read, and the demo waiting time information is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. In the following step S305, the demo display waiting state is set by setting the demo waiting flag of the MPU 92 to "1". After that, the process for displaying this demo is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S303 that the demo display is waiting, it is determined in step S306 whether or not the special figure special electric timer counter is "0". The special figure special electric timer counter is a counter used for specifying the update timing of the special figure special electric counter according to the passage of time by the MPU 92, and is provided in the RAM 94. The special electric timer counter is a decrement counter, and is decremented by 1 for each processing time until it becomes "0" in the timer update processing executed in step S210 of the timer interrupt processing. If the special figure special electric timer counter is not "0", the process for displaying this demo is terminated.

When the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", the demo display state is set by setting the demo display flag of the MPU 92 to "1" in step S307. At this time, the demo waiting flag is cleared to "0" to cancel the demo display waiting state. In addition, the demo display state is released when the demo display flag is cleared to "0" when the effect for the game round is newly started.

In the following step S308, the demo start command is set as the output target. After that, the process for displaying this demo is terminated.

The demo start command is a command for causing the voice emission control device 72 to recognize that it is the timing to start the demo display. The voice emission control device 72 determines whether or not a demo start command has been received as a production command, and if the demo start command has been received, the production voice emission pattern corresponding to the demo start command. Executes the process for setting. Specifically, a data table for causing the effect corresponding to the demo display to be performed through the display lamp unit 58a and the speaker unit 59 is read from the ROM of the sound emission control device 72, and the demo display is performed according to the read data table. The effect of is performed by the display lamp unit 58a and the speaker unit 59.

Further, the voice emission control device 72 transmits a demo start command to the display control device 121.
The display control device 121 reads a data table from the ROM of the display control device 121 so that the effect for demo display is performed through the symbol display device 41 from the command, and the effect for demo display is performed according to the read data table. Is executed by the symbol display device 41.

When the demo start command is received, the display control device 121 repeatedly executes the demo display until the demo display state ends.

<Power saving mode transition process>
Next, the power saving mode transition process executed in step S219 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the power saving mode flag provided in the RAM 94 is set. The power saving mode flag is a flag set when a state in which there is no input of the steering wheel touch sensor 224 occurs for 30 seconds or more in the demo display state, and is a flag indicating that the power saving mode is in progress. The power saving mode flag is cleared when the power saving mode ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S401, the power saving mode transition process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S401, it is determined in the following step S402 whether or not there is a demo display state and there is no input from the handle touch sensor 224.

If a negative determination is made in step S402, the non-operation counter is cleared to "0" in step S403. The non-operation counter is provided in the RAM 94, and is a counter that indicates the elapsed time since the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo display state and there is no input from the handle touch sensor 224. The non-operation counter is incremented by 1 for each timer interrupt process when the affirmative judgment is made in step S402, and is cleared to "0" when the negative judgment is made in step S402. After executing step S403, the power saving mode transition process ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S402, the value of the non-operation counter is added by 1 in step S404.

After the execution of step S404, it is determined in step S405 whether or not the value of the non-operation counter is "7500" (corresponding to 30 sec). If a negative determination is made in step S405, the power saving mode transition process is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S405, the process proceeds to step S406, the power saving mode flag is set, and the non-operation counter is cleared in the following step S407.

In the following step S408, the power cutoff process is executed. In the power cutoff process, the main control device 71 sets the power supply permission signal to the power supply unit 113 for power-on of the power supply and the emission control device 79 to the LOW level. The power supply unit 113 for power-on stops the power supply to the predetermined control device and the predetermined electric device described above by inputting the LOW level power supply permission signal. After that, the power saving mode transition process is terminated.

In the power saving mode transition process, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the power saving mode when the power saving mode flag is set and the power cutoff process is executed. During the power saving mode, the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) executes a power saving processing different from the processing executed in the normal mode.
<Processing during power saving>
Next, the power saving processing executed in step S226 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, the special figure display process is executed in step S501. In the special figure display process, the main display unit 43 is displayed and controlled so that the plurality of segment light emitting units continue to light in a predetermined light emitting mode.

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the power saving mode, the indicator lamp unit 58a is in a state where power is not supplied, and the symbol display device 41 is in a predetermined display mode in the power saving mode (the stop image remains as it is). The player may recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is stopped or out of order because the state is such that the illuminance of the liquid crystal backlight is lowered. In this regard, by continuing to light the segment of the main display unit 43 in the special figure display process, the player can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in operation. In particular, the pattern display (special figure display) by the main display unit 43 is carried out by the main control device 71 according to the pachinko machine rules, and is mainly used by hall employees and the like who are aware of these rules. It is possible to confirm that the control device 71 is operating normally. As the display mode of the main display unit 43 in the power saving mode, it is desirable that the display mode continues to display a predetermined display mode (non-variable display) instead of the variable display. By making the display of the main display unit 43 in the power saving mode non-variable display, it is possible to differentiate from the variable display when the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit lottery.

In the following step S502, the counter update process is executed. In the counter update process, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory are released by executing the same process as the lottery random number update process executed in step S203 of the timer interrupt process. The counter C4 is updated.

In step S502a, a predetermined fraud monitoring process is performed during power saving. Specifically, as the fraud monitoring process, whether or not the detection signal is output by the magnet detection sensor 24a or the radio wave detection sensor 24b is monitored. In addition, an open sensor for detecting the opening of the front door frame 14 is provided, and based on the detection signal of the open sensor, it is monitored whether or not the front door frame 14 is illegally opened during power saving. You may. When it is determined that there has been a fraudulent act (for example, when the detection signal is output by the magnet detection sensor 24a or the radio wave detection sensor 24b), a signal to that effect is output to the management computer of the game hall. Alternatively, after waiting for the operation of the voice emission control device 72 to be restored by the power recovery process (step S505 described later), an error display command is output to the voice emission control device 72.

After that, in step S503, the touch sensor input monitoring process is executed. In the touch sensor input monitoring process, the level of the signal output from the handle touch sensor 224 is confirmed.

In the following step S504, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is output from the handle touch sensor 224. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a HI level signal is input to the terminal connected to the handle touch sensor 224.

If a negative determination is made in step S504, the power saving process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S504, the power recovery process is executed in step S505.

In the power recovery process, the main control device 71 sets the power supply permission signal to the power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on of the power supply and the emission control device 79 as the HI level. The power supply unit 113 for power-on starts supplying power to a predetermined control device and a predetermined electric device by inputting a power supply permission signal of HI level. Further, in the power recovery process, a notification stop command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 72. The voice emission control device 72 that has received the notification stop command arranges the drive units 205 and 206 so as to arrange the movable plates 201 and 202 of the movable accessory 200 at the game basic positions (positions shown in FIG. 9A) already described. Drive control.

When the power supply to the payout control device 78, the voice emission control device 72, and the display control device 121 is restarted along with the power recovery process, and the operation of each of these control devices is restarted, each of these control devices is activated. It is preferable that various commands are not output from the main control device 71 to each control device while the process is being executed. That is, the main control device 71 may start outputting the command after waiting for the completion of the activation processing in the payout control device 78, the voice emission control device 72, and the display control device 121. For example, the command output is permitted after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power supply permission signal was set to the HI level.

In the following step S506, the power saving mode flag is cleared and the power saving processing is terminated.

<Electrical configuration for power cutoff and recovery>
Next, the electrical configuration for executing the power cutoff process and the power recovery process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a circuit diagram showing a configuration for executing a power cutoff process and a power recovery process for the power supply unit 113 at the time of power supply provided in the power supply and launch control device 79.

The power supply unit 113 for power-on has an operating voltage with respect to the main control device 71, the payout control device 78, the voice emission control device 72, the display control device 121, and the symbol display device 41 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply. To supply.

The power supply unit 113 for power-on includes a voltage conversion circuit 230, output switching circuits 231a, 231b, 231c, and a reset circuit 236. The voltage conversion circuit 230 converts the AC 24V supplied via the power switch 135a into + 24V, + 12V, and + 5V voltages and outputs the voltage. In FIG. 18, a + 24V voltage is supplied to the power failure monitoring board 96 of the main control device 71, and to each control device (payout control device 78, voice emission control device 72, and display control device 121) other than the main control device 71. + 5V voltage and + 12V voltage are supplied, and + 12V voltage is supplied to the symbol display device 41.

The output switching circuits 231a, 231b, and 231c are in a state (power supply state) in which power is supplied from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to each control device (payout control device 78, voice emission control device 72, and display control device 121) and not. It switches between the state (power cutoff state).

The output switching circuits 231a, 231b, and 231c include output switching transistors 232a, 232b, and 232c, respectively. The output switching transistors 232a, 232b, and 232c are, for example, NPN transistors. The collectors of the output switching transistors 232a, 232b, and 232c are connected to the voltage output terminals (+ 5V output terminal, + 12V output terminal) of the voltage conversion circuit 230, and the emitters are the payout control device 78, the voice emission control device 72, and the sound emission control device 72. It is connected to the display control device 121. Further, the base is connected to the output port 235 of the main control device 71. In this case, a power supply permission signal is output from the output port 235, and the output switching transistors 232a, 232b, and 232c are turned on / off by the power supply permission signal.

When the power supply permission signal is at the HI level, the transistors 232a, 232b, and 232c are turned on, and the output voltage (+ 5V, + 12V) from the voltage conversion circuit 230 is the payout control device 78, the voice emission control device 72, and the display. It is applied to the control device 121. In this case, a predetermined voltage is applied to the various lamp units 58a and 58b and the movable accessory 200 (accessory drive unit) via the voice emission control device 72.

When the power supply permission signal is at the LOW level, the transistors 232a, 232b, and 232c are turned off, and the output voltages (+ 5V, + 12V) from the voltage conversion circuit 230 are the payout control device 78 and the voice emission control device 72. , Is not applied to the display control device 121. Since the power is not supplied to the voice emission control device 72, the power supply to the various lamp units 58a and 58b and the power supply to the movable accessory 200 (accessory drive unit) are stopped.

In the power saving mode transition process described above, since the LOW level power supply permission signal is output as the power cutoff process (step S408 in FIG. 16), the payout control device 78, the voice emission control device 72, and the display control are accompanied by the signal output. The power supply to the device 121 is cut off, the operation of each of these control devices is stopped, and the power supply to the various lamp units 58a and 58b and the power supply to the movable accessory 200 (accessory drive unit) are also combined. Is stopped. Then, when the power supply to the movable accessory 200 (accessory drive unit) is stopped, as described in FIG. 9C, both the movable plates 201 and 202 are in a predetermined appearance position due to their own weight, that is, A power saving message described on the movable plate 201 for power saving notification notifies that the symbol display device 41 appears at the front position of the screen and has shifted to the power saving mode. At this time, the power saving message of the movable plate 201 appears on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, which is considered to be the most visible (easy to pay attention to) to the player in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the pachinko machine is for the player. It will be possible to easily grasp that 10 is currently in the power saving mode.

However, a part of the display control device 121 and the symbol display device 41 are supplied with power from the voltage conversion circuit 230 without going through the output switching circuit, and the voltage is output from the voltage conversion circuit 230. That is, the power supply state is always maintained when the power switch 135a is on.

The display control device 121 includes an image data determination unit 240 that determines an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and an output control unit 241 that outputs image data determined by the image data determination unit to the symbol display device 41. Have.

The image data determination unit 240 and the output control unit 241 are each composed of an arithmetic processor, and the image data determination unit 240 outputs information for generating image data displayed by the symbol display device 41. Output to 241. The output control unit 241 has a storage unit 241a capable of storing image data for one screen, and the image data generated based on the information output from the image data determination unit is stored in the storage unit 241a. Remember. After that, the output control unit 241 outputs the image data stored in the storage unit 241a to the symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 displays an image corresponding to the image data output from the output control unit 241. The image data determination unit 240 outputs the information of the image for switching to the output control unit 241 based on the switching timing of the display image. Every time the information from the image data determination unit is input to the output control unit 241 the contents of the storage unit are updated, and the image displayed on the symbol display device 41 is switched.

In the display control device 121, the configuration of the power supply system is different between the image data determination unit 240 and the output control unit 241, and the image data determination unit 240 is driven by the voltage conversion circuit 230 via the output switching circuit 231a. Is supplied, the output control unit 241 is configured to be supplied with drive power from the voltage conversion circuit 230 without going through the output switching circuit 231a.

In the power saving mode, the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 is cut off to the image data determination unit 240 in the display control device 121, and the power supply is maintained to the output control unit 241. Further, as already described, power is also supplied to the symbol display device 41 in the power saving mode. In the power saving mode, the power from the voltage conversion circuit 230 is supplied to the output control unit 241 and the symbol display device 41, so that the symbol display device 41 displays an image corresponding to the image data stored in the storage unit 241a. It is possible to do. In the power saving mode, the update of the contents of the storage unit 241a is stopped because the power to the image data determination unit 240 is cut off. As a result, during the power saving mode, the image corresponding to the content of the storage unit 241a last updated before the transition to the power saving mode is continuously displayed as a stop image on the symbol display device 41.

Then, as the power recovery process, when the power supply permission signal is returned to the HI level (step S505 in FIG. 17), the power supply to the payout control device 78, the voice emission control device 72, and the display control device 121 is restarted accordingly. NS. Therefore, the operation of each of these control devices is resumed, and the power supply to the various lamp units 58a and 58b and the power supply to the movable accessory 200 (accessory drive unit) are also resumed. At this time, the movable accessory 200 (accessory driving unit) returns from the notification state shown in FIG. 9C to the non-notification state shown in FIG. 9A, so that the player has canceled the power saving mode. Easy to grasp.

Further, in the circuit configuration of FIG. 18, when the power is turned on to each control device (payout control device 78, voice emission control device 72, and display control device 121), a predetermined period immediately after the power is turned on is set as a reset period, and the reset period is set. Each of these control devices is configured to start operation after the lapse of time. That is, the power supply unit 113 for power-on is provided with a reset circuit 236, and the reset circuit 236 inputs + 5V to the reset input of each control device immediately after the power is turned on to each control device. When + 5V is input to the reset input, the payout control device 78, the voice emission control device 72, and the display control device 121 enter the standby state and do not start the operation. When 0V is input to the reset input, a LOW level signal is input, and the payout control device 78, the voice emission control device 72, and the display control device 121 start operating.

The reset circuit 236 is a circuit that instructs the start of operation of the payout control device 78, the voice emission control device 72, and the display control device 121, and includes a delay circuit 237 and a reset transistor 238. The delay circuit 237 delays the change in the input voltage for a predetermined period and outputs the output voltage, and the output side is connected to the reset transistor 238. The reset transistor 238 is composed of an NPN transistor, the base is connected to the output side of the delay circuit 237, the collector is connected to the output side of the output switching circuit 231a, and the emitter is grounded. The reset transistor 238 is turned on when a HI level signal is input, and is turned off when a LOW level signal is input or is not input.

Since the reset circuit 236 is provided, the HI level power supply permission signal is output from the main controller 71, and the output of the output switching circuit 231a is delayed by a predetermined period from the timing when it becomes + 5V (HI level). Therefore, the input of the output switching circuit 231b can be set to 0V (LOW level), and the output of the output switching circuit 231b can be delayed from the output of the output switching circuit 231a to be set to the LOW level.

The main control device 71 has a reset circuit 239 in itself, and the reset circuit 239 generates a reset signal delayed from the voltage input from the voltage conversion circuit 230, and starts the operation.

By delaying the reset input to the payout control device 78, the voice emission control device 72, and the display control device 121 from the voltage input, it is possible to start the operation of the game machine in a state where the voltage to the voltage input is stable. Become.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 has the following characteristic configurations as configurations for power cutoff and recovery.

A main control device 71, a payout control device 78, a voice emission control device 72, and a display control device 121 are provided as a plurality of control means, and the main control device 71 provided as the first control means is provided with a voltage conversion circuit 230. While the electric power is directly supplied, the electric power from the voltage conversion circuit 230 is supplied to the control devices other than the main control device 71 provided as the second control means via the output switching circuit 231. .. The voltage conversion circuit 230 generates electric power for driving each control device as a drive electric power generation circuit. The output switching circuit 231 is a power cutoff circuit capable of cutting off the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the second control means.

The main control device 71 executes a process (processes of steps S402, S405, and S504) for determining whether or not the transition condition to the power saving mode or the release condition of the power saving mode is satisfied, and determines whether or not power saving is necessary. Used as a means. When the transition condition to the power saving mode is satisfied, the main control device 71 outputs a LOW level power supply permission signal from the output port 235 to the output switching circuit 231 to cause another control device from the voltage conversion circuit 230. Cut off the power supply to. When the power saving mode release condition is satisfied, the voltage conversion circuit 230 supplies power to other control devices by outputting the HI level power supply permission signal from the output port 235 to the output switching circuit 231. Cut off. In this way, the main control device 71 can control the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the other control device by controlling the power supply permission signal.

Further, the main control device 71, which is the first control means, executes a power-on wait process (step S101) when supplying an external power source to issue a power supply command to the output switching circuit 231. A level power supply permission signal is output to execute power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to another control device. The process for the power supply command executed in the power-on wait process is the same process as the power return process (step S505) executed when returning from the power saving mode.

Further, a touch detection unit 225 is connected to the main control device 71 as a means for monitoring the game state of the player. Based on the detection result (game state monitoring result) of the touch detection unit 225, the main control device 71 determines that the player is in a non-game state in which the player has not played a game, thereby shifting to the power saving mode. I do.

Further, the main control device 71 sequentially updates the jackpot random number counter C1 within a predetermined numerical range in the normal mode in which the power is supplied from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the other control devices. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used when performing a lottery for whether or not to generate the open / close execution mode in the lottery random number update process in step S203 of the timer interrupt process. The main control device 71 executes the same process as the lottery random number update process in the counter update process of step S502 even during the power saving mode in which the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 is cut off to other control devices. doing.

Further, whether or not the main control device 71 gives a privilege to the player based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the wake of winning a prize in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34, which is a predetermined condition. Executes the processing of. Specifically, the jackpot lottery process is executed by the special figure special electric control process in step S215, and the jackpot lottery result is displayed by controlling the main display unit 43 provided as the lottery result display means.

The main control device 71 displays the main display unit 43 in a predetermined display mode in the power saving mode in which the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the control devices other than the main control device 71 is cut off. To control. Specifically, the special figure display process of step S501 for controlling the predetermined segment to continue to light in the light emitting mode is executed.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a movable accessory 200 as a notification means for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 is in the power saving mode in the power saving mode. The movable accessory 200 shifts from the non-notification state to the notification state as the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the voice emission control device 72 is cut off.

Further, as the main body of the power supply control of the plurality of control means when shifting to the power saving mode, the main control device 71 for determining whether or not to give the privilege to the player is defined. The other control device is a sub control device (payout control device 78, voice emission control device 72, and display control device 121) that executes various controls based on a control command from the main control device 71.

The pachinko machine 10 has the following characteristic configuration as a configuration of a movable accessory 200 provided as a notification means for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 is in the power saving mode.

On the front side of the pachinko machine 10, a symbol display device 41 and lamp units 58a and 58b are provided as operation units that operate in a manner visible to the player, and the operation units include a display control device 121 and a voice. It is controlled by the light emission control device 72. The display control device 121 and the voice emission control device 72 are connected to a power supply unit 113 for power-on as a power supply means for supplying drive power, and the display control device 121, the voice light emission control device 72, and the power supply unit for power-on are connected. An output switching circuit 231 capable of cutting off the power supply from the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the display control device 121 and the voice emission control device 72 is provided between the 113s. In the main control device 71, it is possible to detect that the pachinko machine 10 is in the non-gaming state by executing the processes of steps S402 and S405 in the power saving mode transition process as the gaming state detecting means. When it is detected that the pachinko machine is in a non-gaming state, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the power saving mode. When the mode shifts to the power saving mode, the output switching circuit 231 cuts off the power supply from the power supply unit 113 at the time of turning on to the display control device 121 and the voice emission control device 72. The movable accessory 200 is saving power to the player by shifting from the non-notification state to the notification state when the power supply to the display control device 121 and the voice emission control device 72 is cut off. Notify that.

Further, the movable accessory 200 is provided so as to be able to operate by supplying electric power from the power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on. The output switching circuit 231 supplies power via the display control device 121 and the voice emission control device 72 when the power supply from the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the display control device 121 and the voice emission control device 72 is cut off. The movable accessory 200 is also configured to cut off the power supply. The movable accessory 200 shifts from the non-notification state to the notification state as the power supply from the power supply unit 113 for power-on is cut off.

Further, the movable accessory 200 is provided with a movable plate 201 for notification provided with an information display unit 203 as notification information for the player to visually recognize that the power saving mode is in progress, and a power supply unit 113 for power-on. The movable plate 201, which is driven by electric power, is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 at the first position (specifically, the actual appearance position) and the second position is not visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 (specifically). Is provided with a drive unit 205 that moves with and from the game basic position). The movable plate 201 can be moved to the first position as the power supply from the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the drive unit 205 is cut off by the output switching circuit 231.

Further, the movable plate 201 is configured to be movable to the first position by its own weight and to be moved to the second position by being driven by the drive unit 205.

Further, the movable accessory 200 is provided with a movable plate 202 for production that can be moved between a position that can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10 and a position that cannot be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the production according to the progress of the game. The movable plate 202 is operated as.

Further, as the operation unit, a symbol display device 41, which is a display means for variablely displaying a symbol related to the game effect on the display screen G provided as a display area, is provided. The first position is a position in front of the pachinko machine 10 of the display screen G, and the second position is a position behind the center frame 42 provided as an enclosure surrounding the display screen G.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the movable accessory 200 as the first notification means, while the second notification means capable of notifying that the power saving mode is in the state where the power is supplied from the power supply unit 113 for power-on. The main display unit 43 is provided as a main display unit 43. When the power supply to the voice emission control device 72 is cut off by the output switching circuit 231, the power supply from the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the movable accessory 200 is cut off, and the power supply unit 113 for power-on Power is supplied to the main display unit 43.

Further, the main display unit 43, which is the second notification means, gives the player a privilege based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 when the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34, which is a predetermined condition, is won a prize. It is connected to the main control device 71 that determines whether or not to give. The main display unit 43 is provided as a lottery result display means whose display mode is controlled by the main control device 71 in order to display the lottery result of the privilege grant. When the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the power saving mode, the power supply from the power-on power supply unit 113 to the main control device 71 is continued, and the main display unit 43 is supplied with power from the power-on power supply unit 113. In the state of being in, it notifies that it is in the power saving mode.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 has the following characteristic configuration as a configuration for displaying the symbol display device 41 in the power saving mode.

The symbol display device 41 is provided as a symbol display means for variablely displaying a symbol, and the display content thereof is controlled by a display control device 121 as a display control means. A power supply unit 113 for turning on is provided as a power supply means for supplying driving power to the symbol display device 41 and the display control device 121. In the display control device 121, a first image display control means for determining the image data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 while being sequentially updated, and an image data determined by the first image display control means are input. A second image display control means is provided, which stores the image data in the storage unit each time the input is made and outputs the stored image data to the symbol display device 41. Specifically, an image data determination unit 240 is provided as the first image display control means, a storage unit 241a is provided as the storage unit, and an output control unit 241 is provided as the second image display control means.

The power supply unit 113 for power-on separately includes a supply path for supplying power to the image data determination unit 240 as the first image display control means and the output control unit 241 as the second image display control means. ing. When it is detected that the pachinko machine 10 is in a non-gaming state in the processing of steps S402 and S405 in the power saving mode transition processing of the main control device 71, the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the image data determination unit 240. While the power supply in the supply path is cut off, the power supply in the supply path to the output control unit 241 is continuously performed.

<Display control when the power is turned on>
In the present embodiment, when the power is turned on to the display control device 121 when the power switch 135a is turned on or returned from the power saving mode, it is used for the display effect on the display control device 121 immediately after the power is turned on. Of all the image data to be processed, the predetermined image data defined as regular data is transferred from the ROM area to the RAM area, and is displayed depending on whether the data transfer is before or after the completion. The composition is such that the content of the production is changed. Specifically, the display effect will be simplified before the data transfer is completed. For example, no notice is displayed, and normal reach is used instead for all reach production. The configuration related to the effect executed by the display control device 121 will be described below.

<Electrical configuration related to display control>
First, the electrical configuration related to the display control of the symbol display device 41 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 97 is mounted on the voice emission control board 72a provided in the voice emission control device 72. The MPU 97 is a ROM 98 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 97, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 98 is executed. A certain RAM 99, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built in.

The MPU 97 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. An effect operation device 60 and a main control device 71 are connected to the input side of the MPU 97, and various lamp units 58a and 58b, a speaker unit 59, a movable accessory 200, and a display control device 121 are connected to the output side of the MPU 97. It is connected.

The MPU97 includes game times control commands (game times control information) such as variable commands, type commands, and variable end commands, and jackpot production commands such as opening commands, ending commands, open commands, and closing commands (big hit effects). Commands such as information) are received from the main control device 71, and various lamp units 58a and 58b and the speaker unit 59 are driven and controlled based on the received commands.

Further, the MPU 97 transmits each of the above commands received from the main control device 71 to the display control device 121 while maintaining the information form. Further, the MPU 97 determines whether or not the operation generation signal is received from the effect operation device 60, thereby determining whether or not the effect operation device 60 is being operated, and is operated. If it is determined to be present, an operation occurrence command is transmitted to the display control device 121.

The display control device 121 includes a display control board 121a on which a display CPU 302, a program ROM 303, a work RAM 304, a video display processor (VDP) 305, a character ROM 306, and a VDP side RAM 308 are mounted. The display CPU 302 and each memory (program ROM 303, work RAM 304, etc.) used for controlling the display CPU 302 correspond to the image data determination unit 240 of FIG. 18, and the VDP 305 and the output port 336 correspond to the output control unit 241 of FIG. do.

The display CPU 302 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 121. Specifically, the display CPU 302 is connected to the input port 311 mounted on the display control board 121a via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the voice emission control device 72 are input to the display CPU 302 through the input port 311. Will be done. Further, the display CPU 302 is connected to the program ROM 303 and the work RAM 304 via a bus.

The program ROM 303 is a control non-volatile storage unit for storing control information such as various control programs executed by the display CPU 302 and fixed value data. The program ROM 303 is a non-volatile semiconductor memory, and in detail, a NOR type flash memory is used. The storage capacity is 256 Mbits, but such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display CPU 302 is satisfactorily executed. A part of the fixed value data is stored in advance in each area 303a to 303d of the program ROM 303. Details of each of these areas 303a to 303d will be described when the processing executed by the display CPU 302 is described.

The work RAM 304 is a control volatile storage unit for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the display CPU 302. The work RAM 304 is a volatile semiconductor memory, and DRAM is used in detail. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and SRAM may be used. The storage capacity is 64 Mbits, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display CPU 302 is satisfactorily executed. The work data, flags, and the like are stored in the areas 304a to 304d of the work RAM 304. Details of each of these areas 304a to 304d will be described when the process executed by the display CPU 302 is described.

The display CPU 302 uses the program ROM 303 and the work RAM 304 to execute arithmetic processing based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 72. Further, the display CPU 302 is connected to the VDP 305 via a bus. Then, the display CPU 302 executes a control for giving a predetermined instruction to the VDP 305 as a result of the above arithmetic processing.

The VDP 305 has a control ROM 331 and a control RAM 332, and has a function of transferring a part of the data stored in the character ROM 306 to the VDP side RAM 308 based on the instruction by the display CPU 302. Further, the VDP 305 has a function of performing drawing processing on the symbol display device 41 by specifically processing the data using the data stored and held in the character ROM 306 and the VDP side RAM 308 based on the instruction by the display CPU 302. have. Specifically, the VDP 305 is a kind of drawing circuit (drawing means or drawing control unit) that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP305 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing.

The character ROM 306 is a non-volatile storage unit for image data (image information) for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 41 and background data. The character ROM 306 is a non-volatile semiconductor memory, and in detail, a NAND flash memory is used. Since the character ROM 306 is provided with two 8 Gbit NAND flash memories, the storage capacity is 16 Gbits. The character ROM 306 stores and holds bitmap format image data of various characters, a color palette table to be referred to when determining a display color at each dot of the bitmap image, and a JPEG format for a background image. Image data is stored and retained.

The VDP 305 is connected to the VDP side RAM 308 via a bus. The VDP side RAM 308 is a volatile storage unit for image base data (image information) for temporarily storing and holding the base data for image data generation stored and held in the character ROM 306 for reading the data in the VDP 305. .. The VDP-side RAM 308 is a VRAM (video RAM) made of a volatile semiconductor memory, and in detail, SDRAM is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM or dual port RAM may be used. The storage capacity is 512 Mbits because two 256 Mbit SDRAMs are provided as the VDP side RAM 308. That is, the storage capacity of the VDP side RAM 308 is set to be smaller than the storage capacity of the character ROM 306.

The VDP 305 accesses the VDP side RAM 308 based on the instruction by the display CPU 302 (the image data determination unit 240 in FIG. 18), and draws the image data for display output corresponding to the instruction by the display CPU 302 in the control RAM 332 of the VDP 305. It is created in the area 335 (storage unit 241a in FIG. 18). The drawing area 335 can store data for one frame in the symbol display device 41. Further, the VDP 305 is connected to an output port 336 mounted on the display control board 121a, and the output port 336 is connected to the symbol display device 41. Then, the VDP 305 (output control unit in FIG. 18) outputs a drawing signal to the symbol display device 41 based on the image data stored in the drawing area 335, and is predetermined on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. Display the image.

By the way, the voltage from the voltage conversion circuit 230 is always supplied to the VDP 305, the output port and the symbol display device 41, and the LOW level power supply permission signal is output from the output port 235 to the output switching circuits 231a and 231c. Even in this case, it is possible to display a predetermined image on the symbol display device 41 based on the image data stored in the drawing area 335.

As described above, by using the NAND flash memory as the character ROM 306, it is possible to increase the capacity while suppressing the manufacturing cost as compared with the configuration using the NOR flash memory. Further, by using the NAND flash memory, rewriting can be repeated at the development stage of the pachinko machine 10, and the development cost can be suppressed.
However, the NAND type flash memory has a slower data transfer speed than the NOR type flash memory. For example, the NOR type flash memory has 360 Mbit / sec, while the NAND flash memory has 60 Mbit / sec.

On the other hand, since the reading RAM such as the VDP side RAM 308 is provided as described above, the image base data necessary for generating the display output image data can be read into these RAM 308 in advance. Therefore, at the drawing timing in the VDP 305, the image data in the VDP 305 can be satisfactorily created by reading the image base data from the VDP side RAM 308 instead of the character ROM 306.

The storage capacity of the character ROM 306 and the specific storage capacity of the VDP side RAM 308 are arbitrary. Further, the individual storage capacity and the number of memories of each memory constituting the character ROM 306 are arbitrary, and the independent storage capacity and the number of memories of each memory constituting the VDP side RAM 308 are also arbitrary.

Here, a regular area 337 is set in the VDP side RAM 308. Of the various image base data stored in the character ROM 306, the image base data corresponding to the drawing instructions frequently used by the display CPU 302 is stored in the regular area 337, and the image stored in the regular area 337 is stored. The data will basically be resident.

Specifically, the regular data group stored in the regular area 337 is stored and retained as long as the situation in which the drawing instruction of the corresponding image can be generated continues. Further, even if a drawing instruction of the corresponding image is generated and the image is displayed once, the memory is retained in a situation where a new drawing instruction may be generated thereafter. Furthermore, at least a part of the regular data group is stored and retained until a predetermined erasing condition is satisfied, even if it is no longer possible to generate a drawing instruction of the corresponding image. Since the regular area 337 is provided, even if the display CPU 302 frequently gives a drawing instruction, the VDP 305 can satisfactorily draw an image corresponding to the drawing instruction by accessing the regular area 337. ..

Next, the software configuration of the character ROM 306 will be described. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the software configuration of the character ROM 306.

The character ROM 306 has a large number of unit areas for storing unit data. Unit data is stored individually for each of the large number of unit areas. Then, a data group for displaying an image pattern to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 over a predetermined period is configured by the unit data of a predetermined combination, and one for a plurality of types of image patterns. Data groups are set in a one-to-one correspondence.

The plurality of types of data groups include a first background data group, a normal symbol data group, a second background data group, a third background data group, a demo display data group, and a notice A data group. At least a group, a data group for advance notice B, a data group for normal reach, a data group for super reach, a data group for probabilistic jackpot, and a data group for normal jackpot are set.

The first background data group, the second background data group, and the third background data group are data groups for displaying a background image in a situation where variable display by a normal symbol is performed. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which the display mode is switched according to the operation of the effect operation device 60, and the first background data group displays the background image corresponding to the first display mode. The second background data group is a data group for displaying a background image corresponding to the second display mode.

The normal symbol data group is a data group for displaying a normal symbol. As shown in FIG. 6, the normal symbol includes nine types of main symbols and one type of sub-symbol, and a data group corresponding to each symbol is set.

The demo display data group is a data group for displaying an image when the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo display state.

The data group for the notice A and the data group for the notice B are data groups for displaying an image of the notice display which is a kind of expected effect in the middle of the game. In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of notice displays are set in different display modes, specifically, two types of notice A and notice B, and a data group is set corresponding to each notice display. ing.

The normal reach data group is a data group for displaying an image of the normal reach display among the reach displays which is a kind of expected effect in the middle of the game round.

The data group for super reach is a data group for displaying an image of the super reach display among the reach displays which is a kind of expected effect in the middle of the game. By the way, the super reach display is a reach display for expecting the player to generate a jackpot result more than in the case of the normal reach display, and when the super reach display occurs, the normal reach display is used.

The probability variation jackpot data group is a data group for displaying an image of the jackpot effect performed by the symbol display device 41 during the opening / closing execution mode when the probability variation jackpot result is obtained. The jackpot production corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result includes a jackpot start production, a production corresponding to each round, and a jackpot end production, and the data group for the probability variation jackpot is used to display an image of each of these effects. Contains data groups.

The normal jackpot data group is a data group for displaying an image of a jackpot effect performed by the symbol display device 41 during the opening / closing execution mode when a normal jackpot result is obtained. The jackpot effect corresponding to the normal jackpot result includes a jackpot start effect, an effect corresponding to each round, and a jackpot end effect, and the normal jackpot data group is used to display an image of each of these effects. Contains data groups.

Of the above data groups, the first background data group, the normal symbol data group, the second background data group, the third background data group, and the demo display data group are the pachinko machine 10. This is a regular data group that is transferred to the regular area 337 of the VDP side RAM 308 and stored (resident) in the regular area 337 when the power is turned on.

Since each background data group and the normal symbol data group are set as the regular symbol data group, the symbol display device 41 can immediately start the variable display of the symbol when the start condition of the game round is satisfied. It will be possible. That is, the winning of the operating ports 33 and 34 provided in the game area occurs at an arbitrary timing, and the winning of the operating ports 33 and 34 is newly generated in the situation where the hold information is not stored. When the hold information is acquired, the game times related to the hold information will be started immediately. In this case, if the background data group and the normal symbol data group are read from the character ROM 306 to the VDP side RAM 308 after the acquisition of the hold information is specified, the reading speed of the character ROM 306 is slow. As a result, the start of the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 is delayed accordingly.

On the other hand, since each background data group and normal symbol data group are set as regular data groups, even if a prize is generated in the operation ports 33 and 34 at an arbitrary timing, each of them at that time. Since the background data group and the normal symbol data group are read out in the regular area 337, it is possible to immediately display the image of the variable display of the symbol.

<Processing configuration related to display control of the symbol display device 41>
Next, the processing configuration related to the display control of the symbol display device 41 will be described. In the display control device 121, various processes are executed by the display CPU 302, and various processes are executed by the VDP 305 based on the instruction by the display CPU 302 to control the display of the symbol display device 41.

The processing executed by the display CPU 302 includes a main processing executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and a normal processing executed after the main processing, and each processing is predetermined for the VDP 305. The instructions are executed. Hereinafter, the main process of the display CPU 302 and the process of the VDP 305 executed based on the instruction in the main process will be described, and then the normal process of the display CPU 302 will be described.

<Main processing of display CPU 302>
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the display CPU 302. As shown in FIG. 21, in step S601, the instruction processing of the initial setting of the regular data group is executed.
In the instruction processing, the initial setting command for the VDP 305 read from the command storage area (instruction information storage means) 303a of the program ROM 303 is transmitted to the VDP 305.
By receiving the initial setting command, the VDP 305 executes a process for transferring the regular data group from the character ROM 306 to the regular area 337 of the VDP side RAM 308.

After executing the instruction processing of the initial setting of the regular data group in step S601, the process proceeds to step S602. In step S602, it is determined whether or not the transfer of the first background data group to the regular area 337 is completed. The determination is made by determining whether or not the write completion signal corresponding to the first background data group is received from the VDP 305.

When the transfer of the first background data group to the regular area 337 is not completed, the process of step S602 is repeatedly executed, and the transfer of the first background data group to the regular area 337 is completed. To step S603. In step S603, the drawing instruction processing of the first background image is executed. Specifically, the drawing list information corresponding to the first background image is read from the drawing list information storage area 303b of the program ROM 303 so that the first background image is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. , The read drawing list information is transmitted to VDP305.

Here, the drawing list information is information in which drawing instructions for one frame on the display screen G are set, and is a color palette for determining the data information of the bitmap image and the display color of each dot of the bitmap image. Contains table information.

In the following step S604, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the display of the first background image. The measurement of the end timing is performed by using the end timing counters of the various counter areas 304c provided in the work RAM 304, and when the end timing counter is first executed with the drawing instruction processing of the inspection image. Information on the end reference value is set.
Then, every time a negative determination is made in step S604, the value of the end timing counter is updated to be subtracted by 1, and when the value of the end timing counter becomes "0", it is affirmed in step S604. Make a judgment. The configuration related to the measurement of the end timing is the same in step S607, which will be described later.

If it is determined in step S604 that it is not the end timing, the drawing instruction processing of the first background image is executed again in step S603. In the drawing instruction processing of the inspection image in this case, it is determined whether or not it is the drawing instruction timing of the new first background image, and if it is the drawing instruction timing, the drawing list information corresponding to the inspection image is again displayed as VDP305. Send to. That is, the drawing list information corresponding to the inspection image is transmitted to the VDP 305 every time the drawing instruction timing is reached until the end timing is reached. If it is determined in step S604 that the end timing is reached, the process proceeds to step S605.

In the following step S605, it is determined whether or not the transfer of the normal symbol data group to the regular area 337 is completed. The determination is performed by determining whether or not a write completion signal corresponding to the normal symbol data group is received from the VDP 305.

If the transfer of the normal symbol data group to the regular area 337 is not completed, the process of step S605 is repeatedly executed, and if the transfer of the normal symbol data group to the regular area 337 is completed, the transfer is completed. , Step S606. In step S606, the drawing instruction processing of the normal symbol image is executed. Specifically, the drawing list information corresponding to the normal symbol image is read from the drawing list information storage area 303b of the program ROM 303 so that the normal symbol image is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. The read drawing list information is transmitted to the VDP 305.

In the following step S607, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the display of the normal symbol image. Similar to step S604, such end timing measurement is performed using end timing counters of various counter areas 304c provided in the work RAM 304.

If it is determined in step S607 that it is not the end timing, the drawing instruction processing of the normal symbol image is executed again in step S606. When it is determined in step S607 that the end timing is reached, the main process is shifted to the normal process.

In addition, in FIG. 21, the order of each process is arbitrary, and for example, the process of steps S602 to S604 and the process of steps S605 to S607 may be interchanged before and after.

<Process executed by VDP305 at the time of initial setting>
Next, the process executed by the VDP 305 at the time of the initial setting instruction process (step S601) by the display CPU 302 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the initial transfer process in the VDP 305. In VDP305, the VDP side main process including a plurality of types of processes is repeatedly started in a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec), and the initial transfer process is set as a part of the VDP side main process. ..

As shown in FIG. 22, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the initial setting command is received from the display CPU 302. If the initial setting command has not been received, in step S702, it is determined whether or not the normal data group is in the initial setting state. If it is not in the initial setting state of the regular data group (step S702: NO), the initial transfer process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the initial setting command is received (step S701: YES), the state of VDP305 is set to the initial setting state of the regular data group in step S703. Here, when setting various states, the setting flag corresponding to the state to be set is stored in the control RAM 332 of the VDP 305, and when releasing various states, the setting flag corresponding to the state to be released is deleted. .. This also applies to the setting and cancellation of other states.

Further, in step S703, the initial transfer table corresponding to the initial setting is read from the control ROM 331 of the VDP 305 to the control RAM 332. In the initial transfer table, address information of an area to be referred to when reading data from the character ROM 306 and reference order information when the address information is sequentially referred to are set.

After executing the process of step S703, the process proceeds to step S704. Further, when it is determined in step S702 that the normal data group is in the initial setting state, the process proceeds to step S704.

In step S704, a writing process for writing the unit data to be read in the character ROM 306 to the regular area 337 of the VDP side RAM 308 is executed. In this case, in the initial transfer table, information for specifying in the VDP 305 which address unit area in the regular area 337 the unit data is to be written is set. In VDP305, when the unit data is written in the regular area 337, the unit data is written in the unit area of the regular area 337 defined in advance. At this time, writing is performed for each predetermined unit data for any of the data groups included in the regular data group.

In the following step S705, it is determined whether or not the writing of the group of image data groups is completed. The determination is made by referring to the initial transfer table to determine whether or not it is the timing when writing is completed for the unit data in the last order among a large number of unit data set as a group of image data groups. Do by.

If the writing is not completed, the initial transfer process is terminated as it is. When the writing is completed, in step S706, a writing completion signal for causing the display CPU 302 to recognize that the writing to the regular area 337 is completed for the predetermined image data group is transmitted to the display CPU 302. .. The write completion signal is set so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with each image data group, and in step S706, the corresponding write completion signal is transmitted to the display CPU 302.

In the following step S707, the write completion process is executed. In the writing completion process, a process for making the image data group stored in the regular area 337 identifiable by the VDP 305 is executed. Specifically, the control RAM 332 of the VDP 305 is set with a data group flag storage area in which there is a one-to-one correspondence with the image data group that may be written in the regular area 337. In the writing completion process, the data group flag is stored in the data group flag storage area corresponding to the image data group for the image data group determined in step S705 that the writing to the regular area 337 is completed. The flags stored in each data group flag storage area are deleted when the corresponding image data group is deleted from the regular area 337.

In the following step S708, it is determined whether or not the initial setting is completed. The determination is made by referring to the initial transfer table to determine whether or not it is the timing when writing is completed for the image data group in the last order among the plurality of image data groups set as the regular data group. Do it by. If the initial setting is not completed, the initial transfer process is terminated as it is, and if the initial setting is completed, the initial setting state of the regular data group is canceled in step S709, and then the initial transfer process is performed. finish.

<Processing executed by VDP305 for drawing instructions>
Next, the process executed by the VDP 305 in response to the drawing instruction will be described. As the processing executed by the VDP 305 in response to the drawing instruction, a drawing data setting process and a drawing signal output process are set. Hereinafter, the drawing data setting process will be described first, and then the drawing signal output process will be described.

<Drawing data setting process>
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a drawing data setting process in the VDP 305.
In step S801, it is determined whether or not the drawing list information is received from the display CPU 302. If it has not been received, the present setting process is terminated as it is, and if it has been received, the process proceeds to step S802.

In step S802, it is determined whether or not the data corresponding to the information in the drawing list is stored in the regular area 337. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the data group flag related to the data corresponding to the information in the drawing list is stored in the control RAM 332 of the VDP 305.

When the data corresponding to the information of the drawing list is stored in the regular area 337, the necessary data is read from the regular area 337 in step S803, and the read data is read out in the drawing area 335 of VDP305 in step S804. Write to. After that, in step S805, it is determined whether or not the creation of the image data corresponding to the information of the drawing list this time is completed. If the creation is not completed, the processes of steps S803 and S804 are repeatedly executed. If the creation is completed, the setting process of the drawing data is terminated.

On the other hand, when the data corresponding to the information in the drawing list is not stored in the regular area 337 (step S802: NO), in step S806, the necessary data is read from the change area, that is, the character ROM 306. Then, the read data is written in the drawing area 335 of the VDP 305 in step S807. After that, in step S808, it is determined whether or not the creation of the image data corresponding to the information of the drawing list this time is completed. If the creation is not completed, the processes of steps S806 and S807 are repeatedly executed. If the creation is completed, this setting process ends.

The drawing data created by the processes of steps S806 to S808 is executed when the drawing list information is output based on the drawing instruction processing such as the notice display and the reach display.

<Output processing of drawing signal>
Next, the output processing of the drawing signal will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not it is the output timing of the drawing data. The information on the output timing of the drawing data is included in the information on the drawing list corresponding to the drawing data. If it is not the output timing of the drawing data, the main output process is terminated as it is. If it is the output timing of the drawing data, the process proceeds to step S902.

In step S902, the drawing area 335 is referred to, and in step S903, the drawing signal corresponding to the referred data is output to the symbol display device 41 through the output port 336. After that, in step S904, it is determined whether or not the drawing process of the image corresponding to the drawing data of this time is completed. If the drawing process is not completed, the processes of step S902 and step S903 are repeatedly executed. When the drawing process is completed, the output process of the main drawing signal is terminated.

<Normal processing of display CPU 302>
Next, processing in the normal processing of the display CPU 302 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing normal processing. The normal process is executed after the main process is completed, and is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec) after the main process is completed.

In step S1001, the game turn control process for displaying the effect for each game turn on the symbol display device 41 is executed. In the following step S1002, the jackpot control process for displaying the effect for the open / close execution mode on the symbol display device 41 is executed.

The jackpot control process includes an effect control process for controlling the effect for the jackpot from the end of the game round that results in the probability variation jackpot until the end of the open / close execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result, and the normal jackpot result. An effect control process for controlling the effect for the jackpot from the end of the game round to the end of the open / close execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result is set.

In the following step S1003, a background image control process for displaying any one of the first background image, the second background image, and the third background image as the background image displayed on the symbol display device 41 is executed. In the background image control process, a process of determining the background image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is performed according to the value of the counter provided for the background. The value of the counter provided for the background is updated based on the occurrence of the operation of the effect operation device 60.

In the following step S1004, a demo display process for displaying the effect for demo display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. In the demo display process, it is first determined whether or not a demo start command has been received from the main control device 71. When the demo start command is received, the display CPU 302 gives a drawing instruction for the demo display to the VDP 305, so that the image for the demo display is displayed on the symbol display device 41. After that, this normal processing is terminated.

<Game times control process of display CPU 302>
First, the game rotation control process of step S1001 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the variation command transmitted from the main control device 71 and relayed by the voice emission control device 72 is received. Here, the command received from the voice emission control device 72 is stored in the command storage area 304a provided in the work RAM 304. The command storage area 304a is a ring buffer that has a plurality of areas for storing commands, writes commands to the area set by the write pointer, and reads commands from the area set by the read pointer.

If a change command has been received, in step S1102, the change start process based on the normal symbol is executed, and then the game turn control process ends.

Hereinafter, the fluctuation start processing using the normal symbol in step S1102 will be described.

<Fluctuation start processing by normal symbol in display CPU 302>
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing by the normal symbol.

First, in step S1201, based on the received fluctuation command and type command, information on whether or not a jackpot has been won, information on the jackpot type when a jackpot result occurs, and information on the fluctuation display time are grasped and grasped. The information is stored in the register of the display CPU 302.

In the following step S1202, the stop information setting process is executed. In the stop information setting process, a process for determining the information of the combination of symbols to be finally stopped in the current game round is executed.

Specifically, the work RAM 304 is provided with a symbol update counter and a symbol information acquisition area. The symbol update counter is provided with a counter for the upper symbol row, a counter for the middle symbol row, and a counter for the lower symbol row, and these counters are provided with each symbol row Z1 in the symbol display device 41. Counter values corresponding to the number of symbols set in ~ Z3 are set.

That is, as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 have a counter for the upper symbol row corresponding to the fact that 18 symbols are set as the total number of the main symbol and the sub symbol. A numerical range of "0 to 17" is set in the counter for the lower symbol sequence. Further, in correspondence with the fact that 20 symbols are set as the total number of the main symbol and the sub symbol in the middle symbol row Z2, the counter for the middle symbol row has a numerical range of "0 to 19". Is set. The counter value for each symbol sequence is updated at different cycles. The value of the counter for each symbol string corresponds to the type of symbol that stops on the left line in the corresponding symbol string. Then, in a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec), all the updated information in the counter for each symbol string is acquired, and the acquired information is stored in the symbol information acquisition area.

The symbol information acquisition area includes a probability variation jackpot area, a normal jackpot area, an out-of-reach area, and a complete out-of-court area. Then, it is determined whether or not the information acquired from all the counters for each symbol sequence corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result, the normal jackpot result, the off reach, or the complete off, and the symbol information acquisition area. The information of the corresponding area is updated.

In the stop information setting process of step S1202, first, it is determined whether the game round this time is a probability variation jackpot result, a normal jackpot result, a missed reach result, or a complete missed result.
Then, the information of the combination of symbols to be finally stopped is acquired from the area corresponding to the determination result in the symbol information acquisition area, and is stored in the register of the display CPU 302. The information of the combination of the symbols includes the combination of the symbols of the probability variation jackpot result, the combination of the normal jackpot results, and the information of the effective line for stopping the combination of the out-of-reach symbols.

By the way, the combination of symbols corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result is a mode in which the same odd-numbered symbols (specific symbols) are stopped and displayed on one effective line. In addition, the combination of symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot result is a mode in which the same even-numbered symbols (non-specific symbols) are stopped and displayed on one effective line. In addition, the combination of symbols corresponding to the out-of-reach is an aspect in which the reach is out-of-reach in a mode different from the above-predetermined mode.

In the following description, the stop information corresponding to the jackpot result is the stop information corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result.

In the following step S1203, the lottery process for displaying the notice is executed. In the lottery process of the notice display, the establishment lottery counter of the work RAM 304 and the establishment lottery table stored in the program ROM 303 are used. The establishment lottery counter is configured to be able to store a counter value of "0 to 99", and is configured to add 1 each time the normal process (FIG. 25) is started, that is, in a cycle of about 4 msec. , It is configured to be initialized to "0" after reaching the maximum value.

In addition, the winning lottery table is set corresponding to each of the probability variation jackpot result, the normal jackpot result, the out-of-reach, and the complete out-of-court. These winning lottery tables are set so that the notice display is won at 100% in the winning lottery table corresponding to each jackpot result and the missed reach, and the order of the missed reach → the normal jackpot result → the probability variation jackpot result. It is set so that the probability that the notice B is selected is high. In addition, the probability that both the notice A and the notice B will not be performed is the highest in the established lottery table corresponding to the complete deviation, the probability of the notice A is the highest, and the probability of the notice B is the lowest. It has become. The probability of this notice B is set lower than in the case of out-of-reach.

In addition, in the case where the result is completely deviated and the shorter the variable display time is selected as the number of pending information is larger, the result is completely deviated and the variable display time is shorter than the predetermined time. The lottery process of the notice display is not executed, and the execution of the notice display may be restricted.

In step S1203, first, it is determined whether the current game round is a probability variation jackpot result, a normal jackpot result, a missed reach result, or a complete missed result, and the winning lottery table corresponding to the judgment result is read and established. Read the counter value for the lottery. Then, with reference to the establishment lottery table, whether or not the read-out counter value for the establishment lottery corresponds to either the notice A or the notice B, or whether or not both the notice A and the notice B are performed. To judge. In the following step S1204, the result information of the lottery process of the notice display in step S1203 is acquired and stored in the register of the display CPU 302.

In the following step S1205, it is determined whether or not the reach display occurs in this game round. When the reach display occurs, in step S1206, the reach pattern setting process for determining the reach pattern in the current game round is executed.

In the reach pattern setting process, the reach pattern table stored in the program ROM 303 is used. The reach pattern table is a table for determining the reach pattern according to the fluctuation display time information (variation display time determined by the main control device 71) grasped in step S1201. Specifically, a mode in which only the normal reach is performed and a mode in which the super reach is performed after the normal reach are set in association with the information of the variable display time. In step S1205, the reach pattern information is referred to, and the reach type information corresponding to the current variation display time is acquired and stored in the register of the display CPU 302.

As described above, the fluctuation display time of each game round is determined by the main control device 71, and the main control device 71 determines whether or not to generate the reach display in each game round, and the determination is made. The variable display time is determined according to the result.

If the reach display does not occur in the current game times (step S1205: NO) or after the processing of step S1206 is executed, in step S1207, if the current game times and the jackpot result occur, the effect for the jackpot is produced. In, a process for setting a display table to be appropriately referred to when performing display control of the symbol display device 41 is executed.
The display table will be described in detail later.

In the following step S1208, the information on the fluctuation display time grasped in step S1201 is set in the measurement counter as the fluctuation time measurement means for display provided in the various counter areas 304c of the work RAM 304.

In the following step S1209, a background counter provided as a display mode grasping means in various counter areas 304c of the work RAM 304 is referred to. The background counter is a storage means for grasping the type of background image currently set in the display CPU 302, and the counter value is set in the background counter in a one-to-one correspondence with each display mode. Has been done.

Specifically, as display modes, a first display mode in which the first background image is displayed, a second display mode in which the second background image is displayed, and a third background image are displayed. Since the third display mode is set, the counter values of the background counter are set to "0", "1", and "2" corresponding to these. The counter value of the background counter is alternately switched based on the operation of the effect operating device 60 in the situation where the game times and the opening / closing execution mode are not executed. The process related to this switching will be described later.

In the following step S1210, after executing the process of starting the effect for the game round by the normal symbol on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, the present variation start process is ended. In step S1210, the information of the drawing list at the start of fluctuation is specified based on the reference result of the background counter in step S1209 while referring to the display table set in step S1207, and the information of the specified drawing list is drawn. Read from the list information storage area 303b. Then, the read drawing list information is transmitted to the VDP 305.

The VDP 305 executes a drawing data setting process and a drawing signal output process, and displays an image at the start of fluctuation on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. In this case, if each background data group and normal symbol data group are stored in the regular area 337, the image at the start of fluctuation can be displayed immediately without requiring reading of the image data from the character ROM 306. can.

<Table configuration and processing configuration related to display table settings>
Here, the table configuration and the processing configuration related to the setting of the display table will be described. The display table includes information for specifying the timing of outputting the drawing list information to the VDP 305 and the type of the drawing list information in the middle of the game round or the production for the jackpot.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the VDP 305 reads out the image data from the character ROM 306 when the display control of the symbol display device 41 is performed at the time of the advance notice and the reach display. In this case, the storage capacity of the RAM 308 on the VDP side is a storage capacity that cannot store all of the data groups (the regular data group and the change data group in FIG. 20) corresponding to the effects for each game and the jackpot at one time. There is. For example, in the game round when the super reach is displayed, the storage capacity of the data group required to display a series of effects from the start to the end of the game round exceeds 3 Gbits, but the VDP side RAM308 The storage capacity of is about 1.5 Gbit.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, a series of effects is divided into a plurality of effect ranges, and the data group corresponding to each effect range is sequentially transferred to the VDP side RAM 308, and is already stored in the VDP side RAM 308 at the time of the transfer. It is configured to overwrite the data group that is no longer needed. That is, the data group corresponding to the predetermined effect range is transferred to the VDP side RAM 308 in advance before the predetermined effect range is started. In this case, the front effect range set to be the execution target is executed before the predetermined effect range. Further, in a situation where the predetermined effect range is being executed, the data group corresponding to the rear side effect range set to be executed after the predetermined effect range is transferred to the VDP side RAM 308. In this case, the data group corresponding to the rear side effect range is overwritten with respect to the data group corresponding to the front side effect range. At the time of this overwriting, due to the relationship between the data group on the newly written side and the data group on the erased side, a part of the data group on the erased side is erased or the data on the erased side is erased. A situation occurs in which the entire group is erased.

In the display table, not only the timing for outputting the drawing list information and the information for specifying the type of the drawing list information, but also the information for specifying the transfer instruction timing of various data groups from the character ROM 306 to the VDP side RAM 308 is specified. Is included. When setting the display table, the variable display table storage area 303c provided in the program ROM 303 as the variable display information group storage means is referred to, and the program ROM 303 is provided as the jackpot effect information group storage means. The jackpot effect table storage area 303d is referred to.

Next, the display table setting process executed in step S1207 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28.

As shown in FIG. 28, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the reach display occurs in this game round. If the reach display does not occur, in step S1302, a process for acquiring the base table corresponding to the complete deviation is executed.

Here, the base table group is stored in the variable display table storage area 303c. The base table group includes a table group for complete disengagement and a table group for generating reach. In the table group for complete deviation, information for specifying the timing of outputting the drawing list information and the type of the drawing list information at the timing from the start of the variable display to the result of the complete deviation (hereinafter, such information is displayed). It contains a large number of completely out-of-order tables with information). These completely disengagement tables are prepared with a one-to-one correspondence with any combination of the variable display time and the stop information.

The reach generation table group includes a large number of reach generation tables showing display information at the timing from the start of the variable display to the occurrence of the reach. These reach generation tables are prepared with a one-to-one correspondence with any combination of the variable display time and the reach symbol.

Further, the image of the variable display of the symbol in the case of complete deviation and from the start of the variable display to the occurrence of reach is composed of only the background image and the image of the normal symbol.

In step S1302, among the base table groups, a completely out-of-order table corresponding to the combination of the variable display time and the stop information in the current game round is acquired, and the acquired table information is stored in the display table storage area 304b. do.

After that, in step S1303, it is determined whether or not all the data transfer of the regular data group is completed. If a negative determination is made in step S1303, the setting process of this display table is terminated. With the above configuration, when all the data transfer of the regular data group is not completed, it is possible not to display the notice even if there is a notice request. By limiting the content of the effect executed during the data transfer, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the requested display is possible during the data transfer, and the display control process can be simplified.

When step S1303 becomes NO, that is, when all the data transfer of the regular data group is not completed, the information writing to the notice table (steps S1306 and S1307) becomes unnecessary. Therefore, in such a case, the lottery process related to the notice display (step S1203 in FIG. 27) may not be performed.

In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the transfer is completed for each data, but instead, the completion of data transfer may be determined based on, for example, the time required from the start of data transfer. The determination value (time width for determining the required time) for determining the completion of data transfer may be determined based on the amount of data in the regular data group. The same applies to step S1309 described later and step S1503 of FIG.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S1303, it is determined in step S1304 whether or not the notice A is generated in the current game round, and in step S1305, whether or not the notice B is generated in the current game round. Judge whether or not.

When the notice A occurs (step S1303: YES), the process for acquiring the notice A table is executed in step S1306. When the notice B occurs (step S1305: YES), the process for acquiring the notice B table is executed in step S1307. If both the notice A and the notice B do not occur (step S1305: NO), the present setting process is terminated as it is.

Here, the notice table group is stored in the variable display table storage area 303c. The notice table group includes a notice A table and a notice B table. The notice A table shows display information necessary for displaying the image of the notice A at the timing from the start of the variation display to the stop of the variation display of the symbols in the first symbol sequence. The notice B table shows display information necessary for displaying the image of the notice B at the timing from the start of the change display to the stop of the change display of the symbols in the first symbol sequence.

Further, in each of the notice A table and the notice B table, information for specifying the transfer instruction timing for transferring the notice A data group or the notice B data group from the character ROM 306 to the VDP side RAM 308 is set. Has been done. In the pachinko machine 10, the transfer instruction timing is set so that the transfer instruction of the data group for the notice A or the data group for the notice B is given immediately after the start of the variable display of the symbol. In this case, among the completely off table and the reach generation table included in the base table group, the table that can be selected when the notice display is executed is the table in the first symbol column from the start of the variable display. As the period until the variable display is stopped, a sufficient period is secured for both the notice A and the notice B to complete the notice display after the transfer of the notice data group is completed.

If the transfer of the data group corresponding to the notice display can be completed by the start of the notice display, the transfer instruction timing is not limited to the above and is arbitrary.

In step S1306, the notice A table is acquired from the variable display table storage area 303c, and the acquired table information is overwritten with the base table information stored in the display table storage area 304b. Further, in step S1307, the notice B table is acquired from the variable display table storage area 303c, and the acquired table information is overwritten with the base table information stored in the display table storage area 304b.

Since the notice A and the notice B are effects that are executed at the same time as the design portion in the situation where the fluctuation display of the design is performed based on the base table, the design is to be displayed in order to display the image corresponding to the design. It is necessary to set the drawing list information for displaying both the variable display and the notice display at the same time. In this case, in the process of acquiring the notice table, the base already stored in the display table storage area 304b so that the drawing list information for simultaneously displaying both the variable display of the symbol and the notice display can be set. Overwrite the information in the notice table with respect to the information in the table.

Further, in the display table storage area 304b, a display area for storing display information and a transfer instruction area for storing transfer instruction timing information are set, and a notice table is acquired. In the process, the transfer instruction timing information is stored in the transfer instruction area. Specifically, in the transfer instruction area, a flag storage area is individually set for the possible transfer instruction timing, and the data group to be transferred that can be assumed corresponding to each transfer instruction timing. On the other hand, the flag storage area is set individually. When storing transfer instruction timing information in the transfer instruction area, a flag is stored for the area corresponding to the transfer instruction timing to be set this time, and the area corresponding to the data group to be transferred to be set this time. The flag is stored for the area set in association with the transfer instruction timing. The configuration related to the setting of information in the transfer instruction area is the same when the configuration is based on the acquisition of other tables such as the normal reach table, the super reach table, and the jackpot effect table.

Returning to the description of the display table setting process (FIG. 28), if reach display occurs in the current game round (step S1301: YES), the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, a process for acquiring the base table corresponding to the reach display is executed. Specifically, among the base table groups already described, a reach generation table corresponding to the combination of the variable display time and the reach symbol in this game round is acquired, and the acquired table information is displayed in the display table storage area. Store in 304b.

In the following step S1309, it is determined whether or not the data transfer of the regular data group is completed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1309, the process proceeds to step S1310.

In step S1310, it is determined whether or not the notice A is generated in this game round.
When the notice A occurs, in step S1311, the table for the notice A is acquired from the variable display table storage area 303c, and the acquired table information is stored in the variable display table storage area 304b for the base table. Overwrite the information in. If the notice A does not occur, the notice display will surely occur in the game times in which the reach display occurs this time, and the notice display will surely occur in the game times in which the reach display occurs. Therefore, in step S1312, the table for variable display is stored. The notice B table is acquired from the area 303c, and the acquired table information is overwritten with the base table information stored in the variable display table storage area 304b. The processing content related to the acquisition of these notice tables is the same as in the cases of step S1306 and step S1307.

After executing the process of step S1311 or step S1312, in step S1313, it is determined whether or not only normal reach occurs in this game round and super reach does not occur. When only the normal reach occurs or when a negative determination is made in step S1309, the process for acquiring the normal reach table is executed in step S1314. With the above configuration, if all the data transfer of the regular data group is not completed, it is possible to prevent the notice display and the display corresponding to the super reach even if there is a notice request or a super reach request. Become. By limiting the content of the effect executed during the data transfer, it is not necessary to determine whether the requested display is possible during the data transfer, and the display control process can be simplified.

If it is determined in step S1313 that super reach will occur in this game round, the process proceeds to step S1315. In step S1315, a process for acquiring the super reach table is executed.

After the execution of step S1314 or step S1315, it is determined in step S1316 whether or not a jackpot result is generated in the current game round, and if no jackpot result is generated, the present setting process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step S1316 that a jackpot result will occur in this game round, an affirmative determination is made and the process proceeds to step S1317. In step S1317, it is determined whether or not a probabilistic jackpot result is generated in the current game round, and further, in step S1318, it is determined whether or not a normal jackpot result is generated in the current game round.

When the probability variation jackpot result occurs (step S1317: YES), the present setting process ends after the process for acquiring the probability variation jackpot table is executed in step S1319. If a normal jackpot result occurs (step S1318: YES), the setting process ends after executing the process for acquiring the normal jackpot table in step S1320. When neither the probabilistic jackpot nor the normal jackpot occurs (step S1318: NO), this setting process ends.

Returning to the description of the game time control process (FIG. 26), when the variation command is not received (step S1101: NO), it is determined in step S1103 whether or not the variation is being displayed by the normal symbol. .. The determination is made by determining whether or not the normal fluctuation flag is stored in the normal fluctuation flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 304d of the work RAM 304. The normal fluctuation flag is stored at the start of the change according to the normal symbol, and is cleared at the end of the game round.

If the fluctuation display by the normal symbol is not being performed, the main game times control process is terminated as it is. When the variation display by the normal symbol is being displayed, the game rotation control process is terminated after the variable processing process by the normal symbol is executed in step S1104.

<Processing during fluctuation by normal symbol>
Next, the process during fluctuation by the normal symbol in step S1104 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the processing during fluctuation by the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 29, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the variation end command transmitted from the main control device 71 and relayed by the voice emission control device 72 is received. If the variable end command has not been received, the measurement counter of the work RAM 304 is referred to in step S1402, and the display table of the work RAM 304 is referred to in step S1403.

In the following step S1404, the information on the elapsed time of the game times specified in step S1402 is collated with the display table specified in step S1403, and it is determined whether or not it is the setting timing of the drawing list.

When it is the drawing list setting timing, the drawing list setting process is executed in step S1405.

The drawing list information of the contents set in the drawing list setting process is output to VDP305 in the following step S1406. As a result, in the VDP 305, a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

When the process for outputting the drawing list information (step S1406) is executed or when it is determined that the timing is not the setting timing of the drawing list (step S1404: NO), after the data transfer instruction process is executed in step S1407. , Ends the processing during this change.

In the data transfer instruction process, the transfer command for the data to be transferred is read from the command storage area 303a of the program ROM 303, and the read command is transmitted to the VDP 305.

On the other hand, if the variable end command is received (step S1401: YES), the process proceeds to step S1408. In step S1408, the currently stored display table is referred to, drawing list information corresponding to the one set as the final setting timing in the display table is read from the drawing list information storage area 303b, and the read drawing is performed. The list information is output to VDP305. In VDP305, drawing data setting processing and drawing signal output processing are executed, and the last image in the game round is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. As a result, the variable display of the symbols for one game is completed.

After that, in step S1409, after executing the variation end process for executing the process such as erasing the flag stored in the work RAM 304 in order to advance the effect for the game round, the process during the variation is terminated.

<Background image control processing of display CPU 302>
Next, the background image control process in step S1003 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the production for the game round is in progress. If the production for the game round is in progress, the background image control process is terminated as it is, and if the production for the game round is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S1502. In step S1502, it is determined whether or not the jackpot production is in progress. If the jackpot effect is being produced, the background image control process is terminated as it is, and if the jackpot effect is not being produced, the process proceeds to step S1503.

In step S1503, it is determined whether or not the transfer of the regular data group is completed. When the transfer of the regular data group is not completed, in step S1504, the type of drawing list information corresponding to the first display mode is specified, and the specified drawing list information is stored in the drawing list information storage area of the program ROM 303. Read from 303b and output to VDP305.
After that, the standby image control process is terminated. In VDP305, by receiving the drawing list information output in step S1504, the drawing data setting process and the drawing signal output process are executed, and the image for the first background is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. Display it.

Here, in the situation where the transfer of the regular symbol data group is not completed, the situation where the transfer of the normal symbol data group is completed means that the first background data group and the normal symbol data group are regularly used when the power is turned on. Although the transfer to the area 337 is completed, the transfer of the second background data group and the third background data group to the regular area 337 is not completed. That is, when the power is turned on, the transfer of the data group corresponding to the all display modes is not completed, but the transfer of the data group corresponding to the reference display mode is completed. In such a situation, by executing the display of the image for the first background regardless of the display mode, even if there is a request for displaying an image for the background other than the image for the first background, the display according to the request is made. It is possible not to do. By limiting the content of the effect executed during the data transfer, it is possible to reliably execute the display without determining whether or not the requested display is possible during the data transfer.

On the other hand, when the transfer of the regular data group is completed (step S1503: YES), the process proceeds to step S1505. In step S1505, it is determined whether or not an operation generation command is received from the voice emission control device 72. When the operation occurrence command is received, the background counter update process is executed in step S1506. As described above, the display modes include a first display mode in which the first background image is displayed, a second display mode in which the second background image is displayed, and a third display mode in which the third background image is displayed. Three types are set. Therefore, in step S1506, when the counter value corresponds to the first display mode, the counter value corresponds to the second display mode, and when the counter value corresponds to the second display mode, the third display is performed. It is updated to the counter value corresponding to the mode, and when it is the counter value corresponding to the third display mode, it is updated to the counter value corresponding to the first display mode.

When a negative determination is made in step S1505 or after the execution of step S1506, the background counter reading process is executed in step S1507. In the reading process, the value of the background counter is confirmed and temporarily stored in the work RAM 304.

In the following step S1508, a process of outputting drawing list information corresponding to the value of the background counter temporarily confirmed in step S1507 is executed. Specifically, first, it is determined which display mode the value of the background counter corresponds to. The value of the background counter corresponds to the first display mode if it corresponds to "0", and corresponds to the second display mode if it corresponds to "1", and corresponds to "2". If so, it corresponds to the third display mode. Next, the type of drawing list information corresponding to the background image of the display mode corresponding to the value of the background counter and the current stop symbol in each symbol string is specified, and the specified drawing list information is used as the drawing list information of the program ROM 303. It is read from the storage area 303b and output to the VDP 305. After that, the present effect control process is terminated. In VDP305, by receiving the drawing list information output in step S1508, the drawing data setting process and the drawing signal output process are executed, and the standby using the background image of the display mode corresponding to the value of the background counter is used. The image is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

Here, the first background data group, the second background data group, and the third background data group referred to for displaying the background image in the VDP 305 are the character ROM 306 as the regular data group when the power is turned on. Is transferred to the regular area 337 of the RAM 308 on the VDP side, and the state is maintained in a situation where the effect for the game round or the effect for the jackpot is not performed while the power is turned on. Assuming a configuration in which these background data groups are not stored in the regular area 337, it becomes necessary to read image data from the character ROM 306 each time the display mode is switched, and a NAND flash memory is used for the character ROM 306. In such a configuration, there is a concern that the timing at which the display mode is switched is delayed with respect to the operation timing of the effect operating device 60 due to the slow transfer speed. On the other hand, since each background data group is stored in the regular area 337 as described above, the display mode can be switched immediately when the effect operating device 60 is operated.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A main control device 71, a payout control device 78, a voice emission control device 72, and a display control device 121 are provided as a plurality of control means, and the main control device 71 provided as the first control means is provided with a voltage conversion circuit 230. While the electric power is directly supplied, the electric power from the voltage conversion circuit 230 is supplied to the control devices other than the main control device 71 provided as the second control means via the output switching circuit 231. .. The voltage conversion circuit 230 generates electric power for driving each control device as a drive electric power generation circuit. The output switching circuit 231 is a power cutoff circuit capable of cutting off the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the second control means.

The main control device 71 executes a process (processes of steps S402, S405, and S504) for determining whether or not the transition condition to the power saving mode or the release condition of the power saving mode is satisfied, and determines whether or not power saving is necessary. Used as a means. When the transition condition to the power saving mode is satisfied, the main control device 71 outputs a LOW level power supply permission signal from the output port 235 to the output switching circuit 231 to cause another control device from the voltage conversion circuit 230. Cut off the power supply to. When the power saving mode release condition is satisfied, the voltage conversion circuit 230 supplies power to other control devices by outputting the HI level power supply permission signal from the output port 235 to the output switching circuit 231. Cut off.

According to the above configuration, when the pachinko machine 10 is set to the power saving mode, for example, when a player is not playing a game, the main control device 71 supplies power from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to another control device. The state of the output switching circuit 231 is controlled so as to cut off the power consumption of other control devices, and electric devices and the like (movable accessories 200 and various types) to which power is supplied via the other control devices. The power consumption in the lamp portions 58a, 58b) is reduced. Further, when the power saving mode is canceled, for example, when a game by a player is newly started, the output is switched so that the main control device 71 supplies power from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to another control device. The state of the circuit 231 is controlled, whereby the pachinko machine 10 returns to the normal mode (non-power saving mode).

In such a case, the main control device 71, which is defined as the main body of the power supply control among the plurality of control devices, is supplied with power from the voltage conversion circuit 230 without going through the output switching circuit 231. In that state, the main control device 71 Controls the power consumption of other control devices and the like. Therefore, even when the external power supply is supplied (the power switch 135a is turned on), the power consumption of the gaming machine can be reduced. Further, after the power saving mode is entered, the power saving mode can be canceled as appropriate.

Further, the main control device 71, which is the first control means, executes a power-on wait process (step S101) when supplying an external power source to issue a power supply command to the output switching circuit 231. A level power supply permission signal is output to execute power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to another control device. The process for the power supply command executed in the power-on wait process is the same process as the power return process (step S505) executed when returning from the power saving mode.

According to the above configuration, the processing of the main control device 71 is the same when the supply of the external power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is started and when the power supply from the power saving mode is restored (when the power cutoff to the other control devices is released). In each case, the output processing of the HI level power supply permission signal to the output switching circuit 231 is performed. In this case, it is not necessary to individually require a circuit or the like for power cutoff at the time of starting the supply of the external power supply and at the time of returning from the power saving mode, and it is configured to carry out the control for the power supply at each time. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of complications.

Further, a touch detection unit 225 is connected to the main control device 71 as a means for monitoring the game state of the player. Based on the detection result (game state monitoring result) of the touch detection unit 225, the main control device 71 determines that the player is in a non-game state in which the player has not played a game, thereby shifting to the power saving mode. I do.

According to the above configuration, power saving of the pachinko machine 10 can be preferably performed in a non-gaming state in which the player is not playing a game. Since the player is not playing the game during the power saving mode, there is no problem even if the power supply to the control devices other than the main control device 71 that controls the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, which is good. It is possible to reduce power consumption.

Further, the main control device 71 sequentially updates the jackpot random number counter C1 within a predetermined numerical range in the normal mode in which the power is supplied from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the other control devices. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used when performing a lottery for whether or not to generate the open / close execution mode in the lottery random number update process in step S203 of the timer interrupt process. The main control device 71 executes the same process as the lottery random number update process in the counter update process of step S502 even during the power saving mode in which the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 is cut off to other control devices. doing.

Here, the power saving mode in which the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the other control device is cut off is a non-gaming state, and it is not necessary to perform update processing for numerical information such as so-called lottery random numbers. .. However, in the above configuration, numerical information such as lottery random numbers is updated even in the power saving mode. This makes it possible to take measures against fraud in the power saving mode.

Further, whether or not the main control device 71 gives a privilege to the player based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the wake of winning a prize in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34, which is a predetermined condition. Executes the processing of. Specifically, the jackpot lottery process is executed by the special figure special electric control process in step S215, and the jackpot lottery result is displayed by controlling the main display unit 43 provided as the lottery result display means.

The main control device 71 displays the main display unit 43 in a predetermined display mode in the power saving mode in which the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the control devices other than the main control device 71 is cut off. To control. Specifically, the special figure display process of step S501 for controlling the predetermined segment to continue to light in the light emitting mode is executed.

In the power saving mode in which the power supply to the other control devices is cut off, the result of the lottery is not displayed on the main display unit 43. That is, the display on the main display unit 43 is unnecessary.
However, in the above configuration, the display is performed by the main display unit 43 even in the power saving mode. Here, the display operation of the main display unit 43 is controlled by the main control device 71, and the fact that the display of the predetermined light emitting mode is continuously displayed on the main display unit 43 means that the operation of the main control device 71 It means that it is being continued. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player and the like that the power of the gaming machine itself is not turned off and the gaming can be restarted under the implementation of power saving.

In the state where the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the other control device is cut off (power saving mode), the main display unit 43 is in the power saving mode in a mode different from that at the time of displaying the lottery result. The display should be carried out. For example, when the lottery result is displayed, the light emitting member such as an LED is blinked to display, and when the power saving mode is displayed, the light emitting member such as an LED is continuously turned on to display.

By the way, the main display unit 43 is connected to the main control device 71 via a signal line, and the main display unit 43 displays the result of the jackpot lottery according to the control signal from the main control device 71. There is.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a movable accessory 200 as a notification means for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 is in the power saving mode in the power saving mode. The movable accessory 200 shifts from the non-notification state to the notification state as the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the voice emission control device 72 is cut off.

According to the above configuration, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power saving mode (non-gaming state), the player (for example, a game machine newly played in the game hall) is selected by the notification of the movable accessory 200. The player) can grasp that the pachinko machine 10 is in the power saving mode, and can suppress the hindrance to selecting the game machine and the like.

Further, as the main body of the power supply control of the plurality of control means when shifting to the power saving mode, the main control device 71 for determining whether or not to give the privilege to the player is defined. The other control device is a sub control device that executes various controls based on a control command from the main control device 71.

According to the above configuration, of the main control device 71 and the sub control device, the main control device 71 is defined as the main body of the power supply control. Then, in the power saving mode, the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 is continued to the main control device 71, and the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 is cut off to the sub control device. In this case, the main control device 71 can be operated even while power saving is being performed, and a process for suppressing fraud can be appropriately performed.

On the front side of the pachinko machine 10, a symbol display device 41 and lamp units 58a and 58b are provided as operation units that operate in a manner visible to the player, and the operation units include a display control device 121 and a voice. It is controlled by the light emission control device 72. The display control device 121 and the voice emission control device 72 are connected to a power supply unit 113 for power-on as a power supply means for supplying drive power, and the display control device 121, the voice light emission control device 72, and the power supply unit for power-on are connected. An output switching circuit 231 capable of cutting off the power supply from the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the display control device 121 and the voice emission control device 72 is provided between the 113s. In the main control device 71, it is possible to detect that the pachinko machine 10 is in the non-gaming state by executing the processes of steps S402 and S405 in the power saving mode transition process as the gaming state detecting means. When it is detected that the pachinko machine is in a non-gaming state, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the power saving mode. When the mode shifts to the power saving mode, the output switching circuit 231 cuts off the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the display control device 121 and the voice emission control device 72. The movable accessory 200 is saving power to the player by shifting from the non-notification state to the notification state when the power supply to the display control device 121 and the voice emission control device 72 is cut off. Notify that.

According to the above configuration, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the non-gaming state, the power saving mode is set, and in such a mode, the power supply to the display control device 121 and the voice emission control device 72 is cut off, so that the power consumption is consumed. Can be reduced. At this time, the power supply to the display control device 121 and the voice emission control device 72 is cut off in the power saving mode, so that the display is stopped, for example, in the symbol display device 41 as the operating unit, and the same display is performed. Any of the power saving treatments will be performed, such as leaving the lamps as they are, reducing the illuminance of the light emission at the lamp units 58a and 58b as the operating parts, stopping the light emission, and so on. It may not be possible to grasp whether or not a certain pachinko machine 10 is playable, but the notification of the movable accessory 200 causes the player (for example, a player who selects a new game machine to play in the game hall) to play the pachinko machine. It is possible to grasp that 10 is in a power saving state, and it is possible to suppress an obstacle to selecting a gaming machine or the like.

Further, the movable accessory 200 is provided so as to be able to operate by supplying electric power from the power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on. The output switching circuit 231 supplies power via the display control device 121 and the voice emission control device 72 when the power supply from the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the display control device 121 and the voice emission control device 72 is cut off. The movable accessory 200 is also configured to cut off the power supply. The movable accessory 200 shifts from the non-notification state to the notification state as the power supply from the power supply unit 113 for power-on is cut off.

According to the above configuration, when the power supply from the power-on power supply unit 113 to the display control device 121 and the voice emission control device 72 is cut off, the power supply from the power-on power supply unit 113 to the movable accessory 200 is also performed. It is blocked. Then, when the power supply from the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the movable accessory 200 is cut off, the movable accessory 200 is in the notification state. In this case, the use of electric power is not essential for information notification for power saving. Therefore, the configuration is more desirable from the viewpoint of power consumption.

Further, the movable accessory 200 is provided with a movable plate 201 for notification provided with an information display unit 203 as notification information for the player to visually recognize that the power saving mode is in progress, and a power supply unit 113 for power-on. The movable plate 201, which is driven by electric power, is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 at the first position (specifically, the actual appearance position) and the second position is not visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 (specifically). Is provided with a drive unit 205 that moves with and from the game basic position). The movable plate 201 can be moved to the first position as the power supply from the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the drive unit 205 is cut off by the output switching circuit 231.

According to the above configuration, when the power supply from the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the drive unit 205 of the movable accessory 200 is cut off, the movable plate 201 is moved to the first position (a position that can be visually recognized by the player). ). In this case, by shifting from the power supply state to the power cutoff state, that is, by shifting from the normal mode (non-power saving state) to the power saving mode, the movable plate 201 can be moved from the second position, which cannot be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 will move to the first position that can be visually recognized from the front. At this time, since the movable plate 201 that is not visually recognized in the normal mode is visually recognized in the power saving mode, the player can grasp the power saving mode depending on the presence or absence of the movable plate 201. In other words, with such a configuration, the power saving mode can be recognized at a glance, and the recognition level can be raised. Therefore, it is suitable for making each player recognize the notification information for power saving.

Further, the movable plate 201 is configured to be movable to the first position by its own weight and to be moved to the second position by being driven by the drive unit 205.

According to the above configuration, the movable plate 201 can be held in the first position (a position that can be visually recognized by the player) by utilizing the weight of the movable plate 201 in the power saving state. In addition, by using the gravity that is constantly generated in the natural world to move the movable plate 201 to the first position, the movable plate 201 can be reliably moved to the first position even when power is not supplied to the drive unit 205. It becomes possible to move it.

Further, the movable accessory 200 is provided with a movable plate 202 for production that can be moved between a position that can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10 and a position that cannot be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the production according to the progress of the game. The movable plate 202 is operated as.

According to the above configuration, in the movable accessory 200 which is an effect device, the movable plate 202 can be moved between a position where it can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10 and a position where it cannot be seen, and it can be moved during the game. The movement of the board 202 has attracted a great deal of attention from players. Further, the movable accessory 200 can be moved between a position where it can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10 (first position) and a position where it cannot be seen (second position), like the movable plate 202, for notification. Movable plate 201 is provided. In this case, the movable plate 202 and the movable plate 201 operate in substantially the same manner, and the movable plate 201 can be attracted more attention by the player in the power saving mode (non-gaming state).

Further, as the operation unit, a symbol display device 41, which is a display means for variablely displaying a symbol related to the game effect on the display screen G provided as a display area, is provided. The first position is a position in front of the pachinko machine 10 of the display screen G, and the second position is a position behind the center frame 42 provided as an enclosure surrounding the display screen G.

According to the above configuration, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power saving mode, the movable plate 201 moves to a position in front of the pachinko machine 10 on the display screen G (that is, a position overlapping the front of the pachinko machine 10). In this case, the display screen G in which the pattern is variablely displayed during the game on the pachinko machine 10 is a part that tends to be noticed by the player, and the movable plate 201 is present at a position in front of the pachinko machine 10 on the display screen G. As a result, there is an increased possibility that the notification information (information display unit 203 indicating that the power saving mode is set) attached to the movable plate 201 can be seen by the player. Therefore, the player can suitably recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the power saving mode.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the movable accessory 200 as the first notification means, while the second notification means capable of notifying that the power saving mode is in the state where the power is supplied from the power supply unit 113 for power-on. The main display unit 43 is provided as a main display unit 43. When the power supply to the voice emission control device 72 is cut off by the output switching circuit 231, the power supply from the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the movable accessory 200 is cut off, and the power supply unit 113 for power-on Power is supplied to the main display unit 43.

According to the above configuration, in the power saving mode (non-gaming state), in the movable accessory 200 which is the first notification means, the power saving notification is performed in a state where the power supply from the power supply unit 113 at the time of turning on is cut off. In the main display unit 43, which is the second notification means, power saving notification is performed under the state where the power is supplied from the power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on. In this case, by performing the notification using both the movable accessory 200 and the main display unit 43, (1) the power supply by the power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on is cut off by the power cutoff means for power saving. Is it in a state, or is it (2) a state in which the power supply itself of the power supply unit 113 for power-on is stopped (for example, a state in which the power switch 135a is off, a state in which the power supply system is out of order, etc.)? Can be determined.

More specifically, in the state of (1) above, both the movable accessory 200 and the main display unit 43 are in the notification state, whereas in the state of (2) above, the movable accessory 200 is in the notification state. 200 is in the notification state, and the main display unit 43 is in the non-notification state. Therefore, the above (1) and (2) can be discriminated.

Further, the main display unit 43, which is the second notification means, gives the player a privilege based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 when the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34, which is a predetermined condition, is won a prize. It is connected to the main control device 71 that determines whether or not to give. The main display unit 43 is provided as a lottery result display means whose display mode is controlled by the main control device 71 in order to display the lottery result of the privilege grant. When the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the power saving mode, the power supply from the power-on power supply unit 113 to the main control device 71 is continued, and the main display unit 43 is supplied with power from the power-on power supply unit 113. In the state of being in, it notifies that it is in the power saving mode.

Here, the power saving mode is a non-game state, and the result of the lottery is not displayed on the main display unit 43. That is, the display on the main display unit 43 is unnecessary. However, in the above configuration, in the power saving mode, the main display unit 43 displays as one means of power saving notification. Here, the display operation of the main display unit 43 is controlled by the main control device 71, and it is desirable that the power supply to the main control device 71 is continued even when power saving is performed from the viewpoint of fraud prevention and the like. Considering this, it can be said that it is convenient to use the main display unit 43 as the second notification means.

In the state where the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the second control means is cut off (power saving mode), the main display unit 43 is in the power saving mode in a mode different from that at the time of displaying the lottery result. The display should be carried out. For example, when the lottery result is displayed, the light emitting member such as an LED is blinked to display, and when the power saving mode is displayed, the light emitting member such as an LED is continuously turned on to display.

The symbol display device 41 is provided as a symbol display means for variablely displaying a symbol, and the display content thereof is controlled by a display control device 121 as a display control means. A power supply unit 113 for turning on is provided as a power supply means for supplying driving power to the symbol display device 41 and the display control device 121. In the display control device 121, a first image display control means for determining the image data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 while being sequentially updated, and an image data determined by the first image display control means are input. A second image display control means is provided, which stores the image data in the storage unit each time the input is made and outputs the stored image data to the symbol display device 41. Specifically, an image data determination unit 240 is provided as the first image display control means, a storage unit 241a is provided as the storage unit, and an output control unit 241 is provided as the second image display control means.

The power supply unit 113 for power-on separately includes a supply path for supplying power to the image data determination unit 240 as the first image display control means and the output control unit 241 as the second image display control means. ing. When it is detected that the pachinko machine 10 is in a non-gaming state in the processing of steps S402 and S405 in the power saving mode transition processing of the main control device 71, the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the image data determination unit 240. While the power supply in the supply path is cut off, the power supply in the supply path to the output control unit 241 is continuously performed.

According to the above configuration, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the non-gaming state, power is not supplied from the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the display CPU 302 of the image data determination unit 240, so that the period during which the game is not played is used. It is possible to reduce power consumption. Further, in the power saving state in which the power consumption is reduced, the power supply to the VDP 305 and the symbol display device 41 of the output control unit 241 is continued, so that the control RAM 332, which is the storage unit 241a, stores the power even in the power saving state. It becomes possible to continue the display of the displayed image data in the pattern display means. As a result, it is possible to display a pattern in line with the intention even after the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the power saving mode while reducing the power consumption.

In the power supply unit 113 for power-on, as a means for supplying power to the display CPU 302, for example, power is supplied to the display CPU 302 via an output switching circuit 231 as a power cutoff circuit, and the VDP 305 As a means for supplying electric power to the symbol display device 41, for example, the electric power is supplied to the VDP 305 and the symbol display device 41 without going through the output switching circuit 231.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the control device (control device that manages the power supply at the time of power saving) that outputs the power supply permission signal to the output switching circuit is the payout control device 78, unlike the first embodiment. When the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the power saving mode, power is supplied from the power supply unit 113 at the time of power supply to the control devices other than the payout control device 78, that is, the main control device 71, the voice emission control device 72, and the display control device 121. Is blocked. Further, in the present embodiment, the payout control device 78, not the main control device 71, is provided with a function of detecting the non-gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, when the power switch 135a is turned on, the method of supplying power from the power supply unit 113 for power-on to each control device is also different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, when the power switch 135a is changed from the OFF state to the ON state, in the first embodiment, power is supplied to the main control device 71 and then power is supplied to the other control devices. In contrast to the configuration, in the present embodiment, power is supplied to the main control device 71, the voice emission control device 72, the payout control device 78, and the display control device 121 all at once.

The above-mentioned different configurations will be described below. In the following description, the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be basically omitted. FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration for executing the power cutoff process and the power recovery process in the present embodiment.

Similar to the first embodiment, the power-on power supply unit 113 includes a main control device 71, a payout control device 78, a voice emission control device 72, a display control device 121, and a display control device 121 based on external power supplied from a commercial power source. The operating voltage is supplied to the symbol display device 41.

The AC 24V input from the commercial power supply to the power supply unit 113 at the time of power supply via the power supply switch 135a is converted into + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V by the voltage conversion circuit 230. + 5V and + 12V are directly input to the payout control device 78 from the voltage conversion circuit 230. Further, the signal of the handle touch sensor 224 is input to the payout control device 78, unlike the first embodiment.

Each voltage is input from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the main control device 71, the voice emission control device 72, and the display control device 121 via the output switching circuits 231a to 231d. Specifically, + 5V is input to the voice emission control device 72 and the display control device 121 via the output switching circuits 231a and 231b, and + 12V is input to the voice emission control device 72 and the display control device 121 via the output switching circuit 231c. + 24V is input to the main control device 71 via the output switching circuit 231d.

The output switching circuits 231a to 231d are provided with NPN transistors as output switching transistors 400a to 400d, respectively, and the collectors of the output switching transistors 400a to 400c are the output of the voltage conversion circuit 230, the sound emission control device 72, and the display. It is connected to the control device 121, the emitter is grounded, and the base is connected to the output port 401 of the payout control device 78. The collector of the output switching transistor 400d is connected to the output of the voltage conversion circuit 230 and the main controller 71, the emitter is grounded, and the base is connected to the output port 401.

The output switching transistors 400a to 400d are turned on when the HI level power supply permission signal is output from the output port 401 from the payout control device 78, and the main control device 71, the voice emission control device 72, and the voice emission control device 72 are turned on. Each input voltage to the display control device 121 becomes the LOW level, and the output voltage from the voltage conversion circuit 230 is not applied to the main control device 71, the voice emission control device 72, and the display control device 121. On the other hand, when the LOW level power supply permission signal is output from the output port 401 of the payout control device 78, it is turned off and the output voltage from the voltage conversion circuit 230 is the payout control device 78 and the voice emission control device 72. And applied to the display control device 121. A LOW level power supply permission signal is output from the output port 401 of the payout control device 78 in the initial state.

In the present embodiment, the logical level of the power supply permission signal when the pachinko machine 10 is set to the power saving mode is opposite to the configuration of FIG. 18, and when the power saving mode is set (when the power is cut off), the power is paid out. When the HI level power supply permission signal is output from the output port 401 of the control device 78 and the power saving mode is canceled (when power is restored), the LOW level power supply permission is permitted from the output port 401 of the payout control device 78. A signal is output.

As described above, the power supply circuit 112 is provided with a power supply unit 114 for power failure. Therefore, even if the power supply to the main control device 71 is cut off by the power supply permission signal output from the payout control device 78, the backup power is supplied from the power supply unit 114 at the time of power failure, and the RAM in the main control device 71 The stored information etc. will not be deleted unintentionally.

The reset circuit 236 is a circuit that instructs the start of operation of the voice emission control device 72 and the display control device 121, and includes a delay circuit 237 and a reset transistor 238. The reset transistor 238 is composed of an NPN transistor, the base is connected to the output side of the delay circuit 237, the collector is connected to the output side of the output switching circuit 231a, and the emitter is grounded.

The main control device 71 includes a reset circuit 239 as in the first embodiment. In the main control device 71, a LOW level reset signal is output from the reset circuit 239 to the MPU 92 at a timing delayed from the timing at which + 5V is input to the main control board 91 via the power failure monitoring board 96, and the reset is performed. The main control device 71 starts operating with the output of the signal.

The payout control device 78, like the main control device 71, has its own reset circuit 402. A LOW level reset signal is output from the reset circuit 402 to the MPU of the payout control device 78 at a timing delayed from the timing at which + 5 V is input from the voltage conversion circuit 230, and the payout control device is accompanied by the output of the reset signal. 78 starts the operation.

Next, the processing executed by the main control device 71 and the payout control device 78 when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power saving mode will be described.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the main control device 71 of the present embodiment. This timer interrupt process is carried out by replacing it with FIG. 14 described above. In this timer interrupt process, the processes executed in steps S1603 to S1617 are the same as the processes executed in steps S203 to S217, and the processes executed in steps S1619 to S1624 are steps S220 to S220. Since it is the same process as the process executed in step S225, the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the power failure information storage process is executed in step S1601. The power failure information storage process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33.

In the power failure information storage process, first, in step S1701, the process of reading the information of the power failure signal received in the input port of the MPU 92 is executed. In this case, when a power failure signal (LOW level power failure signal) corresponding to the fact that the power is not cut off is received, "0" information is stored in the input port as non-power failure information. When a power failure signal (HI level power failure signal) corresponding to the occurrence of power cutoff is received, the information "1" is stored in the input port as the power failure occurrence information. In step S1701, the process of reading the information of the power failure signal into the register of the MPU 92 is executed.

In the following step S1702, it is determined whether or not the power failure signal read in step S1701 is at the HI level. If the power failure signal is at the LOW level, the power failure flag of the RAM 94 is set to "0" in step S1703, and then the power failure power saving process is terminated.

If the power failure signal is at the HI level in step S1702, the process proceeds to step S1704. In step S1704, the power failure flag of the RAM 94 is set to "1", and in the following step S1705, the special figure display process is executed. In the special figure display process, the main display unit 43 is displayed and controlled so that the plurality of segment light emitting units continue to light in a predetermined light emitting mode.

In the following step S1706, the counter update process is executed. In the counter update process, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory are released by executing the same process as the lottery random number update process executed in step S1603 of the timer interrupt process. The counter C4 is updated.

In the following step S1707, the checksum calculation process is executed. The checksum calculated here is stored in the RAM 94. After that, the power failure information storage process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 32), it is determined in step S1602 whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S1602, the processes after step S1603 are executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, this timer interrupt process ends.

Next, the demo display process executed in step S1618 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. This demo display process is carried out in place of FIG. 15 described above. In the demo display process, steps S1801 to S1808 are the same processes as steps S301 to S308 in FIG. 15, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, after setting the demo display state in step S1807, in addition to the process of setting the demo start command as the output target in step S1808, in step S1809. Set the demo display signal to HI level. The demo display signal is a signal transmitted from the main control device 71 to the payout control device 78, and is a signal for allowing the payout control device 78 to recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo display state. ..
The demo display signal is set to the HI level when the demo display flag is "1", and is set to the LOW level when the demo display flag is "0".

Next, each process executed periodically (for example, 4 msec) by the payout control device 78 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the power saving mode control process, FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the power saving mode transition process, and FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the process during the power saving mode.

As shown in FIG. 35, the power saving mode control process determines in step S1901 whether or not the power saving mode in-progress flag is set in the RAM provided in the payout control device 78. The power saving mode flag is a flag indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is in the power saving mode, is set when the transition condition to the power saving mode is satisfied, and is cleared when the release condition is satisfied. The transition condition and release condition of the power saving mode will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S1901, the power saving mode transition process is executed in step S1902.

In the power saving mode transition process, as shown in FIG. 36, first, whether or not the demo display signal input from the main control device 71 in step S2001 is at the HI level and there is no input from the handle touch sensor 224. To judge.

If a negative determination is made in step S2001, the non-operation counter is cleared to "0" in step S2002. The non-operation counter is provided in the RAM of the payout control device 78, and is a counter that indicates the elapsed time since the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo display state and there is no input from the handle touch sensor 224. The non-operation counter is incremented by 1 for each timer interrupt process when the affirmative judgment is made in step S2001, and is cleared to "0" when the negative judgment is made in step S2001. After executing step S2002, the power saving mode transition process ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, the value of the non-operation counter is added by 1 in step S2003.

After the execution of step S2003, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not the value of the non-operation counter is "7500" (corresponding to 30 sec). If a negative determination is made in step S2004, the power saving mode transition process is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2004, the process proceeds to step S2005, the power saving mode flag is set, and the non-operation counter is cleared in the following step S2006. In the following step S2007, the power cutoff process is executed.

In the power cutoff process, the payout control device 78 sets the power supply permission signal to the power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on to the HI level. The power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on stops the power supply to the control devices other than the payout control device 78 by setting the power supply permission signal to the HI level. After that, the power saving mode transition process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the power saving mode control process (FIG. 35), the power saving mode control process ends after the power saving mode transition process in step S1902 is executed.

If it is determined in step S1901 that the power saving mode flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1903 to execute the power saving mode processing.

In the power saving mode processing, as shown in FIG. 37, first, in step S2101, the repetition counter provided in the RAM of the payout control device 78 is cleared. In the following step S2102, it is determined whether or not 4 msec has elapsed. If 4 msec has not elapsed, the process of step S2102 is executed again. This time is measured by counting the number of processes in step S2102. For example, if the time required from the negative determination in step S2102 to the execution of the process of step S2102 again is 0.1 msec, the count value becomes 40 times, and 4 msec elapses from the process of step S2101. It is determined that it has been done.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, the level of the signal output from the handle touch sensor 224 is confirmed and whether or not the detection signal is output from the handle touch sensor 224 is confirmed in step S2103. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a HI level signal is input to the terminal connected to the handle touch sensor 224.

If a negative determination is made in step S2103, the processes of steps S2101 to S2103 are repeatedly executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, the power recovery process is executed in step S2104.

In the power recovery process, the power supply permission signal output from the output port 401 is set to the LOW level. Upon receiving the LOW level power supply permission signal, the power-on power supply unit 113 starts supplying power to the main control device 71, the voice emission control device 72, and the display control device 121. In the following step S2105, the power saving mode flag is cleared, and the power saving mode processing ends.

Returning to the description of the power saving mode control process (FIG. 35), after the power saving mode processing in step S1903 is executed, the power saving mode control process ends.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has the following characteristic configurations as configurations for power cutoff and restoration.

Unlike the first embodiment, the payout control device 78, which is a sub control device, is directly supplied with electric power from the voltage conversion circuit 230 as the first control means, and determines whether or not to give the player a privilege. The main control device 71 is supplied with electric power from the voltage conversion circuit 230 via the output switching circuit 231 as the second control means. Further, the payout control device 78, which is the first control means, is defined as the main body of the power supply control of the plurality of control means when shifting to the power saving mode.

According to the above configuration, the payout control device 78, which is a sub control device among the main control device 71 and the sub control device, is defined as the main body of the power supply control. It is preferable that any control device (payout control device 78, voice emission control device 72 or display control device 121) among the plurality of sub control devices is defined as the main body (first control means) of the power supply control. Then, in the power saving mode, the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 is continued to the sub control device, and the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 is cut off to the main control device 71. In this case, when the main control device 71 and the sub control device are compared, the former has a larger calculation processing load and therefore a larger power consumption. In this respect, the power consumption can be reduced by continuing the power supply to the sub control device and cutting off the power supply to the main control device 71 under the implementation of power saving.

Further, as an auxiliary power supply means for temporarily supplying auxiliary power to the main control device 71 when the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the main control device 71 is cut off, the power supply unit 113 for power-on Is provided.

According to the above configuration, in the power saving mode, the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 is continued to the sub control device, and the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 is cut off to the main control device 71. Even if it is below, the main control device 71 can be operated, and a process for suppressing fraud can be appropriately performed.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the control regarding the display image of the symbol display device 41 in the state where the pachinko machine 10 has shifted to the power saving mode will be described. In the present embodiment, even if the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the power saving mode, the display control device 121 does not immediately stop the update process of the display image in the symbol display device 41, but displays until a predetermined stop image is displayed. Continue the image update process.
When the predetermined stop image is displayed, the display control device 121 stops the update process.

Specifically, the power saving mode transition process (FIG. 16) executed in step S219 of the timer interrupt process in the main control device 71 and the normal process (FIG. 25) executed in the display control device 121 are the above-mentioned first. It is different from the embodiment. The different configurations will be described below. In the following description, the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

First, the electrical configuration of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the display control of the symbol display device 41 in the present embodiment. The configuration shown in FIG. 38 is substantially the same as the configuration shown in FIG. 18, and a part thereof is modified.

As described above, in the display control device 121, the configuration of the power supply system differs between the image data determination unit 240 (see FIG. 18) including the display CPU 302 and the output control unit 241 (see FIG. 18) including the VDP 305. The display CPU 302 (image data determination unit 240) is supplied with drive power from the voltage conversion circuit 230 via the output switching circuit 231a, while the output switching is performed on the VDP 305 and the output port 336 (output control unit 241). The drive power is directly supplied from the voltage conversion circuit 230 without going through the circuit 231a. Further, the drive power is directly supplied to the symbol display device 41 from the voltage conversion circuit 230 as well as the VDP 305. As a result, even if the main control device 71 sets the power supply permission signal output to the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the LOW level, the power is continuously supplied to the VDP 305, the output port 336, and the symbol display device 41. It will be supplied. In other words, the image data can be output from the VDP 305 to the symbol display device 41 even in the power saving mode.

Further, the display control device 121 is provided with a backup power supply 420 as an auxiliary power supply means. The backup power supply 420 includes a capacitor as a power storage means, and is charged while power is being supplied to the display control device 121 from the power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on. When the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the display CPU 302 (image data determination unit 240) is cut off by the backup power supply 420, auxiliary power is temporarily supplied to the display CPU 302 (image data determination unit 240). It is supposed to be done. That is, since the main control device 71 is in the power saving mode, the display CPU 302 (image data determination unit 240) can be temporarily operated even when the power supply to the display control device 121 is cut off. ing. For example, it is possible to process a command for a power saving mode transmitted from the main control device 71. The time during which power is supplied to the display control device 121 by the backup power supply 420 is set to be longer than the time required to execute the effect for demo display (effect time for demo display).

<Power saving mode transition process of main controller 71>
Next, the power saving mode transition process (step S219 of FIG. 14) of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39. The process of FIG. 39 is replaced with the process of FIG. The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a power saving mode transition command is transmitted to the display control device 121 when the transition condition to the power saving mode is satisfied. The power saving mode transition command is a command for causing the display control device 121 to recognize that the pachinko machine 10 has shifted to the power saving mode.

Here, since steps S2201 to S2207 are the same processes as steps S401 to S407 in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

When it is determined in steps S2201 to 2205 that the condition for shifting to the power saving mode is satisfied, the power saving mode shift command is set as an output target to the voice emission control device 72 in step S2208. By setting the power saving mode transition command as the output target, the power saving mode transition command is transmitted to the display control device 121 via the voice emission control device 72. In the following step S2209, the power cutoff process is executed by setting the power supply permission signal to the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the LOW level.

In step S2208 described above, the wait process is executed in addition to the process of setting the power saving mode transition command as the output target. By the wait process, the period from the execution of step S2208 to the start of execution of step S2209 can be adjusted. In the present embodiment, after the process of step S2208 is executed, the power saving mode transition command set as the output target is received by the display control device 121, and the process executed based on the reception of the power saving mode transition command is completed. Step S2209 is executed after the lapse of time required by the time. As a result, when the power supply permission signal becomes the LOW level, the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the voice emission control device 72 is cut off, and it is possible to prevent the power saving mode transition command from reaching the display control device 121.

<Normal processing executed by display CPU 302>
In the present embodiment, the display control device 121 executes a specific process in the normal process based on the power saving mode transition command received from the main control device 71. The specific process executed in the normal process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 40 to 42. This normal processing is carried out in place of FIG. 25 described above.

As shown in FIG. 40, the normal process in the present embodiment is provided with the power saving display process for executing the display in the power saving mode, and the normal process in the first embodiment (FIG. 25). ) Is different. Here, since steps S2301 to S2303 in FIG. 40 are the same processes as steps S1001 to S1003, description thereof will be omitted. Hereinafter, the demo display process executed in step S2304 and the power saving display process executed in step S2305 will be described in detail.

<Demo display processing>
In the demo display process executed in step S2304, as shown in FIG. 41, it is first determined in step S2401 whether or not a demo start command has been received from the main controller 71.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, the display table for demo display is read from the program ROM 303 in step S2402 and stored in the display table storage area 304b of the work RAM 304, and is provided in the work RAM 304 in the subsequent step S2403. Set the demo display flag. The demo display flag is a flag indicating that the symbol display device 41 is displaying the demo, and is cleared when the game times control process of step S2301 executed in the normal process is started.

In the following step S2404, the demo display counter provided in the work RAM 304 is cleared. The demo display counter is a counter for counting the time elapsed since the start of the demo display, and is incremented by 1 each time the normal process is executed. The effect for demo display is configured to repeatedly execute a series of displays over a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), and the demo display counter has a series of demo display effect times (30 seconds) as one cycle. It is a counter, and it is configured to be cleared every time the production time elapses.

By checking the value of the demo display counter, the display CPU 302 can grasp the time elapsed since the start of a series of demo displays. Here, it is possible to associate the time elapsed since the start of the demo display with the image displayed on the symbol display device 41. Therefore, the display CPU 302 can grasp the content of the image displayed on the symbol display device 41 by checking the value of the demo display counter.

When a negative determination is made in step S2401 or after the execution of step S2404, it is determined in step S2405 whether or not the demo display flag is set. If a negative determination is made in step S2405, the demo display process is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2405, the process proceeds to step S2406, and the value of the demo display counter is incremented by 1.

In the following step S2407, it is determined whether or not it is the setting timing of the drawing list.
Specifically, by referring to the elapsed time of the effect measured by the demo display counter of the work RAM 304 and the display table currently stored in the display table storage area 304b, whether or not the setting timing of the drawing list is set or not. To judge. If a negative determination is made in step S2407, the demo display process ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2407, the process proceeds to step S2408. In step S2408, the information of the current drawing list is specified by collating the table information stored in the display table storage area 304b with the information of the demo display counter, and the information of the specified drawing list is stored in the drawing list information storage area. Read from 303b. Then, the read drawing list information is transmitted to the VDP 305. As a result, the VDP 305 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 23) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 24) already described, and the image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 so that the demo display proceeds. To update. After the execution of step S2408, the demo display process ends.

<Display processing during power saving>
Next, the power saving display process executed in step S2305 of FIG. 40 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42.

First, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the power saving mode transition command transmitted from the main control device 71 is received.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2501, the power saving mode flag provided in the work RAM 304 is set in step S2502. The power saving mode flag is a flag for causing the display CPU 302 to recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the power saving mode.

When a negative determination is made in step S2501 or after the execution of step S2502, it is determined in step S2503 whether or not the power saving mode flag is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S2503, the power saving display process ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, it is determined whether or not the drawing list information currently output to the VDP 305 in step S2504 corresponds to the stop image. The drawing list information has information as to whether or not it corresponds to the stop image. Here, as the stop image, the title logo image displayed at the end of the series of demo displays is set. This title logo image is still displayed for a certain period of time, and consists of still images such as a model name and a manufacturer name. The stop image is not limited to the image displayed at the end of the series of demo displays, and may be an image displayed in the middle of the series of demo displays. In that case, it is advisable to set an image to be displayed at a well-separated timing such as the start or end of a predetermined operation even in the middle of a series of demo displays.

If a negative determination is made in step S2504, the power saving display process ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2504, the power saving mode flag is cleared in step S2505. Then, the infinite loop is continued until the backup power supply 420 provided in the display control device 121 is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has the following characteristic configuration as the configuration for the display of the symbol display device 41 in the power saving mode.

A series of predetermined continuous images as images for demo display can be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and when displaying the series of continuous images, a display which is a first image display control means in which power is not supplied during power saving. The CPU 302 sequentially determines the image data. The determined image data is output to the symbol display device 41 by the VDP 305, which is the second image display control means to which power is supplied during power saving.

The display control device 121 serves as an auxiliary power means for temporarily supplying auxiliary power to the display CPU 302 when the power supply from the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the display CPU 302 is cut off, such as when shifting to the power saving mode. It is equipped with a backup power supply 420. The display CPU 302 executes the processes of steps S2503 to S2505 of the power saving display process (FIG. 42) during the period in which the display CPU 302 is operated by supplying the auxiliary power from the backup power source 420, so that the display CPU 302 can be selected from the images for demo display. The image data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is selectively determined.

According to the above configuration, by providing the backup power supply 420, the display CPU 302 supplies auxiliary power even when the power supply to the display CPU 302 by the power supply unit 113 for power-on is cut off, such as when shifting to the power saving mode. In response to this, it becomes possible to operate temporarily. As a result, even if the power supply to the display CPU 302 by the power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on is cut off, the image data is continuously updated by the display CPU 302 for a while, and eventually the image stored in the control RAM 332 in the VDP 305. Data updates will continue. In this case, unlike the configuration in which the update of the image data is stopped immediately when the power supply to the display CPU 302 by the power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on is cut off, the update stop timing of the image data is set after the power cutoff. Can be adjusted. Therefore, when the gaming machine is in the non-gaming state (power saving mode), it is possible to arbitrarily select an image in the symbol display device 41, that is, to display a desired image.

In addition, as a display image by the symbol display device 41, an image for production that displays the lottery result when a big hit lottery is performed due to the occurrence of a prize in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34, and the above lottery. An image for demo display, which is a standby image that is displayed regardless of the result, is set. The image for demo display is a series of continuous images displayed on the symbol display device 41 during the period when the image for production is not displayed. The display CPU 302 determines as image data for displaying one of the images for demo display on the symbol display device 41 during the period of operation by supplying the auxiliary power from the backup power supply 420.

When the pachinko machine 10 being played by the player shifts to the non-gaming state, the symbol display device 41 switches from the image for directing to the image for demo display, and the image for demo display is displayed. Under such a state, it is conceivable that the non-gaming state is detected by the power saving mode transition process (FIG. 39). In this regard, according to the configuration in which one of the demo display images is displayed on the symbol display device 41 in the non-gaming state as described above, when the display CPU 302 stops updating the image data, it remains as it is. The display image in the non-game state can be determined. Therefore, the processing can be simplified.

In the above configuration, it is not necessary to newly prepare a display image (dedicated image) in the non-gaming state, which is advantageous in preparing image data.

In addition, a title logo image is included in a part of the image for demo display. The display CPU 302 determines the title logo image among the images for demo display as image data for displaying on the symbol display device 41 during the period of operation by supplying the auxiliary power from the backup power supply 420.

According to the above configuration, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the non-gaming state (power saving mode), the title logo image is continuously displayed on the symbol display device 41. In this case, if the still image at the halfway timing of the series of continuous images remains displayed, the player who sees the still image may feel uncomfortable, and in some cases, the gaming machine may be mistakenly recognized as being out of order. There is a risk that it will be done. In this regard, by keeping the title logo image displayed as described above, it is possible to suppress inconveniences such as a player feeling uncomfortable.

The title logo image is, for example, a still image that is stationary for a certain period of time, and includes a model name, a maker name, a feature of the machine, an explanation of the game content, and the like in the image. In addition, a message or an image urging the player to perform the game, such as "Good luck" or "The big hit is coming soon", may be included.

Further, after the display CPU 302 selectively determines the image data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 from the series of continuous images during the period in which the display CPU 302 is operated by supplying the auxiliary power from the backup power supply 420, , Do not update the image data.

According to the above configuration, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the non-gaming state (power saving mode), after the image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is determined, the image data update process becomes unnecessary. This makes it possible to eliminate extra power consumption.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, drive power is supplied from the power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on to the main control device 71 that executes the jackpot lottery while the external power supply is being supplied. The power-on power supply unit 113 includes a voltage conversion circuit 230 as a drive power generation circuit for generating each drive power of the symbol display device 41, the display control device 121, and the main control device 71. The power supply path between the voltage conversion circuit 230 and the display CPU 302 of the display control device 121 is provided with an output switching circuit 231 as a power cutoff circuit that cuts off the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the display CPU 302. .. Power is supplied to the VDP 305 of the display control device 121 from the voltage conversion circuit 230 without going through the output switching circuit 231. The main control device 71 cuts off the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the display CPU 302 when it is detected that the pachinko machine 10 is in a non-gaming state while the external power supply is being supplied.

According to the above configuration, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the non-gaming state, the main control device 71 controls the state of the output switching circuit 231 so as to cut off the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the display CPU 302. As a result, the power consumption of the display control device 121 can be reduced. Further, the power supply management of the display CPU 302 and VDP 305 of the display control device 121 in the non-gaming state (power saving mode) can be appropriately performed.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the drive power continues to be supplied to the drive units 205 and 206 while the movable plates 201 and 202 of the movable accessory 200 are held at positions hidden behind the center frame 42. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the movable accessory can be held at the above position even if the drive power is not supplied to the drive unit. It is different from the form.

The above-mentioned different configurations will be described below. In the following description, the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

First, the configuration of the movable accessory according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44. FIG. 43 (a) is a front view of the variable display unit 36, and FIG. 43 (b) is a side view of the movable accessory as viewed from the right side. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the driving state of each driving unit and the position of each movable plate.

As shown in FIG. 43A, the variable display unit 36 is provided with a movable accessory 450. Like the movable accessory 200 in the first embodiment, the movable accessory 450 has movable plates 201 and 202 and drive units 205 and 206 connected to these movable plates 201 and 202. Further, the movable accessory 450 includes a movable plate stopper 451 for holding the movable plates 201 and 202 at a position hidden behind the center frame 42, and a drive unit 452 for driving the movable plate stopper 451. It has. The drive unit 452 is controlled by the voice emission control device 72 like the drive units 205 and 206 for the movable plates 201 and 202.

Like the shaft portions 201a and 202a, the movable plate stopper 451 is formed as a shaft extending in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, and is located above the front opening 42a of the center frame 42 and on the back side of the front plate 42b. It is provided at a position on the rotation trajectory of the movable plates 201 and 202.

As shown in FIG. 43B, the movable plate stopper 451 is connected to the drive unit 452 and can be displaced in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, the non-contact position (the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 43B) where the movable plate stopper 451 and the movable plate 201, 202 do not hit even if the movable plates 201 and 202 rotate, and the movable plate. When the 201 and 202 rotate, the movable plate stopper 451 and the movable plate 201 and 202 can be displaced at the contact position (the position indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 43B).

As shown in FIG. 44 (a), during the game of the pachinko machine 10, the movable plates 201 and 202 of the movable accessory 450 are both held behind the center frame 42 as the basic game position, and the pachinko machine 10 It is invisible from the front. The movable plate stopper 451 is arranged at the contact position by the drive unit 452, and can support the movable plates 201 and 202 from below.

When the movable plate stopper 451 supports the movable plates 201 and 202 from below, the rotational operation of the movable plates 201 and 202 is restricted, so that the movable plates 201 and 202 are not driven by the drive units 205 and 206. However, it does not appear at a position in front of the display screen G. This makes it possible to reduce the power consumed by the drive units 205 and 206 in order to hold the stop positions of the movable plates 201 and 202.

Then, as the predetermined game effect is performed during the game of the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), the movable plate 202 for the game effect appears at a position in front of the display screen G. .. In this case, by first energizing the drive units 205 and 206, both movable plates 201 and 202 are held at the current position (position behind the center frame 42) by the motor driving force, and in that state, the movable plate stopper 451 is not removed. By displacing to the contact position, the rotation restriction of both movable plates 201 and 202 is released. After that, the movable plate 202 can be made to appear in front of the display screen G by the drive control according to the content of the predetermined game effect. During the execution of the predetermined game effect, the movable plate 201 for power saving notification is held by the drive unit 205 at the position behind the center frame 42 so as not to appear in front of the display screen G. Is controlled by. When the above-mentioned predetermined game effect is completed, a notification stop command for instructing the control of arranging the movable plates 201 and 202 at the game basic position is transmitted from the main control device 71 to the voice emission control device 72. The movable plates 201 and 202 are in the state shown in FIG. 44 (a).

On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or in the power saving mode, both the drive units 205 and 206 are in the non-drive state, and the movable plate stopper 451 is arranged in the non-contact position by the drive unit 452, so that it is movable. Both the boards 201 and 202 appear in front of the display screen G due to their own weight. In this case, the information display unit 203 of the movable plate 201 arranged in front of the movable plate 202 can be visually recognized by the player.

Next, a configuration for driving the movable accessory 450 will be described with reference to FIG. 45.
FIG. 45 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration related to driving the movable accessory 450.

Voltages of + 5V and + 12V are supplied to the voice emission control device 72 from the output switching circuits 231a to 231c of the power supply unit 113 for power supply. The voice emission control device 72 supplies a voltage of + 12 V to the drive units 205 and 206 and the drive unit 452 of the movable accessory 450 as drive power. The voice emission control device 72 outputs a drive signal to the drive units 205 and 206 and the drive unit 452 based on receiving a command sent from the main control device 71. As described above, since the drive power is supplied from the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the drive units 205, 206 and the drive unit 452 via the voice emission control device 72, either when the external power supply is off or in the power saving mode. In this case as well, the drive power to the drive units 205 and 206 and the drive unit 452 is cut off.

Next, the power saving mode transition process (step S219 in FIG. 14) executed by the timer interrupt process of the MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This power saving mode transition process is executed instead of the power saving mode transition process (FIG. 16) described in the first embodiment. This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that when the mode shifts to the power saving mode, the drive processing of the drive units 205 and 206 and the drive unit 452 is executed and then the power cutoff process is executed.

Here, since steps S2601 to S2607 are the same processes as steps S401 to S407 in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

If it is determined in steps S2601 to 2605 that the conditions for shifting to the power saving mode are satisfied, the power saving notification command is set as the output target in step S2608. The power saving notification command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 72. Upon receiving the power saving notification command, the voice emission control device 72 outputs a drive signal to the drive units 205, 206 and the drive unit 452 so that the movable plate 201 for power saving notification is arranged in front of the display screen G.

In step S2608, the wait process is executed in addition to the process of setting the power saving notification command as the output target. In the wait process, after the power saving notification command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 72 in step S2608, the drive control corresponding to the power saving notification command is performed by the voice emission control device 72, and the movable accessory 450 is used for the power saving mode. Waits without proceeding to the next process until the time until the state of is elapsed.

In the following step S2609, the power cutoff process is executed by setting the power supply permission signal to the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the LOW level.

Next, the movable accessory drive process executed by the voice emission control device 72 to drive and control the movable accessory 450 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 47.

In the movable accessory drive process, first, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not a notification stop command for arranging the movable plates 201 and 202 at the game basic position has been received from the main control device 71. The notification stop command is a power-on setting process executed in the main process (FIG. 13) in the main control device 71, a power recovery process executed in the power saving process (FIG. 17), and a movable plate 202 for game production. After the predetermined game effect to be used is completed, it is transmitted from the main control device 71 to the voice emission control device 72.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2701, the movable plate stopper 451 is arranged at the non-contact position by driving the drive unit 452 in step S2702. By driving the drive units 205 and 206 in the following step S2703, the movable plates 201 and 202 are arranged from the front of the display screen G to the back position of the center frame 42. By driving the drive unit 452 in the following step S, the movable plate stopper 451 is arranged at the contact position. In the following step S2705, the drive units 205 and 206 are brought into the non-drive state, and the present movable accessory drive process is completed.
As a result, the movable accessory 450 is in the state shown in FIG. 44 (a).

If a negative determination is made in step S2701, it is determined in step S2706 whether or not an effect system command corresponding to the effect using the effect movable member has been received from the main control device 71. The effect system command is transmitted from the main control device 71 to the voice emission control device 72 based on the lottery result for the game round accompanying the acquisition of the hold information.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2706, the movable plates 201 and 202 are held behind the center frame 42 by driving the drive units 205 and 206 in step S2707. In the following step S2708, the movable plate stopper 451 is arranged at the non-contact position as in step S2702.

Here, the drive units 205 and 206 are predetermined by holding the movable plates 201 and 202 at positions that do not appear in front of the display screen G in a situation where the movable plate stoppers 451 are in the non-contact position. It is in a state of preparation for game production. The voice emission control device 72 drives and controls the drive unit 206 according to the content of the predetermined game effect, so that the movable plate 202 appears in front of the display screen G or behind the center frame 42 at a predetermined timing. It is possible to place it in a position. As a result, the movable accessory 450 can be brought into the state shown in FIG. 44 (b). During the execution of the predetermined game effect, the drive unit 205 is in the drive state and keeps holding the movable plate 201 at a position where it does not appear in front of the display screen G. After the execution of step S2708, the present movable accessory drive process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S2706, it is determined in step S2709 whether or not the power saving notification command has been received from the main control device 71. The power saving notification command is transmitted from the main control device 71 to the voice emission control device 72 when shifting to the power saving mode in the power saving mode transition process (FIG. 46).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2709, the movable plate stopper 451 is arranged at the non-contact position in step S2710 as in steps S2702 and S2708. In the following step S2711, as in step S2705, the drive units 205 and 206 are brought into the non-drive state, and the present movable accessory drive process is terminated. As a result, the movable accessory 450 is in the state shown in FIG. 44 (c).

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has the following characteristic configuration as a configuration for holding the movable plate 201 provided on the movable accessory 450 in the notified state or the non-notified state.

In the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the movable plate stopper as a holding means for holding the movable plate 201 in the second position when the movable plate 201 comes into contact with the drive unit 205 in the non-driving state. 451 is provided. When the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal mode, the movable plate stopper 451 holds the movable plate 201 in a second position that cannot be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

According to the above configuration, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the power saving mode, that is, when it is not in the non-gaming state, the movable plate 201 is seconded even if the driving unit 205 of the movable accessory 450 is not supplied with power. It can be held in a position (a position that cannot be seen from the front of the gaming machine). As a result, the power consumption can be further reduced.

<Other embodiments>
The content is not limited to the description of each of the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied independently to the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments, or may be applied to the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments in a predetermined combination.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the symbol display device 41 that displays the effect requires power to hold the screen display, not the liquid crystal display device that requires power to hold the screen display (image display state). It may be configured to display on electronic paper. Electronic paper is a display medium that does not require power to hold the screen display and can rewrite the screen with low power.

According to this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 in the power saving mode, the screen display can be continued even if the power supply to the symbol display device 41 is cut off. Further, since it is not necessary to supply power to the symbol display device 41, power is supplied to the output control unit (VDP305 and output port 336) that outputs image data corresponding to the display contents of the symbol display device 41 in the power saving mode. Can be blocked. As a result, it becomes possible to further reduce the electric power in the pachinko machine 10 in the power saving mode.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, as the symbol display device 41 for displaying the effect, the display is performed on a semi-transmissive liquid crystal display that makes it possible to visually recognize the displayed contents using a backlight and external light. It may be configured. Semi-transmissive liquid crystal is a method that combines the transmissive type and the reflective type by sandwiching a material such as a magic mirror behind the liquid crystal panel, and by using the backlight in dark places and the outside light in bright places. , A liquid crystal display device that takes advantage of both. By using the semi-transmissive liquid crystal, the display of the symbol display device 41 can be recognized by utilizing the reflection of external light, and the symbol display device 41 is displayed even if the backlight of the liquid crystal display device is turned off in the power saving mode. Can be recognized. As a result, it is possible to further reduce the electric power in the pachinko machine 10 in the power saving mode.

(3) In the third embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power saving mode, the display CPU 302 continues to update and transmit the image data by supplying power from the backup power supply 420 to the display CPU 302. The image data that is sequentially updated and transmitted is stored in the control RAM 332 of the VDP 305 as image data for power saving display, but this has been changed to update the image data on the display CPU 302 and to update the image data in the power saving mode. The image data for display at the time of power saving may be provided from other than the display CPU 302 without transmission. The following configurations can be considered as the configuration.

When the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the power saving mode and the transmission of the drawing list from the display CPU 302 to the VDP 305 is stopped, the VDP 305 switches the pachinko machine 10 to the power saving mode based on the detection of the transmission stop. Is detected. Further, the control ROM 331 of the VDP 305 stores image data (image data for displaying during power saving) corresponding to a predetermined image for causing the player to recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the power saving mode. When the VDP305 detects the transition to the power saving mode, the VDP 305 transmits data corresponding to the predetermined image to the symbol display device 41 based on the predetermined image data stored in the control ROM 331. In this case, the symbol display device 41 displays the predetermined image on the display screen G by receiving the data corresponding to the predetermined image.

With the above configuration, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power saving mode, that is, when the power supply to the display CPU 302 by the voltage conversion circuit 230 is cut off, in the VDP 305, the predetermined image data stored in the control ROM 331 is displayed. Based on this, a predetermined image is displayed on the symbol display device 41. As a result, even after the power supply to the display CPU 302 by the voltage conversion circuit 230 is cut off, the symbol display device 41 can notify that the power saving mode is in progress. In this case, in the power saving mode, all the power supply to the display CPU 302 including the supply of the backup power supply 420 may be stopped, so that the backup power supply 420 becomes unnecessary and further reduction of power consumption is realized. can.

(4) In the first embodiment, the movable accessory 200 is configured to move the movable plate 201 from a second position that cannot be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10 to a first position that can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10 due to its own weight. .. The present invention is not limited to this, and the movable accessory 200 may be configured to constantly urge the movable plate 201 to a predetermined appearance position (position in front of the screen of the symbol display device 41) by an urging means such as a spring. That is, an urging means such as a spring is provided on the movable accessory 200, and the urging force constantly urges the movable plate 201 in a direction to move the movable plate 201 to a predetermined appearance position (first position), and the drive unit 205. By the driving force, the movable plate 201 is kept at the game basic position (second position), which is the position behind the center frame 42, against the urging force of the urging means. In this case, in the normal mode of the pachinko machine 10, the movable plate 201 is held at a position invisible from the front of the pachinko machine. Then, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power saving mode and the drive unit 205 is de-energized, the movable plate 201 is moved to a position that can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine by the urging force of the urging means. As a result, power saving notification is performed by the movable plate 201 in the power saving mode.

(5) In the third embodiment, in order to display the title logo of the demo display image on the symbol display device 41 during the period in which the display CPU 302 is operated by supplying the auxiliary power from the backup power supply 420. Although the configuration is determined as the image data of, it does not have to be limited to the title logo.

For example, as an image for demo display, a low power consumption image in which the instantaneous power consumption in the display state on the symbol display device 41 is smaller than that of other images is included, and the low power consumption image is displayed on the symbol display device 41. A configuration that uses data is conceivable. When the image for demo display includes an image using a background color with low power consumption (for example, white) and an image using a background color with higher power consumption (for example, black), the former It is advisable to define the image as a low power consumption image. Further, when images including images having different power consumption due to the difference in brightness are included, one of the images may be defined as a low power consumption image.

According to the above configuration, when the gaming machine is in the non-gaming state (power saving mode), the low power consumption image is continuously displayed on the symbol display device 41. In this case, it is possible to reduce the power consumption of the symbol display device 41.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, as a means for detecting the non-gaming state, for example, the detection result of a motion sensor that detects the presence or absence of a player in front of the pachinko machine 10 may be used. For example, a sensor for detecting infrared rays may be provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 10, or a sensor for detecting weight using a piezoelectric element or the like may be provided on a chair for each gaming machine.

(7) The main control device 71 and the sub control device (payout control device 78, display control device 121, and voice emission control device 72) shown in the second embodiment are provided, and one of the sub control devices is the other. In the configuration for performing power management of the control device, a sub-control device other than the payout control device 78, that is, the display control device 121 or the voice emission control device 72 may be configured to perform power management for the other control devices. In this case, the handle touch sensor 224 is connected to the sub-control device that performs power management, and the sub-control device that performs the power management determines whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the gaming state or the non-gaming state. The configuration is to be made.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, a configuration other than the movable accessory 200 may be used as a notification means for notifying the player that the player is in a power saving state. That is, in the movable accessory 200 as the notification means, the movable plate 201 as the notification movable portion cannot be visually recognized from the first position (front position of the display screen G) that can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine and from the front of the gaming machine. The movable plate 201 is arranged at the first position in the power saving mode, but the configuration is changed so that the movable plate 201 is moved at the second position (the position behind the center frame 42). For example, an information display board to which notification information is attached is arranged at a position where it can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine in both power saving and non-power saving modes (for example, the front position of the display screen G), and the state of the arrangement. As it is, it is preferable to shift the information display board to the information display state in the power saving mode and to the information non-display state in the non-power saving mode (normal mode). In this case, as a means for switching the information display board between the information display state and the information non-display state, a configuration in which the front surface to which the notification information is given and the back surface to which the notification information is not given are inverted, or a light emitting means (lamp). Etc.) can be turned on / off to switch between the information display state and the information non-display state.

(9) It is also possible to use a screen device (roll screen device or the like) having a case and a screen that can be taken in and out of the case as the notification means. In this case, a screen device is provided on the front side of the gaming machine, and a message or the like indicating that power is being saved is written on the screen. For example, the screen may be taken in and out in front of the front glass of the pachinko machine. Then, in the normal mode in which power saving is not performed, the screen is stored in the case, and the screen is pulled out from the case when the power saving mode is changed. In this case, the screen device shall move the screen in and out according to the power supply, and the screen is housed (wound) in the case by driving the drive unit accompanying the power supply, and the screen is self-weighted by cutting off the power supply. It is good to pull it out.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the movable accessory 200 is not provided with both the movable plate 202 for game production and the movable plate 201 for power saving notification, but the movable plate 202 for game production and power saving notification. The movable plate 201 may be provided separately. In this case, it is preferable that the movable plate 201 for power saving notification appears at a position different from the position where the movable plate 202 for game production appears.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power saving mode, the main control device 71 is configured to display a predetermined display mode on the main display unit 43, but is peculiar to other gaming machines. The pachinko machine 10 may be configured to notify that the pachinko machine 10 is playable by using the configuration of.

As the above configuration, for example, a configuration using the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 and the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 can be considered. In the power saving mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened and closed, and the pachinko machine 10 is configured to perform a simulated effect for the power saving mode as if it is in the high frequency support mode. The operation is performed, and a simulated effect for the power saving mode is performed as if the open / close execution mode is in progress. As a result, the player who has seen the above-mentioned simulated effect is urged to start the game, and the player can easily select the pachinko machine 10.

(12) The ball lending device Y (see FIG. 11) may be included as an electric device whose power is cut off when power is saved. That is, when the main control device 71 performs the power cutoff process (step S408 in FIG. 16), the power supply to the ball lending device Y is stopped, and the power recovery process (step S505 in FIG. 17) is performed to perform the ball. The power supply to the rental device Y is restarted.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. A display unit that makes a part of the patterns visible, a starting operation means that starts rotation of the orbiting body when operated, and a drive that is provided for each orbiting body and rotates each orbiting body. The means, the stop operation means for stopping the rotation of each orbiting body when operated, the lottery means for drawing a winning combination when the start operation means is operated, and the start operation means are operated. In this case, the drive control means for driving and controlling each drive means to start the rotation of each circuit body and stop the rotation of each circuit body when the stop operation means is operated, and the lottery. It may be applied to a game machine such as a slot machine, which is provided with an effect display means for displaying the effect content based on the lottery result of the means, and displays the lottery result of the lottery means according to the stop mode of each orbiting body.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. A plurality of control means (main control device 71, voice emission control device 72, payout control device 78, and display control device 121) for controlling various operations of the gaming machine, and
A power supply means (power supply unit 113 for power-on) that supplies the driving power required by each of the control means to the plurality of control means while the game machine is supplied with an external power source is provided.
The plurality of control means include a first control means (main control device 71) and a second control means (voice emission control device 72, etc.).
The power supply means
A drive power generation circuit (voltage conversion circuit 230) that generates the drive power, and
A power cutoff circuit (output switching circuit 231) provided in the power supply path between the drive power generation circuit and the second control means to cut off the power supply from the drive power generation circuit to the second control means. The first control means is supplied with power from the drive power generation circuit without going through the power cutoff circuit.
Any of the plurality of control means has a power saving necessity determining means (for example, a function of executing steps S402, S405, S504 in the main control device 71) for determining the necessity of power saving in the gaming machine.
The first control means is the second control from the drive power generation circuit when it is determined by the power saving necessity determination means that power saving is to be performed in a state where the external power supply is supplied to the game machine. The power supply to the means is cut off, and when the determination that power saving is to be performed by the power saving necessity determination means is canceled, the power is supplied from the drive power generation circuit to the second control means. A gaming machine characterized by controlling the state of a power cutoff circuit.

According to the feature A1, the first control means cuts off the power supply from the drive power generation circuit to the second control means when the game machine is in the power saving state, for example, when the game is not performed by the player. The state of the power cutoff circuit is controlled so as to reduce the power consumption of the second control means and the power consumption of the electric device or the like to which the power is supplied via the second control means. .. Further, when the power saving state is released, for example, when a game by a player is newly started, the power is cut off so that the first control means supplies power from the drive power generation circuit to the second control means. It controls the state of the circuit, which returns the gaming machine to the normal state (non-power saving state).

In such a case, the first control means defined as the main body of the power supply control among the plurality of control means is supplied with power from the drive power generation circuit without going through the power cutoff circuit, and in that state, the first control means The power consumption of other control means (second control means) and the like is controlled. Therefore, even when an external power source is supplied to the gaming machine (a state in which the power switch is turned on), the power consumption of the gaming machine can be reduced. Further, after the power saving state is reached, the power saving can be released as appropriate.

Feature A2. The first control means
At the start of supply of the external power supply, the power supply command signal (power supply permission signal) is output to the power cutoff circuit to supply power from the drive power generation circuit to the second control means. Power supply start control means (function to execute step S101 in the main control device 71) and
When the power supply to the second control means is cut off by the power cutoff circuit and the power cutoff is released, the power supply command signal is output to the power cutoff circuit. The feature A1 is characterized in that it includes a power supply return control means (a function of executing step S505 in the main control device 71) for supplying electric power from the drive power generation circuit to the second control means. Game machine.

According to the feature A2, the processing of the first control means is the same when the supply of the external power supply to the gaming machine is started and when the power supply is restored from the power saving state (when the power cutoff to the second control means is released). , In each case, the output processing of the power supply command signal to the power cutoff circuit is performed. In this case, it is not necessary to individually require a circuit or the like for power cutoff at the time of starting the supply of the external power supply and at the time of returning from the power saving state, and it is configured to carry out the control for the power supply at each time. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of complications.

Feature A3. Equipped with a monitoring means (touch detection unit 225) for monitoring the game state of the player
The power saving necessity determination means is characterized in that it determines that power saving is performed by determining that the player is in a non-gaming state in which no game is played, based on the monitoring result by the monitoring means. Features The gaming machine according to A1 or A2.

According to the feature A3, the power saving of the gaming machine can be suitably performed as described above in the non-gaming state in which the player is not playing the game. Since the player is not playing the game during the power saving state, there is no problem even if the power supply of the second control means for controlling the operation of the gaming machine is cut off, and the power consumption is good. It becomes possible to reduce the amount of electricity.

Feature A4. When either the first control means or the second control means sequentially updates the numerical information (big hit random number counter C1 or the like) within a predetermined numerical range and the predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied. , The main control means (main control device 71) for acquiring the numerical information and performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the acquired numerical information.
The main control means includes means (function of executing step S502) for executing the update processing of the numerical information when the power supply from the drive power generation circuit to the second control means is cut off. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3.

According to the feature A4, the following effects are exhibited. The power saving state in which the power supply to the second control means is cut off is, for example, a non-gaming state, and it is not necessary to perform update processing for numerical information such as so-called random numbers. However, in the above configuration, numerical information such as random numbers is updated even in the power saving state. This makes it possible to take countermeasures against fraud in a power-saving state.

Feature A5. When either the first control means or the second control means sequentially updates the numerical information (big hit random number counter C1 or the like) within a predetermined numerical range and the predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied. , The main control means (main control device 71) for acquiring the numerical information and performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the acquired numerical information.
A lottery result display means (main display unit 43) whose display mode is controlled by the main control means to display the lottery result is provided.
The main control means controls the lottery result display means to display in a predetermined display mode when the power supply from the drive power generation circuit to the second control means is cut off. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, which comprises means for performing (a function of executing step S501).

According to the feature A5, the following effects are exhibited. The power saving state in which the power supply to the second control means is cut off is, for example, a non-gaming state, and the lottery result is not displayed in the lottery result display means. That is, it is not necessary to display the lottery result by the lottery result display means. However, in the above configuration, the lottery result display means is used even in the power saving state. Here, the display operation of the lottery result display means is controlled by the main control means, and the operation of the main control means is continued when the lottery result display means displays in a predetermined display mode. It means that it is. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player and the like that the power of the gaming machine itself is not turned off and the gaming can be restarted under the implementation of power saving.

In the state where the power supply from the drive power generation circuit to the second control means is cut off (power saving state), the lottery result display means is in the power saving state in a manner different from that at the time of displaying the lottery result. The display should be carried out. For example, when the lottery result is displayed, the light emitting member such as an LED is blinked to display, and when the power saving state is displayed, the light emitting member such as an LED is continuously turned on to display.

Incidentally, the lottery result display means (main display unit 43) is connected to the main control means (main control device 71) via a signal line, and the lottery result display means responds to the control signal input from the main control means. The result of the privilege grant lottery is displayed.

Feature A6. A notification means (movable accessory 200) for notifying the player that the power is being saved is provided.
A1 to A5, wherein the notification means shifts from a non-notification state to a notification state when the power supply from the drive power generation circuit to the second control means is cut off. The gaming machine according to any one.

According to the feature A6, when the gaming machine is in the power saving state (non-gaming state), the player (for example, the player who selects a new gaming machine to play in the gaming hall) is notified by the notification means. Can grasp that the gaming machine is in a power saving state, and can suppress the hindrance to selecting the gaming machine.

Feature A7. As the plurality of control means, various types are based on a main control means (main control device 71) that determines whether or not to give a privilege to the player according to the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and a control command from the main control means. The sub-control means (voice emission control device 72, payout control device 78, and display control device 121) for carrying out the control of the above is provided.
While using the main control means as the first control means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, wherein the sub-control means is used as the second control means.

According to the feature A7, of the main control means and the sub control means, the main control means is defined as the main body of the power supply control. Then, in the power saving state, the power supply from the drive power generation circuit is continued to the main control means, and the power supply from the drive power generation circuit is cut off to the sub control means. In this case, the main control means can be operated even while power saving is being performed, and a process for equalizing profits for the player and a process for suppressing fraud can be appropriately executed.

Feature A8. As the plurality of control means, various types are based on a main control means (main control device 71) that determines whether or not to give a privilege to the player according to the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and a control command from the main control means. The sub-control means (voice emission control device 72, payout control device 78, and display control device 121) for carrying out the control of the above is provided.
While the sub control means (payout control device 78) is used as the first control means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, characterized in that the main control means is used as the second control means.

According to the feature A8, the sub control means among the main control means and the sub control means is defined as the main body of the power supply control. When a plurality of sub control means are provided, one of them may be defined as the main body of power supply control (first control means). Then, in the power saving state, the power supply from the drive power generation circuit is continued to the sub control means, and the power supply from the drive power generation circuit is cut off to the main control means. In this case, when the main control means and the sub control means are compared, the former has a larger calculation processing load and therefore a larger power consumption. In this respect, the power consumption can be reduced by continuing the power supply to the sub control means and cutting off the power supply to the main control means under the implementation of power saving.

Feature A9. It is provided with an auxiliary power supply means (power supply unit 114 for power failure) that temporarily supplies auxiliary power to the main control means when the power supply from the drive power generation circuit to the main control means is cut off. The gaming machine according to feature A8.

According to the feature A9, in the power saving state, the power supply from the drive power generation circuit is continued to the sub control means, and the power supply from the drive power generation circuit is cut off to the main control means. Even if there is, the main control means can be operated, and a process for suppressing fraud can be appropriately performed.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. An operating unit (design display device 41, lamp units 58a, 58b) provided on the front side of the gaming machine and operating in a manner visible to the player, and
Control means (display control device 121, voice emission control device 72) for controlling the operation unit, and
A power supply means (power supply unit 113 for power-on) that supplies drive power to the control means, and
A game state detection means (a function of executing steps S402 and S405 in the main control device 71) for detecting a non-game state in which the player has not played a game, and
When the gaming state detecting means detects that the gaming machine is in a non-gaming state, the power cutting means (main control device) that cuts off the power supply from the power supply means to the control means in order to put the gaming machine into a predetermined power saving state. The function to be executed in step S408 in 71, and the output switching circuit 231c) and
A notification means (movable accessory 200) for notifying the player of the power saving state is provided.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the notification means shifts from a non-notification state to a notification state when the power supply to the control means is cut off by the power cutoff means.

According to the feature B1, when the gaming machine is in the non-gaming state, the gaming machine is in a predetermined power saving state, and in such a state, the power supply to the control means is cut off to reduce the power consumption. Can be planned. At this time, the power supply to the control means is cut off under the power saving state, so that the display is stopped, for example, in the display device (symbol display device 41) as the operating unit, and the same display remains. At first glance, any power saving treatment will be performed, such as reducing the illuminance of light emission or stopping the light emission at the lamp units (lamp units 58a, 58b) as operating units. It may not be possible to know whether or not a certain gaming machine is playable, but the notification of the notification means causes the player (for example, a player who selects a new gaming machine to play in the gaming hall) to save power. It is possible to grasp that the situation is the same, and it is possible to suppress the hindrance to the selection of a gaming machine.

Feature B2. The notification means can be operated by supplying electric power from the power supply means.
The power cutoff means also cuts off the power supply of the notification means when the power supply from the power supply means to the control means is cut off.
The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the notification means shifts from a non-notification state to a notification state when the power supply to the notification means is cut off.

According to the feature B2, when the power supply from the power supply means to the control means is cut off, the power supply from the power supply means to the notification means is also cut off. Then, when the power supply from the power supply means to the notification means is cut off, the notification means is put into the notification state. In this case, the use of electric power is not essential for information notification for power saving. Therefore, the configuration is more desirable from the viewpoint of power consumption.

Feature B3. The notification means is
A movable portion for notification (movable plate 201) to which notification information for making the player visually recognize that the power saving state is given is provided.
A drive unit (drive) that is driven by power supply from the power supply means and moves the notification movable unit between a first position that is visible from the front of the gaming machine and a second position that is invisible from the front of the gaming machine. Part 205) and
The moving unit for notification is characterized in that it can be moved to the first position when the power supply from the power supply means to the drive unit is cut off by the power cutoff means. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature B3, when the power supply from the power supply means to the drive unit of the notification means is cut off, the moving unit for notification moves to the first position (the position where the player can see). In this case, by shifting from the power supply state to the power cutoff state, that is, by shifting from the non-power saving state to the power saving state, the moving part for notification can be seen from the front of the gaming machine from the second position, which cannot be seen from the front of the gaming machine. It will move to the first visible position. At this time, since the moving part for notification that is not visually recognized in the non-power saving state is visually recognized in the power saving state, the player can grasp the power saving state depending on the presence or absence of the movable part for notification. In other words, with such a configuration, the power saving state can be recognized at a glance, and the recognition level can be raised. Therefore, it is suitable for making each player recognize the notification information for power saving.

Feature B4. The gaming machine according to feature B3, wherein the moving portion for notification is movable to the first position by its own weight and is moved to the second position by being driven by the driving portion.

According to the feature B4, the notification movable portion can be held in the first position (a position that can be visually recognized by the player) by utilizing the weight of the notification movable portion in the power saving state. In addition, by using the gravity that is constantly generated in the natural world to move the moving part for notification to the first position, it is possible to reliably move to the first position even when power is not supplied to the driving part. It becomes possible to move.

Feature B5. The moving portion for notification can be moved to the first position by the urging force of the urging means (spring or the like), and the driving portion is driven against the urging force of the urging means. The gaming machine according to feature B3, which is characterized in that it moves to a second position.

According to the feature B5, in the power saving state, the moving portion for notification can be held in the first position (the position where the player can see) by utilizing the urging force of the urging means.

Feature B6. A production device (movable accessory 200) having a production movable part (movable plate 202) that can be moved between a position that can be seen from the front of the game machine and a position that cannot be seen is provided as an effect according to the progress of the game. A gaming machine that operates the movable part for production.
The gaming machine according to any one of features B3 to B5, wherein the effect device is provided with a movable portion for notification.

According to the feature B6, in the effect device, the movable part for effect can be moved between the position where it can be seen from the front of the gaming machine and the position where it cannot be seen, and the movement of the movable part for effect can be moved during the game. It has attracted a great deal of attention from players. In addition, the effect device has a movable unit for notification that can be moved between a position that can be seen from the front of the gaming machine (first position) and a position that cannot be seen (second position), similar to the movable unit for effect. Is provided. In this case, the movable part for production and the movable part for notification operate in substantially the same manner, and the movable part for notification should be attracted by the player in the power saving state (non-gaming state). Can be done.

Feature B7. As the operation unit, a display means (design display device 41) for variablely displaying a pattern related to the game effect on the display area (display screen G) is provided.
The first position is a position in front of the gaming machine in the display area, and the second position is a position behind an enclosure (center frame 42) surrounding the display area. The gaming machine according to any one of B3 to B6.

According to the feature B7, when the gaming machine is in the power saving state, the moving portion for notification moves to a position in front of the gaming machine in the display area (that is, a position overlapping the front of the gaming machine). In this case, the display area in which the pattern is variablely displayed during the game in the gaming machine is a portion that tends to be noticed by the player, and the notification is made by the presence of the movable portion for notification at a position in front of the gaming machine in the display area. It is more likely that the player will see the notification information (notification information indicating that the power is being saved) attached to the movable portion. Therefore, it is possible to make the player preferably recognize that the gaming machine is in a power saving state.

Feature B8. Further, a holding means (movable plate stopper 451) for holding the notification movable portion at the second position by contacting the notification movable portion in the non-driving state of the driving unit is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of features B3 to B7, wherein the notification movable portion is held at the second position by the holding means when the gaming machine is not put into the power saving state.

According to the feature B8, when the gaming machine is not in the power saving state, that is, when it is not in the non-gaming state, the notification movable unit is placed in the second position (game) even if the driving unit of the notification means is not supplied with power. It can be held in a position where it cannot be seen from the front of the machine). As a result, the power consumption can be further reduced.

Feature B9. While the notification means is provided as the first notification means, the second notification means (main display unit 43) capable of notifying that the power saving state is achieved while power is being supplied from the power supply means is provided.
When the power supply to the control means is cut off by the power cutoff means, the power supply from the power supply means to the first notification means is cut off, and the power supply from the power supply means to the second notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B8.

According to the feature B9, in the power saving state (non-gaming state), the first notification means performs the power saving notification in a state where the power supply from the power supply means is cut off, and the second notification means is from the power supply means. The power saving notification is performed while the power is supplied. In this case, by performing the notification using both the first notification means and the second notification means, (1) is the power supply by the power supply means cut off by the power cutoff means for power saving? 2) It is possible to determine whether the power supply itself of the power supply means is stopped (for example, the power switch is off, the power supply system is out of order, etc.).

More specifically, in the state of (1) above, both the first notification means and the second notification means are in the notification state, whereas in the state of (2) above, the first notification is performed. The means is in the notification state, and the second notification means is in the non-notification state. Therefore, the states of the respective notification means are different in the above (1) and (2), and it is possible to discriminate between them (1) and (2).

Feature B10. Numerical information (big hit random number counter C1 etc.) is sequentially updated within a predetermined numerical range, and when a predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied, the numerical information is acquired and based on the acquired numerical information. , The main control means (main control device 71) that carries out a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to the player, and
A lottery result display means (main display unit 43) whose display mode is controlled by the main control means to display the lottery result is provided.
When the gaming machine is in the power saving state, the power supply from the power supply means to the main control means is continuously supplied.
The gaming machine according to feature B9, wherein the lottery result display means is used as the second notification means.

According to the feature B10, the following effects are exhibited. The power saving state is a non-gaming state, and the lottery result is not displayed by the lottery result display means. That is, it is not necessary to display the lottery result by the lottery result display means. However, in the above configuration, in the power saving state, the lottery result display means is used as one means of power saving notification. Here, the lottery result display means whose display operation is controlled by the main control means, and it is desirable that the power supply to the main control means is continued even when power saving is performed from the viewpoint of fraud prevention and the like. Considering this, it can be said that it is convenient to use the lottery result display means as the second notification means.

In the state where the power supply from the drive power generation circuit to the second control means is cut off (power saving state), the lottery result display means is in the power saving state in a manner different from that at the time of displaying the lottery result. The display should be carried out. For example, when the lottery result is displayed, the light emitting member such as an LED is blinked to display, and when the power saving state is displayed, the light emitting member such as an LED is continuously turned on to display.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. A pattern display means (design display device 41) that displays a variable pattern of a pattern, and
A display control means (display control device 121) that controls the display contents by the pattern display means, and
A power supply means (power supply unit 113 for power-on) that supplies driving power to the pattern display means and the display control means, and
It is provided with a game state detecting means (a function of executing steps S402 and S405 in the main control device 71) for detecting a non-game state in which the player has not played a game.
The display control means
A first image display control means (image data determination unit 240 (display CPU 302)) that determines while sequentially updating image data related to an image to be displayed on the pattern display means.
The image data determined by the first image display control means is input, and each time the input is performed, the image data is stored in a storage unit (control RAM 332), and the stored image data is stored in the pattern display means. It has a second image display control means (output control unit 241 (VDP305)) to output the data.
The power supply means has a means for supplying electric power to the first image display control means, a means for supplying electric power to the second image display control means, and the means for supplying electric power to the pattern display means.
When the gaming state detecting means detects that the game is in a non-gaming state, the power supply to the first image display control means is cut off, while the power supply to the second image display control means and the pattern display means is supplied. A gaming machine characterized by continuous implementation.

According to the feature C1, when the gaming machine is in the non-gaming state, the power supply means does not supply power to the first image display control means, so that the power consumption can be reduced by utilizing the period during which the gaming machine is not played. It will be possible. Further, in the power saving state in which the power consumption is reduced, the power supply to the second image display control means and the pattern display means continues, so that the picture of the image data stored in the storage unit is displayed even in the power saving state. It becomes possible to continue the display in the display means. As a result, it is possible to display a pattern in line with the intention even after the gaming machine shifts to the power saving state while reducing the power consumption.

In the power supply means (power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on), as a means for supplying power to the first image display control means (display CPU 302), for example, the first image is transmitted via a power cutoff circuit (output switching circuit 231). Power is supplied to the display control means, and as a means for supplying power to the second image display control means (VDP305) and the pattern display means (design display device 41), for example, a power cutoff circuit (output switching) is used. The electric power is supplied to the second image display control means and the pattern display means without going through the circuit 231).

Feature C2. A predetermined series of continuous images (images for demo display) can be displayed on the pattern display means, and when displaying the series of continuous images, the first image display control means sequentially determines image data. A gaming machine in which the determined image data is output to the pattern display means by the second image display control means.
An auxiliary power supply means (backup power supply 420) that temporarily supplies auxiliary power to the first image display control means when the power supply to the first image display control means by the power supply means is cut off. ,
The first image display control means selectively displays image data to be displayed on the pattern display means from the series of continuous images during a period of operation by supplying auxiliary power from the auxiliary power supply means. The gaming machine according to feature C1, which is characterized in that it is determined in.

According to the feature C2, by providing the auxiliary power supply means, the first image display control means has the auxiliary power even when the power supply to the first image display control means (display CPU 302) by the power supply means is cut off. It will be able to operate temporarily by receiving the supply of. As a result, even if the power supply to the first image display control means by the power supply means is cut off, the image data is continuously updated by the first image display control means for a while, and eventually the second image display control means ( The image data stored in the storage unit (control RAM 332) in the VDP 305) is also continuously updated. In this case, unlike the configuration in which the update of the image data is stopped immediately when the power supply to the first image display control means by the power supply means is cut off, the stop timing of the update of the image data is adjusted after the power cutoff. can. Therefore, when the gaming machine is in a non-gaming state (power saving state), it is possible to arbitrarily select an image in the pattern display means, that is, to display a desired image.

Feature C3. As the display image by the pattern display means, an image for production that displays the lottery result when a privilege granting lottery (big hit lottery) is carried out due to the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an image for display regardless of the lottery result are displayed. A gaming machine in which an image for standby (an image for demo display) is set, and the image for standby is displayed on the pattern display means while the image for production is not displayed. And
The standby image is the series of continuous images.
The first image display control means is for causing the pattern display means to display any image of the standby images during a period of operation by supplying auxiliary power from the auxiliary power supply means. The gaming machine according to feature C2, which is determined as image data.

According to the feature C3, the following effects are exhibited. When the gaming machine being played by the player shifts to the non-gaming state, the premise is that the pattern display means (design display device 41) changes from the image for production to the image for standby (image for demo display). Is switched, and the standby image is displayed. Under such a state, it is conceivable that the gaming state detecting means detects the non-gaming state. In this regard, according to the configuration in which one of the standby images is displayed on the pattern display means in the non-gaming state as described above, the image data is displayed in the first image display control means (display CPU 302). When the update of is stopped, the display image in the non-game state can be determined as it is. Therefore, the processing can be simplified.

In the above configuration, it is not necessary to newly prepare a display image (dedicated image) in the non-gaming state, which is advantageous in preparing image data.

Feature C4. A predetermined title logo image is included in a part of the standby image.
The first image display control means is for displaying the title logo image of the standby images on the pattern display means during a period of operation by supplying auxiliary power from the auxiliary power supply means. The gaming machine according to feature C3, which is determined as image data.

According to the feature C4, when the gaming machine is in the non-gaming state (power saving state), the title logo image is continuously displayed on the pattern display means. In this case, if the still image at the halfway timing of the series of continuous images remains displayed, the player who sees the still image may feel uncomfortable, and in some cases, the gaming machine may be mistakenly recognized as being out of order. There is a risk that it will be done. In this regard, by keeping the title logo image displayed as described above, it is possible to suppress inconveniences such as a player feeling uncomfortable.

The title logo image is, for example, a still image that is stationary for a certain period of time, and includes a model name, a maker name, a feature of the machine, an explanation of the game content, and the like in the image. In addition, a message or an image urging the player to perform the game, such as "Good luck" or "The big hit is coming soon", may be included.

Feature C5. The standby image includes a low power consumption image in which the instantaneous power consumption in the display state by the pattern display means is smaller than that of other images.
The first image display control means is for causing the pattern display means to display the low power consumption image of the standby images during a period of operation by supplying auxiliary power from the auxiliary power supply means. The gaming machine according to feature C3, which is determined as image data of the above.

According to the feature C5, when the gaming machine is in the non-gaming state (power saving state), the low power consumption image is continuously displayed on the pattern display means. In this case, it is possible to reduce the power consumption of the pattern display means.

For example, as an image for standby (an image for demo display), an image using a background color with low power consumption (for example, white) and an image using a background color with higher power consumption (for example, black). If is included, the former image may be defined as a low power consumption image. Further, when images including images having different power consumption due to the difference in brightness are included, one of the images may be defined as a low power consumption image.

Feature C6. The first image display control means selectively selects image data to be displayed on the pattern display means from the series of continuous images during a period of operation by supplying auxiliary power from the auxiliary power supply means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C2 to C5, wherein the image data is not updated after the determination is made.

According to the feature C6, when the gaming machine is in the non-gaming state (power saving state), after the image to be displayed by the pattern display means is determined, the image data update processing becomes unnecessary. This makes it possible to eliminate extra power consumption.

Feature C7. The second image display control means
With a determination means for determining that a non-gaming state has been detected by the gaming state detecting means (for example, a means for determining a non-gaming state due to the stop of data transmission from the display CPU 302 to the VDP 305). ,
A specific image data storage means (control ROM 331) that stores data of a specific image indicating that the game is in a non-gaming state, and
A means for causing the pattern display means to display the specific image based on the data of the specific image stored in the specific image data storage means when the determination means determines that the player is in the non-gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature C1, which comprises.

According to the feature C7, when the gaming machine is in a non-gaming state, that is, when the power supply to the first image display control means (display CPU 302) by the power supply means is cut off, the second image display control means (VDP305) ), The specific image is displayed on the pattern display means based on the specific image data stored in the specific image data storage means (memory owned by the VDP 305 itself). As a result, even after the power supply to the first image display control means by the power supply means is cut off, the pattern display means displays (notifies) that power saving is performed in a non-gaming state. can. (In this case, the backup power supply (backup power supply 420) is unnecessary because all the power supply to the first image display control means, including the backup power supply, may be stopped in the non-gaming state. However, further reduction in power consumption can be realized.)
Feature C8. A main control means (main control device 71) for carrying out a privilege grant lottery (big hit lottery) when a predetermined condition is satisfied is provided, and the main control means is driven from the power supply means in a state where an external power source is supplied. It is a gaming machine that is supplied with electric power.
The power supply means
A drive power generation circuit (voltage conversion circuit 230) that generates each drive power of the pattern display means, the display control means, and the main control means, and
A power cutoff circuit provided in the power supply path between the drive power generation circuit and the first image display control means of the display control means to cut off the power supply from the drive power generation circuit to the first image display control means. (Output switching circuit 231), and the second image display control means of the display control means is supplied with power from the drive power generation circuit without going through the power cutoff circuit. And
When the gaming state detecting means detects that the main control means is in a non-gaming state while the external power is being supplied, the driving power generation circuit transfers the driving power generation circuit to the first image display controlling means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7, characterized in that the power supply of the machine is cut off.

According to the feature C8, when the gaming machine is in the non-gaming state, the main control means controls the state of the power cutoff circuit so as to cut off the power supply from the drive power generation circuit to the first image display control means. As a result, it is possible to reduce the power consumption of the display control means. Further, for each image display control means of the display control means, power management in a non-gaming state (power saving state) can be appropriately performed.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a picture display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures, the variable display of the plurality of pictures is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a privilege is given to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

41 ... symbol display device, 42 ... center frame, 43 ... main display unit, 58a, 58b ... lamp unit, 71 ... main control device, 72 ... voice emission control device, 78 ... payout control device, 112 ... power supply circuit, 113 ... Power supply unit for power-on, 121 ... display control device, 200 ... movable accessory, 201, 202 ... movable plate, 203 ... information display unit, 205, 206 ... drive unit, 225 ... touch detection unit, 230 ... voltage conversion circuit , 231 ... Output switching circuit, 240 ... Image data determination unit, 241 ... Output control unit, 302 ... Display CPU, 305 ... VDP, 332 ... Control RAM, 335 ... Drawing area, 420 ... Backup power supply, 451 ... Movable plate stopper , C1 ... jackpot random number counter, C2 ... jackpot type counter, C3 ... reach random number counter, C4 ... electric accessory release counter, G ... display screen.

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a plurality of control devices such as a main control device, a payout control device, and a display control device are provided to execute processing regarding the progress of the game. Further, a prize detection sensor is connected to the main control device, a payout motor is connected to the payout control device, and a plurality of devices such as a symbol display device and a lamp are connected to the display control device (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The plurality of control devices are connected to a power supply device, and power is supplied from the power supply device.

JP-A-2007-7465

In recent years, it has been desired to reduce the power consumption of pachinko gaming machines and the like, and when the game has not been played for a predetermined period of time, the power consumption (power saving) of the device used for the production such as the symbol display device and the lamp is to be implemented. Is being considered.

However, with the existing technology, it has been difficult to optimize the state of the gaming machine during power saving. That is, it is difficult to control each of the plurality of control devices in a desired state in the power-saving gaming machine, or the gaming machine is in the power-saving state for the player from the state in front of the gaming machine. It may be difficult to recognize.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of optimizing the state of the gaming machine during power saving.

The present invention
Multiple control means for controlling various operations of the gaming machine,
With the external power supplied to the gaming machine, the power supply means for supplying the driving power required by each of the control means to the plurality of control means, and the power supply means.
With
The plurality of control means include a first control means and a second control means.
A drive power generation circuit provided in the power supply means and generating the drive power,
A suppression circuit provided in the power supply path between the drive power generation circuit and the control unit of the second control means to suppress power supply from the drive power generation circuit to the control unit of the second control means.
With
Power is supplied to the control unit of the first control means from the drive power generation circuit without going through the suppression circuit.
Wherein any of a plurality of control means, provided for determining the power-saving necessity determination means the necessity of power saving in the gaming machine, in a state in which the external power supply to those the recreation machine is being supplied, the power saving necessity When it is determined by the determination means that power saving is to be performed, the power supply from the drive power generation circuit to the control unit of the second control means is suppressed, and it is determined that power saving is to be performed by the power saving necessity determination means. releasing been Ri said from the driving power generating circuit is configured to control the suppression circuit such that the power supply is divided line to the control unit of the second control means you if,
The first control means sequentially updates the numerical information within a predetermined numerical range in the control unit of the first control means, and acquires the numerical information when the predetermined acquisition conditions are satisfied. , based on the acquired numerical information is that control means to implement a predetermined drawing, and when the power supply electric power supply is performed from the driving power generating circuit to the control unit of the second control means In any case where is suppressed, the numerical information is updated at the same cycle.
The gaming machine is provided with a notification means for notifying the player that power is being saved when the power supply from the driving power generation circuit to the control unit of the second control means is suppressed. It is a feature.

According to the present invention, it is possible to optimize the state of the gaming machine during power saving.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a perspective view which shows the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a rear view which shows the pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of the symbol display apparatus (a), (b). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a), (b) a movable accessory. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of the movable accessory in FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the driving state of each driving part, and the position of each movable plate, (a)-(c). (A) A perspective view of the launch operation device viewed from the front, and (b) a perspective view of the launch operation device viewed from the rear. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning or failing lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for demo display executed in MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power saving mode transition process executed by MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power saving processing executed by MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the configuration for executing a power cutoff process and a power recovery process. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure which concerns on the display control of a symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the software structure of a character ROM. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing in a display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the initial transfer processing in VDP. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of drawing data in VDP. It is a flowchart which shows the output processing of the drawing signal in VDP. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process in a display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the game times control processing in a display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing by a normal symbol in a display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the display table in a display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during change by a normal symbol in a display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the background image control processing in a display CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the configuration for executing the power cutoff process and power recovery process in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by MPU in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure information storage process executed by MPU in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for demo display executed by MPU in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the power saving mode control process executed by the payout control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the power saving mode transition process executed by the payout control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process in power saving mode executed by the payout control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure about the display control of the symbol display device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the power saving mode transition process executed by MPU in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which is executed by the display CPU in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the demo display process executed by the display CPU in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the power saving display process executed by the display CPU in 3rd Embodiment. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the movable accessory in 4th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the driving state of each driving part and the position of each movable plate in (a)-(c) 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure which concerns on the driving of the movable accessory in 4th Embodiment. This is a power saving mode transition process executed by the MPU according to the fourth embodiment. This is a movable accessory drive process executed by the voice emission control device according to the fourth embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the game area is omitted.

The pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a game machine main body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. And have. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. It is said that. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation tip side when viewed from the front. It is supposed to be movable.

As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11. And also has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a front view of the game board 24.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating port 33, a lower operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a main display unit 43, an accessory display unit 44, and the like. ing. A plurality of general winning openings 31 are provided, and a plurality of through gates 35 are also provided.

Each general winning opening 31, variable winning device 32, upper working opening 33, lower working opening 34, and each through gate 35 are provided with a winning detection sensor in a one-to-one correspondence. All of these detection sensors are arranged on the back side of the game board 24, and the detection result is output to the main control device described later. An electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used as the detection sensor, but the sensor to be used is arbitrary as long as it can individually detect the winning of the game ball.

When the occurrence of a ball entering the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, and the lower operating port 34 is detected, a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, when a ball enters the upper operating port 33 and a ball enters the lower operating port 34, three prize balls are paid out and a general prize is won. When a ball enters the mouth 31, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the variable winning device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary, for example, the number of prize balls related to the lower operating port 34 is larger than the number of prize balls related to the upper operating port 33, and the number of prize balls of both operating ports 33 and 34 is large. It may be different. Further, the number of prize balls related to the variable winning device 32 is not limited to a configuration larger than the number of other prize balls, and for example, the number of prize balls related to the general winning opening 31 may be smaller than the number of prize balls.

In addition, an out port 37 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and a game ball that does not enter various winning openings or the like is discharged from the game area through the out port 37. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 38 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Aspects that are not included are also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the ball from entering the game ball into the out port 37, the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, the lower operating port 34, or the through gate 35 The entry of a game ball is also referred to as a prize.

The upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24. Both the upper actuating port 33 and the lower actuating port 34 are opened upward. Further, both operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper operating port 33 faces upward. The lower operating port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric accessory 34a is connected to an electric accessory drive unit 34b mounted on the back side of the game board 24, and is driven by the electric accessory drive unit 34b to be in a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) and in a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state). It is placed in either the open state (support state or guide state). When the electric accessory 34a is closed, the game ball cannot win the lower operating port 34, and when the electric accessory 34a is opened, the lower operating port 34 can be won.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and the state in which the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 34 is likely to occur and the state in which the winning is not impossible but the winning is more difficult to occur than the above-mentioned state in which the winning is likely to occur. The accessory 34a may be switched. Further, the electric accessory 34a may be inadequate, and switching between a state in which winning is likely to occur and a state in which winning is less likely to occur may be performed by displacement of the lower operating port 34 itself.

The variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening 32a leading to the back side of the game board 24, and also includes an opening / closing door 32b for opening and closing the large winning opening 32a. The opening / closing door 32b is connected to a variable winning drive unit integrally provided as the variable winning device 32 (the connection location is not shown), and is driven by the variable winning drive unit to be in either the closed state or the open state. Placed in the door. Specifically, it is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize, and when the transition to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery, the game ball is switched to an open state in which a prize can be won.

Further, the variable winning device 32 is formed with a winning passing portion at a position where the game ball winning the variable winning device 32 always passes through the large winning opening 32a, and further, at the position of the winning passing portion. The big winning opening detection sensor is provided so that the detection unit exists. The game balls that have won the variable winning device 32 are individually detected by the large winning opening detection sensor.

In the main display unit 43, the variation display of the pattern is performed by triggering the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is performed. The result of the internal lottery based on this is clearly indicated by the display. The display result by the main display unit 43 is information representing the internal lottery result, and corresponds to a so-called special symbol (special symbol). In the pachinko machine 10, the winning of the upper operating port 33 and the winning of the lower operating port 34 are not distinguished in the internal lottery, and the winning is performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. The result of the internal lottery is clearly shown on the main display unit 43, which is a common display area. Then, when the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the main display unit 43. After being displayed and the variable display is stopped, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

The main display unit 43 is composed of a segment display unit in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and the like. It may be composed of other types of display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display. Further, as a pattern (display information) that is variablely displayed on the main display unit 43, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, and a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed are displayed. A configuration or a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the accessory display unit 44, the variation display of the pattern is performed by triggering the winning of the through gate 35, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35 is obtained. Explicitly indicated by the display. The display result by the accessory display unit 44 corresponds to a so-called ordinary symbol (normal diagram). If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the through gate 35 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric service open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 44 and the variable display is displayed. After being stopped, it shifts to the electric service open state. In the electric service open state, the electric accessory 34a provided in the lower operating port 34 is in the open state in a predetermined mode.

The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 for variable display (or variable display or switching display) of a symbol which is a kind of symbol, and a center frame 42 is arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 41. Has been done. The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device having a display screen such as a CRT, and may be a dot matrix display. It may be a vessel.

In the symbol display device 41, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. That is, when the main display unit 43 performs the variable display, the symbol display device 41 performs the variable display accordingly.

The display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

The design, which is a kind of design, is composed of nine types of main designs with numbers "1" to "9", and sub-designs consisting of shell-shaped patterns. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as an octopus are assigned numbers "1" to "9" to form a main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 6A, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols.

As shown in FIG. 6B, on the display screen G, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has become like. Further, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set on the display screen G.

When the effect for game rotation is performed on the display screen G based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled in a predetermined direction with periodicity. The variable display starts at. Then, the variable display is switched to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are statically displayed in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 for game use. The production of is finished.

In addition, when the production for the game round is completed, if the game round corresponds to the occurrence of the probability variation jackpot result described later, a combination of symbols with the same odd number is formed on one of the effective lines. If it is a game round corresponding to the occurrence of a normal jackpot result described later, a combination of symbols having the same even number is formed on one of the effective lines. Further, it may be configured such that a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, "3.4.1") is formed although it is not a combination of symbols in which the same number is attached to any of the effective lines.

It should be noted that, based on the winning of any of the operating ports 33 and 34, the variation display is started on the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41, a predetermined stop result is displayed, and the variation display is stopped. Corresponds to one game.

Further, the mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern to be variablely displayed by the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned symbol, and for example, only numbers may be variablely displayed as the symbol.

As shown in FIG. 5, a first holding lamp unit 45 corresponding to the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41 is provided on the upper left portion on the front surface side of the center frame 42. The maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the first holding lamp unit 45.

A second holding lamp portion 46 corresponding to the accessory display portion 44 is provided in the upper right portion of the center frame 42. The number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 is held up to four times, and the number of holdings is displayed by lighting the second holding lamp unit 46.
It should be noted that the functions of the holding lamp units 45 and 46 may be fulfilled by the display in a part of the area of the symbol display device 41.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the game board 24 is provided with a magnet detection sensor 24a and a radio wave detection sensor 24b as abnormality detection means.

The magnet detection sensor 24a is installed on the back side of the game board 24 around the upper operating port 33. As described above, since the upper operating port 33 triggers an internal lottery, an act of bringing a magnet close to the upper operating port 33 in front of the window panel 57 to illegally guide the game ball to the upper operating port 33 is performed. is assumed. On the other hand, by providing the magnet detection sensor 24a, it is possible to detect when a fraudulent act using the magnet is performed.
The magnet detection sensor 24a is electrically connected to a main control device described later, and the detection result of the magnet detection sensor 24a is input to the main control device.

The position of the magnet detection sensor 24a is not limited to the above, and for example, in order to suppress fraudulent acts that attempt to illegally win a prize in the general winning opening 31 using the magnet. A magnet detection sensor 24a may be arranged around the general winning opening 31.

The radio wave detection sensor 24b is installed on the back side of the game board 24 around the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34. More specifically about this position, the radio wave detection sensor 24b is arranged at substantially the same height position as both the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 in the height direction, and the upper operating port 33 and the upper operating port 33 in the lateral direction. It is arranged closer to the rotation base end side of the gaming machine main body 12 than the lower operating port 34. Here, since the payout device described later for executing the payout of the game ball is arranged at a position closer to the rotation base end side of the game machine main body 12, the radio wave detection sensor 24b is laterally connected to the actuating port device and the payout device. It can be said that it is placed between.

As described above, since the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 trigger an internal lottery, radio waves are illegally output toward the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 in front of the pachinko machine 10 to be used for the upper operating port. It is assumed that the detection sensor or the detection sensor for the lower operating port erroneously detects the passage of the game ball. On the other hand, since the radio wave detection sensor 24b is provided, it is possible to detect when a fraudulent act using the radio wave is performed. The radio wave detection sensor 24b is electrically connected to a main control device described later, and the detection result of the radio wave detection sensor 24b is input to the main control device.

The position of the radio wave detection sensor 24b is not limited to the above, and may be, for example, closer to the rotating tip side of the gaming machine main body 12 than the operating port device, and the operating port device and the variable winning device. It may be arranged at a height position between 32 and 32. Further, although the radio wave detection sensor 24b can detect a radio wave of 50 MHz to 3 GHz as a predetermined frequency, it should be able to detect a radio wave having a frequency that can cause erroneous detection to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. For example, the frequency range is arbitrary, and the frequency range to be detected may be changed.

Further, the variable display unit 36 is provided with a movable accessory. The movable accessory will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 9. FIG. 7 is an explanatory view for explaining a movable accessory provided on the game board 24, FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of the movable accessory in FIG. 7, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship with the position of a plate.

As shown in FIG. 7A, the variable display unit 36 includes a movable accessory 200. As shown in FIG. 8, the movable accessory 200 has two movable plates 201 and 202 that overlap each other in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, and shaft portions 201a and 202a are provided at one ends of the movable plates 201 and 202. Each is provided. The shaft portions 201a and 202a are provided at positions above the front opening 42a of the center frame 42 and on the back side of the front plate 42b, and the movable plates 201 and 202 rotate about the shaft portions 201a and 202a as center points. As a result, the position hidden behind the center frame 42 (the position indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 7A) and the position appearing from the center frame 42 and becoming the front of the screen of the symbol display device 41 (FIG. 7 (a)). ) And the position shown by the solid line). Of the two movable plates 201 and 202, the movable plate 201 on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is a moving member for notification for notifying that the pachinko machine 10 is in a power saving state, and the movable plate 202 on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is , Is a movable member for effect used for game effect by the variable display unit 36.

As shown in FIG. 7B, both movable plates 201 and 202 are members having a substantially T shape and having the same shape and dimensions. The movable plate 201 has an information display unit 203 that displays notification information for power saving notification, and the information display unit 203 contains a notification message such as "Power saving is in operation. A game is possible." Has been done. In addition to this, the information display unit 203 may be provided with information regarding recovery from the power saving state, and may include, for example, a notification message such as "recover when the handle is touched."

Further, the movable plate 202 has an information display unit 204 for displaying notification information for game production, and the information display unit 204 describes, for example, a notification message such as "It's super hot !!". There is.

As shown in FIG. 8, the shaft portion 201a of the movable plate 201 has a solid shape, whereas the shaft portion 202a of the movable plate 202 has a hollow shape, and the shaft portion 201a is formed in the hollow portion of the shaft portion 202a. By inserting the shaft portions 201a and 202a, the shaft portions 201a and 202a are arranged in a double inner and outer shape and coaxially. The movable plate 202 on the rear side is formed with a through hole 202b for penetrating the shaft portion 201a of the movable plate 201 on the front side.

Drive units 205 and 206 made of motors and the like are provided on the shaft units 201a and 202a, respectively, and the movable plates 201 and 202 can operate independently by the drive units 205 and 206. .. When the drive units 205 and 206 are in a non-drive state (motor non-energized state), the movable plates 201 and 202 appear at a position in front of the screen of the symbol display device 41 due to their own weight, and each drive unit is displayed. By driving 205 and 206 (by energizing the motor), the movable plates 201 and 202 are lifted and held behind the center frame 42 against their own weight.

Since both movable plates 201 and 202 are members having the same shape and dimensions, the movable plates 201 and 202 appear in front of the screen of the symbol display device 41 due to their own weight when the motor is not energized. In particular, when both movable plates 201 and 202 are overlapped in the front-rear direction, the movable plate 202 for directing is hidden by the movable plate 201 for power saving notification so that it cannot be seen or becomes difficult to see from the front of the pachinko machine 10. .. By making the movable plate 201 for power saving notification larger than the movable plate 202 for the effect, the movable plate 202 for the effect can be more visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where both the movable plates 201 and 202 are overlapped in the front-rear direction. It can be difficult.

As shown in FIG. 9A, both the movable plates 201 and 202 of the movable accessory 200 are held at the back positions of the center frame 42 as the basic game positions during the game of the pachinko machine 10. In this state, the player cannot visually recognize the movable accessory 200 (movable plates 201, 202) from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

Then, as a predetermined game effect is performed during the game of the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 9B, the movable plate 202 for the game effect appears at a position in front of the screen of the symbol display device 41. Put out. At this time, if the drive unit 206 on the movable plate 202 side is not driven (motor is not energized), the movable plate 202 appears at a predetermined appearance position by its own weight, but the drive control of the drive unit 206 causes a predetermined speed. It is desirable to move the movable plate 202 to a predetermined appearance position. The movable plate 201 for power saving notification remains arranged behind the center frame 42.

On the other hand, when the power is not turned on for the pachinko machine 10, both the drive units 205 and 206 are in the non-drive (motor non-energized) state as shown in FIG. 9 (c). Both the movable plates 201 and 202 appear at a predetermined appearance position, that is, at a position in front of the screen of the symbol display device 41 due to their own weight. At this time, of the two movable plates 201 and 202, the movable plate 201 for power saving notification is located on the front side. In the power saving mode, the movable plate 201 for power saving notification is present in front of the screen, so that when the player in the game hall selects, for example, a new pachinko machine to play a game, the symbol display device 41 By looking at the movable plate 201 at the same time as looking into the machine, it is recognized that the pachinko machine 10 (a non-gaming game machine in which the player has not played a game) is in a power saving state. In this case, even if the symbol display device 41 displays the display in a display form different from that during the game, it can be recognized that the game is possible at any time for the purpose of saving power. For example, in the power saving mode, even if the stop image is still displayed on the symbol display device 41 or the display form is changed due to the illuminance of the liquid crystal backlight being reduced, it can be recognized that it is for power saving. .. The power saving mode will be described in detail later.

Returning to the description of FIG. 5, the inner rail portion 48 and the outer rail portion 49 are attached to the game board 24, and the guide rail is composed of the inner rail portion 48 and the outer rail portion 49 to launch the game ball. The game ball launched from the mechanism 51 is guided to the upper part of the game area.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launch mechanism 51 is attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21, and is stored in the launch rail 52 extending toward the guide rail and the upper plate 61a described later. It includes a ball feeding device 53 that supplies a game ball onto the launch rail 52, and a solenoid 54 that is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied on the launch rail 52 toward the guide rail. By operating the launch operation device 55 provided on the front door frame 14, the solenoid 54 is driven and controlled, and the game ball is launched.

Next, the configuration of the launch operation device 55 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10A is a perspective view of the launch operation device 55 viewed from the front, and FIG. 10B is a perspective view of the launch operation device 55 viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, the launch operation device 55 includes a base 220 fixed to the front door frame 14, a front unit 221 constituting the front side of the launch operation device 55, a base 220, and the base 220. It is provided between the front units 221 and includes an operation handle 222 that is rotated (rotated) when the game ball is launched.

The base 220 is formed in a cylindrical shape by an opaque material such as ABS resin, and the inner and outer diameters of one opening side are both expanded (hereinafter, this expanded region is expanded. 223). Further, the base portion 220 is integrally formed with a shaft hole portion extending in the same direction as the axis on the same axis as the diameter-expanded region 223. A shaft member for a handle is rotatably supported in the shaft hole portion about the above axis, and an operation handle 222 is provided by fixing the shaft member to a fixing ring portion formed at an intermediate position of the shaft member for the handle. Has been done.

The operation handle 222 is made of ABS resin, and a metal film is plated on the entire peripheral surface thereof. The metal film serves as an operation detection electrode for detecting the presence or absence of a game operation by the player. It should be noted that the metal film is not plated on the entire peripheral surface of the operation handle 222, but a metal film is plated on a part of the operation handle 222, for example, a finger hook portion provided in a protruding shape on the outer peripheral portion of the operation handle. The operation handle 222 may be made of metal.

The operation handle 222 is provided with a handle touch sensor 224 for detecting that the player is operating the operation handle 222. The handle touch sensor 224 includes a touch detection unit 225 composed of electrodes (the metal film described above) provided on the operation handle 222, and a signal processing unit 226 electrically connected to the touch detection unit 225. ing. A capacitor is built in the signal processing unit 226, and when the player's hand comes into contact with the outer surface of the touch detection unit 225 and the capacitance of the capacitor changes, a predetermined electric signal corresponding to the handle operation detection (hereinafter referred to as , Touch detection signal) is output to the firing control unit. The steering wheel touch sensor 224 outputs a HI level signal when the steering wheel is operated, and outputs a LOW level signal when the steering wheel is not operated. The relationship between LOW and HI may be reversed. Based on the touch detection signal, the launch control unit recognizes that the player's hand is in contact with the outer surface of the operation handle 222, that is, the player is playing a game.

The front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 56 so that almost the entire area of the game area can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 56 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 57 is fitted therein. The window panel 57 is formed colorless and transparent by glass, but is not limited to this, and may be formed colorless and transparent by synthetic resin, and the game area can be visually recognized through the window panel 57 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. If possible, it may be formed to be colored and transparent.

Light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the window 56. An indicator lamp portion 58a is provided above the window portion 56 as a part of various lamp portions. Further, a pair of left and right error lamp portions 58b are provided on both the left and right sides of the indicator lamp portion 58a and at the upper corner portions of the front door frame 14. Further, a pair of left and right speaker units 59 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided adjacent to the error lamp unit 58b.

Below the window portion 56 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 61 and a lower bulging portion 62 that bulge toward the front side are arranged vertically. An upper plate 61a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 61, and a lower plate 62a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 62. The upper plate 61a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 51 side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 62a has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 61a.

In the region of the upper bulging portion 61 facing the front of the pachinko machine 10, for example, an effect operating device 60 including a push button device and an operating portion manually operated by the player is provided. The operation unit of the effect operation device 60 is manually operated by the player in order to make the effect content on the display screen of the symbol display device 41 or the like a predetermined effect content.

In the pachinko machine 10, the display mode on the display screen of the symbol display device 41 is switched based on the operation of the effect operation device 60. Specifically, a plurality of types (for example, three types) of background images are set in the standby image displayed until the game round is started and the game round image displayed in the situation where the game round is being executed. The background image can be switched by operating the effect operation device 60 in a situation where the game times or the open / close execution mode is not executed. Further, based on the fact that the effect operation device 60 is operated under a predetermined condition in the situation where the game round is being executed, the image corresponding to the operation is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24), a main control device 71 that controls the main control of the game, and a voice or lamp display and a display control device (not shown) are controlled. The voice emission control device 72, which controls the sound emission control device 72, is installed.

The substrate box 71a of the main control device 71 may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or may be provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box 71a are inseparably bonded, and a bonding portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of separation is formed, and an adhesive layer is adhered at the time of peeling. It is conceivable that a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being peeled off by remaining on the case is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box 71a can be considered.

The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 71 and the sound emission control device 72.

The back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4.

The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 73 formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism portion 74 and a control device collecting unit 75 are attached to the back pack 73. The back pack 73 has a base portion 119 to which the payout mechanism portion 74 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion 122 that protrudes rearward of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape.

The base portion 119 is provided with an external terminal plate 81 at the upper right portion thereof. Various output terminals are provided on the external terminal plate 81, and various signals are output to the management computer on the game hall side through these output terminals.

A payout mechanism portion 74 is arranged on the base portion 119 so as to bypass the protective cover portion 122. That is, a tank 76 opened upward is provided at the uppermost portion of the back pack 73, and the tank 76 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. A tank rail 132 that gently inclines toward the downstream side is connected below the tank 76, and a case rail 133 that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 132. A payout device 77 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 133. The game ball paid out from the payout device 77 is discharged to the upper plate 61a or the lower plate 62a through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 77.

A back pack substrate 135 is installed in the payout mechanism portion 74. For example, an AC 24V main power supply is supplied to the back pack board 135, and the power is turned on or off by the switching operation of the power switch 135a.

A control device assembly unit 75 is attached to the lower end of the base portion 119. The control device collective unit 75 generates and outputs predetermined electric power required by the payout control device 78 having a function of controlling the payout device 77 and various control devices, and is accompanied by the operation of the launch operation device 55 by the player. It includes a power supply and a launch control device 79 for controlling the launch of the game ball. The payout control device 78 and the power supply and launch control device 79 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 78 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

The back pack 73 is provided with an external terminal plate 81 in addition to the payout mechanism unit 74 and the control device collecting unit 75. The external terminal plate 81 is installed at the upper corner portion on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 on the rotation base end side of the back pack unit 15. The external terminal board 81 is a board for outputting a predetermined signal in order to make the management computer of the game hall recognize the state of the pachinko machine 10.

The payout control device 78 includes a payout control board that controls the payout device 77 in the board box 144. The signal of the payout command from the payout control device 78 to the payout device 77 is relayed by the back pack substrate 135 described above. Further, the payout control device 78 is provided with a state return switch 145. For example, when the state return switch 145 is pressed when a payout error such as a ball jam in the payout device 77 occurs, the ball jam is cleared.

In the power supply and launch control device 79, the power supply and the launch control board are housed in the board box 146, and the board generates and outputs predetermined electric power required by various control devices and the like, and further, the launch operation by the player. The launch of the game ball is controlled according to the operation of the device 55.
Further, the power supply and the firing control device 79 are provided with a RAM erasing switch 147. This pachinko machine 10 has a storage and retention function for various data so that it can retain the state at the time of a power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure and can return to the state at the time of a power failure when recovering from the power failure. It has become.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 11, the supply line of operating power and other power from the power supply and emission control device 79 to the main control device 71, the voice emission control device 72, the payout control device 78, the display control device 121, and the symbol display device 41. The supply line is indicated by a double line arrow, and the other signal lines are indicated by a solid line arrow.

The main control device 71 includes a main control board 91 that controls the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board (power failure monitoring board) 96 that monitors the power supply. The MPU 92 is mounted on the main control board 91. The MPU 92 contains a ROM 93 and a RAM 94.

The ROM 93 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention, such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory, as read-only. The ROM 93 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 92.

The RAM 94 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access and is the same. When compared with the data capacity of, the time required for reading is faster than that of ROM 93. The RAM 94 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed.

In addition to the above elements, the MPU 92 or the main control board 91 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be individually chipped. This also applies to control devices other than the main control device 71.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. An input / output port is provided, and the configuration may be such that the input / output port can be switched as needed. This also applies to the MPU of the control device other than the main control device 71. Various control devices are connected to the input side and the output side of the MPU 92, and various sensors, various drive units, and various display units are connected. First, a configuration related to connection with various sensors, various drive units, and various display units will be described.

On the input side of the MPU 92, winning detection sensors 31a, 32d, 33a provided for the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, the lower operating port 34, and the through gate 35 in the game area, 34c and 35a (hereinafter collectively referred to as winning detection sensors) are electrically connected via electrical wiring. In this case, the main control board 91 and each winning detection sensor may be connected via one electric wiring, or a relay board may be interposed in the middle of each signal path. This also applies to the configuration related to the connection with other devices. The MPU 92 receives a signal from each winning detection sensor, and makes a winning determination (ball winning determination) for each winning unit based on the reception result.

In addition to the above-mentioned winning detection sensors, a magnet detection sensor 24a and a radio wave detection sensor 24b are electrically connected to the input side of the MPU 92 via electrical wiring. The MPU 92 receives signals from the magnet detection sensor 24a and the radio wave detection sensor 24b, and determines the presence or absence of an abnormality to be detected based on the reception results.

On the output side of the MPU 92, an electric accessory drive unit 32c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 32b of the variable winning device 32 and an electric accessory drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 are electrically wired. It is electrically connected via. Further, on the output side of the MPU 92, the main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are electrically connected via electrical wiring. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 91, and the MPU 92 executes drive control of various drive units 32c and 34b and display control of various display units 43 and 44 through the driver circuits.

That is, the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 32c is executed in the MPU 92 so that the large winning opening 32a is opened and closed in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the electric accessory 34a is won in the open state, the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b is executed in the MPU 92 so that the electric accessory 34a is opened and closed. Further, at each game round, the display control of the main display unit 43 is executed in the MPU 92. Further, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a is clearly indicated, the display control of the accessory display unit 44 is executed in the MPU 92.

Incidentally, although the description by illustration is omitted, an external terminal plate 81 is connected to the output side of the MPU 92. The MPU 92 sets information in the RAM 94 according to the progress of the game. Then, the external terminal board 81 is set for signal output according to the information set in the RAM 94, and the state of the pachinko machine 10 is recognized by the management computer of the game hall.

The payout control device 78 includes a payout control board 101 that controls the payout of game balls through the payout device 77.

The payout device 77 is switched between a state in which the game ball supplied from the tank 76 to the payout device 77 is prevented from flowing down to the downstream side and a state in which the game ball is sent out to the downstream side. A payout motor 77a for driving a ball stop member such as a rotating body is provided, and a payout detection sensor 77b for individually detecting a game ball sent out to the downstream side is provided. A payout motor 77a is electrically connected to the output side of the payout control device 78 via electrical wiring, and a payout detection sensor 77b is electrically connected to the input side of the payout control device 78 via electrical wiring. Has been done. In the payout control device 78, the game ball is paid out by supplying a drive signal to the payout motor 77a through the driver circuit provided on the payout control board 101, and the payout is completed based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor 77b. Grasp the number of game balls played.

Further, the payout control board 101 is electrically connected to the ball rental connection terminal plate 105 provided on the back pack unit 15 through electrical wiring, and the ball rental connection terminal plate 105 is ball rental through electrical wiring. It is electrically connected to the device Y.

The ball lending device Y is a so-called CR unit, which is provided on the side of the outer frame 11 although the description by illustration is omitted, and a card insertion slot is provided on the front side of the ball lending device Y. By inserting the card into the card insertion slot and manually operating the ball lending operation device (not shown) provided in the pachinko machine 10, a number of game balls corresponding to the amount stored in the card can be rented out. You can receive it. The payout control device 78 executes ball lending control by transmitting and receiving an electric signal to and from the ball lending device Y.

It should be noted that what is inserted into the ball lending device Y when receiving the lending of the game ball is not limited to the card, and may be cash or a coin in which cash information is stored.
Further, in addition to the payout device 77 and the ball lending device Y, a fullness detection sensor for detecting whether the ball tray such as the lower plate 62a is full of game balls is electrically connected to the payout control board 101. At the same time, a ballless detection sensor for detecting whether the tank 76 is in a ballless state is electrically connected.

The voice emission control board 72a of the voice emission control device 72 is connected to the output side of the MPU 92. The voice emission control board 72a drives and controls the display lamp unit 58a, the error lamp unit 58b, and the speaker unit 59 based on the command received from the MPU 92, and transmits the command to the display control board 121a of the display control device 121. Further, the effect operation device 60 is connected to the voice emission control device 72, and the control of the indicator lamp unit 58a, the speaker unit 59, and the display control device 121 is executed based on the manual operation on the effect operation device 60. It is also designed to be. Further, a movable accessory 200 is connected to the voice emission control device 72, and the voice emission control device 72 drives and controls the drive units 205 and 206 based on the command received from the main control device 71.

The display control board 121a analyzes various commands received from the voice emission control device 72, performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the analysis result, and controls the display of the image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

The power supply and launch control device 79 includes a power supply and launch control board 111, and the power supply and launch control board 111 include a main control device 71, a payout control device 78, a voice emission control device 72, and a display control device 121. A power supply circuit 112 having a function of generating operating voltages required for various electric devices such as a control device, a symbol display device 41, a drive unit of various motors, lamps, and sensors is provided. The power supply circuit 112 is provided with a power supply unit 113 for turning on power and a power supply unit 114 for turning off power.

The power supply unit 113 for power-on is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like via a power switch 135a, and the main control device 71, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, The operating voltage required for each control device such as the payout control device 78, the voice emission control device 72 and the display control device 121, and various electric devices such as the symbol display device 41 is generated, and the generated operating voltage is used as each of the above. It supplies to control devices and various electric devices. As an outline, the power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on takes in the AC 24V power supply via the power supply switch 135a provided in the back pack unit 15, and supplies the + 24V voltage to the power failure monitoring board 96 of the main control device 71. , Generates + 12V voltage for driving various sensors, motors, etc., + 5V voltage for logic, etc. The power-on power supply unit 113 supplies a + 24V voltage to the power failure monitoring board 96 of the main control device 71, and supplies a + 5V voltage to each control device other than the main control device 71. Further, a + 12V voltage is supplied to each of the above control devices and the symbol display device 41. Here, the payout control device 78 and the voice emission control device 72 carry out various controls for various electric devices such as drive units of various motors and lamps and sensors, respectively, and the control targets thereof. + 12V voltage is supplied from each control device to each of the various electric devices. For example, a + 12V voltage is supplied to the various lamp units 58a and 58b and the drive units 205 and 206 of the movable accessory 200 via the voice emission control device 72.

As described above, the power switch 135a is provided on the back pack board 135, and can be switched on and off by the operation of the hall manager, and the power supply (main power supply) of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by the switching operation.・ It is turned off.

The main control device 71 is another control device (payout control device 78, voice emission control) that also receives power supply from the power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on while receiving power from the power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on. The device 72 and the display control device 121) have a function of controlling the power supply state. That is, the main control device 71 is configured to output a power supply permission signal (power supply command) to the power supply permission unit 113 at the time of power supply, and based on the power supply permission signal, the power supply for power supply at the time of power supply. In unit 113, a state of supplying + 5V voltage and + 12V voltage (power supply state) and + 5V voltage to each control device (payout control device 78, voice emission control device 72, display control device 121) other than the main control device 71. And, switching to a state in which + 12V voltage is not supplied (power cutoff state) is performed.

When the power is turned on by turning on the power switch 135a, the power supply permission signal output from the main control device 71 is operated to, for example, the HI level, so that a predetermined control device or a predetermined control device or a predetermined control device is used via the power supply unit 113 for power-on. Power is supplied to the electrical equipment of. Further, after the power is turned on, the power supply permission signal is operated to, for example, the LOW level, so that the power supply to the predetermined control device and the predetermined electric device is cut off. By such power interruption, it is possible to reduce the power consumption (power saving) of the pachinko machine 10 in the power-on state of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, the power switch 135a is on). However, the details of the power saving process will be described later.

In the main control device 71, a power failure monitoring board 96 is provided at a position in the middle of the power supply path between the power supply unit 113 for power-on and the MPU 92. The power failure monitoring board 96 monitors the voltage of + 24V, which is the maximum voltage generated by the power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on, converts + 24V into a + 5V voltage, and outputs the voltage to the MPU 92. Then, when this voltage becomes less than + 22V, it is determined that a power failure has occurred, and the output setting of the power failure signal (power failure signal) to the MPU 92 is assumed to correspond to the occurrence of the power failure (power failure). Specifically, a LOW level power failure signal is transmitted when it is determined that the power cutoff has not occurred, and a HI level power failure signal is transmitted when it is determined that the power cutoff has occurred. .. The relationship between LOW and HI may be reversed.

The power supply unit 114 for power interruption is composed of a capacitor as a power storage means, and is supplied from the power supply unit 113 for power on when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON (when power is supplied from a commercial power supply). It is charged by the electric power generated. Further, in a power cut state (when the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off) such as when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF or when a power failure occurs in the commercial power supply, the RAM 94 is discharged from the power supply unit 114 for power failure. The storage holding power (backup power) is supplied to the power supply. Therefore, even in such a situation, the information stored in the RAM 94 is stored and held without being erased while the storage holding power is being supplied from the power supply unit 114 at the time of power failure.

By the way, the capacity of the power supply unit 114 at the time of power failure may be any capacity as long as the information stored in the RAM 94 before the power supply is cut off can be held within a predetermined period of time, and in this embodiment, one day. It has a capacity that allows memory retention for about 2 days. Further, the power supply unit 114 for power failure is not limited to a capacitor, and may be a storage means such as a battery or a non-rechargeable battery. In the case of a non-rechargeable battery, it is not necessary to store electricity in the power supply unit 114 at the time of power failure when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is ON, but it is necessary to replace the battery periodically.

Further, when the voltage of + 24V becomes less than 22V, the drive voltage supplied to the MPU 92 via the power failure monitoring board 96 may fluctuate with respect to + 5V, and even if the MPU 92 is operated under such a situation, there is no problem. There is concern that it will reach. In this regard, in the power supply and the emission control board 111, even after the + 24V power supply becomes less than 22V, the control system is driven with respect to the MPU 92 by discharging the power supply unit 114 for a predetermined time from the power supply unit 114 at the time of power failure. It is configured to maintain the output of + 5V, which is the power supply, at a normal value. In this pachinko machine, for example, when the + 24V power supply becomes less than 22V, the MPU 92 executes the processing for power failure according to the power failure signal = HI output from the power failure monitoring board 96, but at the time of the power failure. Power is supplied to the MPU 92 from the power supply unit 114 at the time of power failure in a time sufficient for carrying out the processing for power failure (a time longer than several msec required for one processing of the MPU 92). As a result, the MPU 92 can normally execute and complete the process for power failure.

Further, as described above, the power failure monitoring board 96 outputs a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power failure to the MPU 92 when the input voltage from the power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on becomes + 22V. Here, the power failure monitoring board 96 is determined to have a drive voltage (for example, + 5V) required to output a power failure signal. When the input voltage to the power failure monitoring board 96 suddenly drops from a value larger than + 22V to a value smaller than the drive voltage, the power failure signal to the main control device 71 cannot be output. In this pachinko machine 10, the power failure monitoring board 96 has a parasitic capacitance not intended by design, and in reality, it is possible to operate for about 1 second after the input voltage becomes smaller than the drive voltage. ing. Therefore, even if the power supply from the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the main control device 71 is suddenly cut off, the main control device 71 is supplied with power by the power supply unit 114 for power failure and power failure monitoring. The power failure signal from the board 96 can be received, and the occurrence of a power failure can be detected. The operating time of the power failure monitoring board 96 in the situation where the input voltage suddenly drops is not limited to about 1 second, and is determined by the size of the parasitic capacitance of the power failure monitoring board 96.

Here, the configuration related to the supply of operating power from the power supply circuit 112 to the main control device 71, the payout control device 78, the voice emission control device 72, the display control device 121, and the symbol display device 41 will be described in detail.

The electric power from the power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on is supplied to the VCS terminal of the MPU 92 of the main control device 71, the input terminal of the payout control board 101, the input terminal of the sound emission control board 72a, and the input terminal of the display control board 121a. .. In a situation where power is supplied from a commercial power source by the power supplied to each terminal, various control processes are executed by each control device 71, 72, 78, 121.

On the other hand, the power from the power supply unit 114 for power failure is supplied to the VBB terminal of the MPU 92 of the main control device 71, but is supplied to the payout control device 78, the voice emission control device 72, and the display control device 121. No. That is, the memory holding power from the power supply unit 114 at the time of power failure is supplied to the RAM 94, but is not supplied to the RAM provided in the payout control device 78, the voice emission control device 72, and the display control device 121. Therefore, in a situation where the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off, the RAM 94 of the main control device 71 stores and holds the information, but the payout control device 78, the voice emission control device 72, and the display control device 121 are provided. Information is not stored and retained in the RAM.

As described above, the memory holding power from the power supply unit 114 at the time of power failure is supplied to the RAM 94 of the main control device 71, but the RAM provided in the payout control device 78, the voice emission control device 72, and the display control device 121. By adopting a configuration in which the power supply unit 114 is not supplied to the power supply unit 114, the capacity of the power supply unit 114 at the time of power failure can be reduced. As a result, the initial cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In addition to the power supply circuit 112, the power supply and launch control board 111 is provided with a launch control circuit 115 that controls the launch of the game ball. The launch control circuit 115 is provided with a transmission circuit 116 for satisfying the conditions, a launch permission receiving circuit 117, and a launch IC 118.

The condition-satisfying transmission circuit 116 has a function of transmitting a condition-satisfying signal in a predetermined signal form to the MPU 92 when a predetermined launch condition of the game ball is satisfied.

In the launch control circuit 115, the touch sensor 224 for the handle that detects that the operation handle 222 of the launch operation device 55 is touched by the player and the operation handle 222 are rotated as a configuration for determining the establishment of the launch condition. The ball stop switch 55b, which is manually operated by the player to stop the firing of the game ball even in the operated situation, is electrically connected. Although not shown, the launch control circuit 115 is electrically connected to the payout control board 101, and whether or not the ball lending device Y is electrically connected to the ball lending connection terminal plate 105. Input a signal indicating.

The transmission circuit 116 that satisfies the condition receives a signal (touch detection signal) indicating that the operation handle 222 is being touched by the player from the handle touch sensor 224, and is manually operated by the player from the ball stop switch 55b. When a signal indicating that the condition is not satisfied is received and a signal indicating that the ball lending device Y is connected is received from the payout control device 78, a HI level condition satisfying signal (condition is satisfied) to the MPU 92. Corresponding signal) is transmitted. If any of the above signals is not received, a LOW level condition satisfaction signal (a signal that does not correspond to the condition satisfaction) is transmitted to the MPU 92. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed.

The steering wheel touch sensor 224 is also connected to the main control device 71, and the touch detection signal output from the steering wheel touch sensor 224 is also input to the main control device 71. The main control device 71 determines whether or not the player is playing a game by monitoring the touch detection signal from the touch sensor 224 for the steering wheel, and based on the determination result, the mode from the normal mode to the power saving mode. Performs a determination as to whether or not to carry out the migration. By shifting to the power saving mode, it is possible to reduce the power consumption in the situation where the game is not played. The process for the power saving mode will be described in detail later.

The launch permission receiving circuit 117 is a HI level launch permission signal (launch permission) transmitted from the MPU 92, provided that the HI level condition satisfaction signal is transmitted from the condition satisfaction transmission circuit 116 to the MPU 92. It has a function of continuously supplying the signal corresponding to the launch permission signal to the launch IC 118 when the launch permission signal is received. When the MPU 92 does not receive the HI level condition satisfying signal from the condition satisfying transmission circuit 116, the MPU 92 transmits a LOW level launch permission signal (a signal that does not correspond to the launch permission), but the launch permission signal. The relationship between the LOW level signal and the HI level signal may be reversed. In addition, the MPU 92 newly starts transmitting the HI level emission permission signal each time it starts receiving the HI level condition satisfying signal, and launches the HI level when the reception of the HI level condition satisfying signal is completed. End the transmission of the permission signal.

When the launch IC 118 receives the HI level launch permission signal or the corresponding signal from the launch permission receiving circuit 117, the launch IC 118 is directed to each of the launch solenoid 54 and the ball feed device 53 of the game ball launch mechanism 51. It has a function to output a drive signal on a regular basis. In this case, the launch IC 118 outputs each drive signal as a pulse signal, and the output cycle is 0.6 sec. Further, the output timing of the drive signal is set earlier in the ball feeding device 53 than in the launch solenoid 54 so that the game ball is launched after one game ball is supplied to the launch rail 52. ..

The launch operation device 55 is provided with an operation handle 222 as described above, and the larger the amount of operation of the operation handle 222, the stronger the launch intensity of the game ball by the launch solenoid 54. In this case, the firing operation device 55 is provided with a variable resistor as an operation amount detecting means for detecting the operation amount of the operation handle 222, and the firing IC 118 is provided with a firing solenoid 54 through a voltage input from the variable resistor. The voltage of the drive signal supplied to the vehicle is adjusted to adjust the firing intensity. It is not essential that the adjusting function is provided in the firing IC 118, and an adjusting circuit may be provided in the middle of the signal path between the firing IC 118 and the firing solenoid 54.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery at MPU92>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery in the MPU 92 will be described with reference to FIG.

The MPU 92 uses various counter information during the game to perform a big hit generation lottery, a display setting of the main display unit 43, a symbol display setting of the symbol display device 41, a display setting of the accessory display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12, when the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery for generating jackpots, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 41 are displaced and fluctuate. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the variable type counter for determining the display duration in the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41. CS and are to be used. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 used for the lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 is set to the electric service open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter area 94a of the RAM 94.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. The information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the hold storage area 94b as the acquisition information storage means when a prize is generated in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. Will be done.

The hold storage area 94b includes a hold area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, according to the winning history of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. , Each numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer is stored as hold information in any of the hold areas RE1 to RE4.

In this case, in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, when the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first holding area RE1 → the second holding area RE1 → the second holding area. Each numerical information is stored in the order of RE2 → 3rd holding area RE3 → 4th holding area RE4 in chronological order. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls in the upper working port 33 or the lower working opening 34 can be held and stored. Further, the hold area RE is provided with a hold number storage area NA, and the hold number storage area NA is used to specify the number of winning histories stored in the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. Information is stored.

The number that can be stored on hold is not limited to 4, and may be any other number such as 2, 3, or 5 or more, or may be a single number.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first hold area RE1 of the hold area RE when starting the variable display of the main display unit 43, and at the start of one game round. Win / fail determination is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

The jackpot random number counter C1 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 94b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored as a hit / miss table (hit / miss information group) in the hit / miss table storage area as the hit / miss information group storage means in the ROM 93. As the pass / fail table, a pass / fail table for the low-probability mode (low-probability pass / fail information group) and a pass / fail table for the high-probability mode (high-probability pass / fail information group) are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning / losing lottery means.

In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the big hit is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the big hit is 20. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 94b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results are subject to two conditions: (1) a lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (2) a support mode in the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 after the opening / closing execution mode ends. By providing a difference, a plurality of jackpot results are set.

As an mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, the game is executed up to a predetermined number of round games. Here, the round game is a condition that either the predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses or the predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the large winning opening 32a. It is a game that continues until is satisfied. Further, the number of round games in the open / close execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is the same as the fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result triggered by the transition. Specifically, the maximum number of round games is set to 15 rounds (15R) regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, as one opening mode of the variable winning device 32, the opening duration (opening continuation period) from the opening of the large winning opening 32a to the closing is set to 29 sec.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the launch operation device 55 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 51 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec. NS. In addition, the maximum number of end conditions for round games is set to nine. Then, in the above-mentioned opening mode, the opening duration is set to be longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and one round game. Therefore, when the variable winning device 32 is opened once, it is expected that a maximum number of prizes will be awarded to the large winning opening 32a in one round game.

As a support mode in the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34, the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 is compared in a situation where the firing of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area. High-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency guide state) and low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) so that the frequency of opening states per unit time is relatively high or low. And are set.

Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery using the electric accessory release counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened when the electric accessory open state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and one more opening. The time is set long. In this case, when the electric accessory open state is won in the high frequency support mode and the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times, the electric accessory 34a is closed from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, a shorter time is secured as the minimum secured time for the next electric accessory opening lottery to be performed after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Is set to be selected.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the lower operating port 34 is won is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the upper operating port 33 is higher than that of the lower operating port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower operating port 34 is more likely than the upper operating port 33. The probability of winning a prize increases. Then, when a prize is won in the lower operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls held so much. be able to.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to be in the electric service open state per unit time is not limited to the above, for example, the electric accessory open lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric service open state in. In addition, the securing time secured for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed (for example, on the accessory display unit 44 based on the winning of the through gate 35). In a configuration in which multiple types of variable display times are prepared, the high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter reservation time is easier to select or the average reservation time is shorter than the low-frequency support mode. It may have been done. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed is shortened (that is,). , Shortening the one-time variable display time on the accessory display unit 44), shortening the average time of the securing time, and increasing the winning probability, any one condition or any combination of conditions is applied. This may increase the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 93. Then, a normal jackpot result and a probabilistic jackpot result are set as such distribution destinations.

The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

The probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the winning / losing lottery becomes a big hit state and the state shifts to the big hit state.

In relation to each of the above game states, the normal game state is not an open / close execution mode, but a state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode.

In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 14" corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and "15 to 29" corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result.

The reach random number counter C3 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 238, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 94b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, reach display is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. The reach display includes a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of a symbol (picture), and stops after the variable display in a game in which the open / close execution mode of the variable winning device 32 is executed. In a gaming machine in which the display result is a display result (special display result) corresponding to a jackpot, the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 41 is started. In the previous stage, it refers to a display state that makes the player think that it is a variable display state that tends to result in a special display result.

In the reach display, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode can be obtained by stopping and displaying some of the symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. A display state is included in which a combination of reach symbols that may be established is displayed, and in that state, the symbols are variablely displayed in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background image to produce a reach effect. , A combination of reach symbols is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G to perform a reach effect.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. Further, in the game round that does not shift to the open / close execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display by referring to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 93. If so, it will be executed.

The variation type counter CS has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 198, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 92 to determine the variation display time (display continuation period) in the main display unit 43 and the variation display time (display continuation period) of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated in each of the main processing and the timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, and is used to determine the variation pattern at the start of the variation display on the main display unit 43 and at the start of the symbol variation by the symbol display device 41. The value of CS is acquired. When determining the variable display time, the variable display time table stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area of the ROM 93 is referred to.

The electric accessory opening counter C4 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 250, and after reaching the maximum value, the counter returns to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric service holding area 94c provided in the RAM 94 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state according to the value of the stored electric accessory opening counter C4.

<About various processes executed by MPU92>
Next, each process executed for advancing the game in the MPU 92 will be described. The processing of the MPU 92 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S101, the power-on wait process is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until 1 sec elapses after the main process is started. Further, an HI level signal is output as a power supply permission signal from the output port of the main control device 71 to the power supply unit 113 at the time of power supply. The power supply permission signal is a signal for permitting power supply from the power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on to a predetermined control device or a predetermined device.

In the following step S102, access to the RAM 94 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the MPU 92 is set.

After that, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch provided in the power supply and the firing control device 79 is manually operated, and in the following step S105, whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag of the RAM 94. Is determined. Further, in step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed, and in the following step S107, whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined. judge.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality of the data stored and held by the checksum is confirmed, the process proceeds to step S108 in the same manner. In step S108, the RAM 94 is cleared as the initialization of the RAM 94. Then, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch is not pressed, step S109 is performed without executing the process of step S108, provided that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. Proceed to. In step S109, the power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 94 such as initialization of the power failure flag is set as an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the voice emission control device 72 in order to recognize the current gaming state. do. In addition, a payout initialization command indicating that the RAM of the payout control device 78 should be initialized is transmitted to the payout control device 78. Furthermore, interrupt enable is set to allow the occurrence of timer interrupt processing.

In step S109, the initialization process of the movable accessory 200 is also executed. In the initialization process of the movable accessory 200, the drive units 205 and 206 are driven and controlled so that the movable plates 201 and 202 of the movable accessory 200 are arranged at the game basic positions as shown in FIG. 9A. Command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 72.

After that, the process proceeds to the residual processing of steps S110 to S113. That is, although the MPU 92 has a configuration in which timer interrupt processing is periodically executed, a residual time is generated between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. This residual time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, and the residual process of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed by utilizing the irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual processing in steps S110 to S113 is an irregular process that is executed irregularly.

In the residual processing, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In the following step S111, the random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S112, the variation counter update process for updating the variation type counter CS is executed. The random number initial value counter CINI is provided in the RAM 94, and is used as an initial value of the jackpot random number counter used for lottery as to whether or not to generate a jackpot. Further, the variation type counter CS is also provided in the RAM 94, and is used as a random number for determining the display duration in the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41.

In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the RAM 94, the read numerical information is added by 1, and then the read source counter is overwritten. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, in step S113, the interrupt enable setting for switching from the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is permitted is set. After executing the process of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the process of steps S110 to S113 is repeated.

Here, as described above, in the residual processing, only the random number initial value update processing and the fluctuation counter update processing are set so as to be sandwiched between the interrupt prohibition processing and the interrupt permission processing, so that the timer interrupt processing is performed. Is always started immediately before step S110. Then, after the timer interrupt processing is completed, it is always sufficient to start from step S110, and the return address after the timer interrupt processing becomes unique. Therefore, it is not necessary to store the current return address at the start of the timer interrupt processing, and the processing load at the start of the timer interrupt processing is reduced.

Further, since the timer interrupt processing does not occur during the calculation of the predetermined data in the MPU 92, the data stored in the register of the MPU 92 at that time is saved to the RAM 94 at the start of the timer interrupt processing. It is not necessary to execute the above, and similarly, it is not necessary to execute the data return processing to the register of the MPU 92 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the processing load at the start of the timer interrupt processing is reduced, and the processing load at the end of the timer interrupt processing is also reduced.

Further, since the timer interrupt processing is not started during the update of the random number initial value counter CINI or the update of the variation type counter CS, the timer interrupt processing of these counters is performed even though these are being updated. It is possible to prevent the numerical information from being acquired and further update processing from being executed.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, a hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing in the MPU 92 will be described. A clock circuit is provided on the main control board 91 as a pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle, and a frequency dividing circuit is provided so as to exist in the middle of a signal path between the clock circuit and the MPU 92. Is provided.

The frequency dividing circuit functions as a frequency changing means for changing the cycle of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the start timing of the timer interrupt processing by the MPU 92. That is, the pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 92 at intervals of 4 msec, which is a specific period. The MPU 92 executes a process for confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as a rising edge or a falling edge of the pulse signal, and activates and executes the timer interrupt process on the condition that the occurrence of the specific signal form is confirmed as at least one condition. do.

In this case, if the occurrence of the above specific signal form is confirmed in a situation where the activation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer is changed from the state in which the interrupt is prohibited to the state in which the interrupt is permitted. Interrupt processing is started. That is, depending on the processing execution status of the MPU 92, the next timer interrupt processing may be started after 4.1 msec has elapsed from the start of the previous timer interrupt processing. If such an event occurs, the next timer interrupt processing may be started. The timer interrupt processing will be started after 3.9 msec has elapsed from the start of the immediately preceding timer interrupt processing.

However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency divider circuit is performed in a specific cycle such as 4 msec regardless of the progress of the process in the MPU 92, the timer interrupt process is basically started in the specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the MPU 92 is such that even if the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific cycle has elapsed since the previous timer interrupt processing was started, the timing next to the predetermined timing is used. In the timer interrupt processing in, the portion exceeding the specific cycle is absorbed, and in the timer interrupt processing in the next timing, it is set to be started at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed.

In the timer interrupt process, first, in step S201, it is determined whether or not the power saving mode flag is set. The power saving mode in-progress flag is provided in the RAM 94 and is set when the game has not been played for a predetermined period by the player. When the power saving mode flag is set, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the power saving mode. When the mode shifts to the power saving mode, the power supply to the predetermined control device and the predetermined electric device is stopped, and the power consumption is suppressed as compared with the normal mode. In addition, the power saving mode flag is cleared when the game is started by the player. When the power saving mode flag is cleared, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the normal mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S201, the normal mode processing of steps S202 to S225 is executed.

In step S202, the power failure information storage process is executed. In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board 96, and when the occurrence of a power failure is identified, the information on the gaming state at the time of the power failure is stored. Execute the power failure processing to do so. By executing the power failure information storage process, it is possible to restart the game in the same state as the game state before the power failure when the power failure is restored.

In the following step S203, the lottery random number update process is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. The jackpot random number counter C1 is a counter used for a lottery for generating jackpots, the jackpot type counter C2 is a counter used for determining the type of jackpot, and the reach random number counter C3 is when the symbol display device 41 comes off and fluctuates. It is a counter used for the reach generation lottery. Each of the above counters is provided in the RAM 94, and the counter value at the time of winning is stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 94 when the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is won. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is a counter used for lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 is in the electric accessory open state, and is provided in the RAM 94. In the electric accessory opening counter C4, the counter value at the time of winning is stored in the electric service holding area of the RAM 94 when the through gate 35 is won.

Specifically, as the lottery random number update process, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, and the read numerical information is added by 1 to each. After executing the process of overwriting the counter of the read source, the process of overwriting is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively.

After that, in step S204, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S205, the fluctuation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112. In the following step S206, the game stop determination process is executed. In the game stop determination process, it is determined whether or not the fraudulent activity is detected by the detection signal of the magnet detection sensor 24a or the radio wave detection sensor 24b in the timer interrupt process of the previous time or the previous time, and the fraudulent activity is detected. It is determined that the situation should stop the progress of the game, and the execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped. The fraud detection process is a process performed in step S212, which will be described later.

After that, in step S207, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped, and the processes after step S208 are executed on condition that the progress of the game is not stopped.

In step S208, the port output process is executed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, the process for outputting the output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32c and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the large winning opening 32a to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 32c is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set. The output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information for switching the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory drive unit 34b is started, and the information for switching to the closed state is set. If so, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

In the following step S209, the reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

In the following step S210, the signal received from each prize detection sensor is read, and the prize detection process for performing the process corresponding to the read information is executed. Further, in step S211 a timer update process for collectively updating the numerical information of a predetermined timer counter provided in the RAM 94 is executed.

In the following step S212, fraud detection processing for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred is executed. Specifically, the magnet detection sensor 24a or the radio wave detection sensor 24b monitors whether or not the detection signal is output. When the detection signal is output by the magnet detection sensor 24a or the radio wave detection sensor 24b, it is determined that the progress of the game should be stopped in step S206 of the next timer interrupt process.

In the following step S213, a launch control process for executing launch control of the game ball is executed. Further, in step S214, as the input state monitoring process, the disconnection confirmation of each winning detection sensor and the opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed based on the information read in the reading process of step S209. ..

In the following step S215, the special figure special electric control process for performing the execution control of the game times and the execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed. In the special figure special electric control process, when a prize is generated in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 in a situation where the number of reserved information stored in the holding storage area 94b is less than the upper limit number, at that time. The processing of storing each numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as hold information in the hold storage area 94b in chronological order is executed. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, it is determined whether or not the hold information corresponds to the jackpot winning on the condition that the hold information is stored and not during the game rotation or the open / close execution mode. Processing, and if it corresponds to the jackpot winning, the distribution determination processing for determining which jackpot result the pending information corresponds to is executed. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, not only the hit / fail judgment process and the distribution judgment process, but also whether or not the hold information corresponds to the reach occurrence when the hold information does not correspond to the jackpot winning. In addition to executing the reach determination process for determination, the duration selection process for selecting the duration of the game round is executed using the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time. Then, a variable command including information on the duration according to the result of each of these processes and a type command including information on the game result are transmitted to the voice emission control device 72, and the pattern on the main display unit 43 is changed. Start the display. As a result, one game round is started, and the effect for the game round is started on the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41.

If the jackpot is won, or if the jackpot is not won and the processing result of the reach determination process is the result corresponding to the occurrence of reach, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS is used to continue the game. By determining the duration corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display as the time, the voice emission control device 72 can specify the type of the reach display from the variation command.

Further, in the special figure special electric control process, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the game round during the execution of one game round, and if it is the end timing, the display corresponding to the game result is performed. , Execute the process of ending the game. In this case, a final stop command indicating that the game round should be ended is transmitted to the voice emission control device 72. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, when the result of the game round is the result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the process for starting the open / close execution mode is executed. At the time of this start, an opening command indicating that the open / close execution mode is started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 72. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. At each of these processes, an open command indicating that the round game is started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 72, and a closing command indicating that the round game is completed is transmitted to the voice emission control device 72. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, an ending command indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is terminated is transmitted to the voice emission control device 72, and a winning / failing lottery mode or a support mode after the opening / closing execution mode is set. Execute the process.

After executing the special figure special electric control process of step S215 in the timer interrupt process, the normal figure general electric control process is executed in step S216. In the Fuzu Fuden control process, when the through gate 35 has won a prize, the process for acquiring the numerical information of the electric accessory opening counter C4 is executed, and the numerical information is stored. The numerical information is determined to be open, and the opening determination is used as an opportunity to execute a process for producing an effect for a general drawing. Further, based on the result of the opening determination, a process of opening and closing the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 is executed.

In the following step S217, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S215 and S216, the output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the main display unit 43 in the first hold lamp unit 45 is set, and the output information is set. The output information is set so that the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the accessory display unit 44 is reflected in the second hold lamp unit 46. Further, in step S217, the output information for updating the display content of the main display unit 43 is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S215 and S216, and the display content of the accessory display unit 44 is set. Set the output information to be updated.

In the following step S218, the display content of the symbol display device 41 is set for standby display by shifting the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the demo display state in a situation where both the game times and the open / close execution mode are not executed. Execute the demo display process for.

The demo display state is a state in which the symbol display device 41 is performing a demo display (that is, a standby display). Further, the demo display is a predetermined demo waiting time (for example, after the confirmation time elapses after displaying the stop result of the previous game round or after the ending of the previous opening / closing execution mode is completed. When 0.1 sec) has elapsed, it means that the image of the start waiting effect is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, and the display lamp unit 58a and the speaker unit 59 perform the effect accordingly. ..

By the way, in the demo display on the symbol display device 41, an image in which the symbol displayed on the effective line is performing a predetermined operation, such as being in a horizontal swaying state without changing the symbol, is displayed. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a maker name, a model name, or a moving image with a predetermined character may be displayed. It may be a display configuration.

In the following step S219, processing for mode transition from the normal mode to the power saving mode (power saving mode transition processing) is executed based on the detection signal of the steering wheel touch sensor 224 after the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo display state. do. In this power saving mode transition process, when the detection signal of the handle touch sensor 224 is not input for 30 seconds in the demo display state, the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the power saving mode. When the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the power saving mode, a predetermined control device or a predetermined electric device other than the main control device 71, that is, a payout control device 78, a voice emission control device 72, a display control device 121, and various lamp units 58a, 58b. And the electric power to the drive units 205 and 206 is not supplied from the power supply circuit 112.

The mode transition conditions in the power saving mode transition process may be other than the above. For example, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the symbol variation in the symbol display device 41 ends, a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) elapses from the last winning of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. In any of these cases, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to shift to the power saving mode.

In the following step S220, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 78 are confirmed, and the payout state reception process for performing the process corresponding to the check result is executed. Further, in step S221, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed.

In the following step S222, in order to switch the state of the signal output to the external terminal board 81 so as to control the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time. Executes the external information setting process of. Further, in step S223, a process for editing the test firing test information is executed.

The demo display process in step S218 and the power saving mode transition process in step S219 will be described later individually.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S207, or after the processes of steps S208 to S223 are executed, the process proceeds to step S224. In step S224, the interrupt end declaration is set. In the MPU 92 of the main controller 71, once the timer interrupt processing is started, it is stipulated that the interrupt end declaration is set as one of the conditions for starting the next timer interrupt processing, and step S224. Now, the interrupt end declaration is set to enable the execution of the next timer interrupt process. Further, in step S225, interrupt permission is set. In the MPU 92, once the timer interrupt processing is started, it is set to the interrupt disabled state. Therefore, in step S225, the interrupt permission is set in order to enable the execution of the next timer interrupt processing. After that, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S201, the process proceeds to step S226 to execute the power saving time processing as the processing for the power saving mode and end the timer interrupt processing.

<Demo display processing>
The demo display process of step S218 will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric counter is "0". The special figure special electric counter is a counter whose value changes according to the processing executed in the special figure special electric control processing in the timer interrupt processing, and is provided in the RAM 94. When the special figure special electric counter is "0", it means that the effect for the game round is not executed and the open / close execution mode is not executed.

If it is determined in step S301 that the special figure special electric counter is not "0", the demo display process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that the special figure special electric counter is "0", the step Proceed to S302. In step S302, it is determined whether or not the demo display state is displayed. Specifically, whether or not the demo display state is set is determined by whether or not "1" is set in the demo display flag of the MPU 92.

If it is determined in step S302 that the demo display state is present, the demo display process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that the demo display state is not present, the process proceeds to step S303. In step S303, it is determined whether or not the demo display is waiting. The demo display waiting state means that the measurement of the demo waiting time has already started, and "1" is set in the demo waiting flag of the MPU 92.

If it is not in the demo display waiting state, the process proceeds to step S304, the demo waiting time information stored in advance in the ROM 93 is read, and the demo waiting time information is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. In the following step S305, the demo display waiting state is set by setting the demo waiting flag of the MPU 92 to "1". After that, the process for displaying this demo is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S303 that the demo display is waiting, it is determined in step S306 whether or not the special figure special electric timer counter is "0". The special figure special electric timer counter is a counter used for specifying the update timing of the special figure special electric counter according to the passage of time by the MPU 92, and is provided in the RAM 94. The special electric timer counter is a decrement counter, and is decremented by 1 for each processing time until it becomes "0" in the timer update processing executed in step S210 of the timer interrupt processing. If the special figure special electric timer counter is not "0", the process for displaying this demo is terminated.

When the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", the demo display state is set by setting the demo display flag of the MPU 92 to "1" in step S307. At this time, the demo waiting flag is cleared to "0" to cancel the demo display waiting state. In addition, the demo display state is released when the demo display flag is cleared to "0" when the effect for the game round is newly started.

In the following step S308, the demo start command is set as the output target. After that, the process for displaying this demo is terminated.

The demo start command is a command for causing the voice emission control device 72 to recognize that it is the timing to start the demo display. The voice emission control device 72 determines whether or not a demo start command has been received as a production command, and if the demo start command has been received, the production voice emission pattern corresponding to the demo start command. Executes the process for setting. Specifically, a data table for causing the effect corresponding to the demo display to be performed through the display lamp unit 58a and the speaker unit 59 is read from the ROM of the sound emission control device 72, and the demo display is performed according to the read data table. The effect of is performed by the display lamp unit 58a and the speaker unit 59.

Further, the voice emission control device 72 transmits a demo start command to the display control device 121.
The display control device 121 reads a data table from the ROM of the display control device 121 so that the effect for demo display is performed through the symbol display device 41 from the command, and the effect for demo display is performed according to the read data table. Is executed by the symbol display device 41.

When the demo start command is received, the display control device 121 repeatedly executes the demo display until the demo display state ends.

<Power saving mode transition process>
Next, the power saving mode transition process executed in step S219 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the power saving mode flag provided in the RAM 94 is set. The power saving mode flag is a flag set when a state in which there is no input of the steering wheel touch sensor 224 occurs for 30 seconds or more in the demo display state, and is a flag indicating that the power saving mode is in progress. The power saving mode flag is cleared when the power saving mode ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S401, the power saving mode transition process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S401, it is determined in the following step S402 whether or not there is a demo display state and there is no input from the handle touch sensor 224.

If a negative determination is made in step S402, the non-operation counter is cleared to "0" in step S403. The non-operation counter is provided in the RAM 94, and is a counter that indicates the elapsed time since the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo display state and there is no input from the handle touch sensor 224. The non-operation counter is incremented by 1 for each timer interrupt process when the affirmative judgment is made in step S402, and is cleared to "0" when the negative judgment is made in step S402. After executing step S403, the power saving mode transition process ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S402, the value of the non-operation counter is added by 1 in step S404.

After the execution of step S404, it is determined in step S405 whether or not the value of the non-operation counter is "7500" (corresponding to 30 sec). If a negative determination is made in step S405, the power saving mode transition process is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S405, the process proceeds to step S406, the power saving mode flag is set, and the non-operation counter is cleared in the following step S407.

In the following step S408, the power cutoff process is executed. In the power cutoff process, the main control device 71 sets the power supply permission signal to the power supply unit 113 for power-on of the power supply and the emission control device 79 to the LOW level. The power supply unit 113 for power-on stops the power supply to the predetermined control device and the predetermined electric device described above by inputting the LOW level power supply permission signal. After that, the power saving mode transition process is terminated.

In the power saving mode transition process, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the power saving mode when the power saving mode flag is set and the power cutoff process is executed. During the power saving mode, the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) executes a power saving processing different from the processing executed in the normal mode.
<Processing during power saving>
Next, the power saving processing executed in step S226 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, the special figure display process is executed in step S501. In the special figure display process, the main display unit 43 is displayed and controlled so that the plurality of segment light emitting units continue to light in a predetermined light emitting mode.

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the power saving mode, the indicator lamp unit 58a is in a state where power is not supplied, and the symbol display device 41 is in a predetermined display mode in the power saving mode (the stop image remains as it is). The player may recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is stopped or out of order because the state is such that the illuminance of the liquid crystal backlight is lowered. In this regard, by continuing to light the segment of the main display unit 43 in the special figure display process, the player can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in operation. In particular, the pattern display (special figure display) by the main display unit 43 is carried out by the main control device 71 according to the pachinko machine rules, and is mainly used by hall employees and the like who are aware of these rules. It is possible to confirm that the control device 71 is operating normally. As the display mode of the main display unit 43 in the power saving mode, it is desirable that the display mode continues to display a predetermined display mode (non-variable display) instead of the variable display. By making the display of the main display unit 43 in the power saving mode non-variable display, it is possible to differentiate from the variable display when the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit lottery.

In the following step S502, the counter update process is executed. In the counter update process, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory are released by executing the same process as the lottery random number update process executed in step S203 of the timer interrupt process. The counter C4 is updated.

In step S502a, a predetermined fraud monitoring process is performed during power saving. Specifically, as the fraud monitoring process, whether or not the detection signal is output by the magnet detection sensor 24a or the radio wave detection sensor 24b is monitored. In addition, an open sensor for detecting the opening of the front door frame 14 is provided, and based on the detection signal of the open sensor, it is monitored whether or not the front door frame 14 is illegally opened during power saving. You may. When it is determined that there has been a fraudulent act (for example, when the detection signal is output by the magnet detection sensor 24a or the radio wave detection sensor 24b), a signal to that effect is output to the management computer of the game hall. Alternatively, after waiting for the operation of the voice emission control device 72 to be restored by the power recovery process (step S505 described later), an error display command is output to the voice emission control device 72.

After that, in step S503, the touch sensor input monitoring process is executed. In the touch sensor input monitoring process, the level of the signal output from the handle touch sensor 224 is confirmed.

In the following step S504, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is output from the handle touch sensor 224. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a HI level signal is input to the terminal connected to the handle touch sensor 224.

If a negative determination is made in step S504, the power saving process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S504, the power recovery process is executed in step S505.

In the power recovery process, the main control device 71 sets the power supply permission signal to the power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on of the power supply and the emission control device 79 as the HI level. The power supply unit 113 for power-on starts supplying power to a predetermined control device and a predetermined electric device by inputting a power supply permission signal of HI level. Further, in the power recovery process, a notification stop command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 72. The voice emission control device 72 that has received the notification stop command arranges the drive units 205 and 206 so as to arrange the movable plates 201 and 202 of the movable accessory 200 at the game basic positions (positions shown in FIG. 9A) already described. Drive control.

When the power supply to the payout control device 78, the voice emission control device 72, and the display control device 121 is restarted along with the power recovery process, and the operation of each of these control devices is restarted, each of these control devices is activated. It is preferable that various commands are not output from the main control device 71 to each control device while the process is being executed. That is, the main control device 71 may start outputting the command after waiting for the completion of the activation processing in the payout control device 78, the voice emission control device 72, and the display control device 121. For example, the command output is permitted after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power supply permission signal was set to the HI level.

In the following step S506, the power saving mode flag is cleared and the power saving processing is terminated.

<Electrical configuration for power cutoff and recovery>
Next, the electrical configuration for executing the power cutoff process and the power recovery process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a circuit diagram showing a configuration for executing a power cutoff process and a power recovery process for the power supply unit 113 at the time of power supply provided in the power supply and launch control device 79.

The power supply unit 113 for power-on has an operating voltage with respect to the main control device 71, the payout control device 78, the voice emission control device 72, the display control device 121, and the symbol display device 41 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply. To supply.

The power supply unit 113 for power-on includes a voltage conversion circuit 230, output switching circuits 231a, 231b, 231c, and a reset circuit 236. The voltage conversion circuit 230 converts the AC 24V supplied via the power switch 135a into + 24V, + 12V, and + 5V voltages and outputs the voltage. In FIG. 18, a + 24V voltage is supplied to the power failure monitoring board 96 of the main control device 71, and to each control device (payout control device 78, voice emission control device 72, and display control device 121) other than the main control device 71. + 5V voltage and + 12V voltage are supplied, and + 12V voltage is supplied to the symbol display device 41.

The output switching circuits 231a, 231b, and 231c are in a state (power supply state) in which power is supplied from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to each control device (payout control device 78, voice emission control device 72, and display control device 121) and not. It switches between the state (power cutoff state).

The output switching circuits 231a, 231b, and 231c include output switching transistors 232a, 232b, and 232c, respectively. The output switching transistors 232a, 232b, and 232c are, for example, NPN transistors. The collectors of the output switching transistors 232a, 232b, and 232c are connected to the voltage output terminals (+ 5V output terminal, + 12V output terminal) of the voltage conversion circuit 230, and the emitters are the payout control device 78, the voice emission control device 72, and the sound emission control device 72. It is connected to the display control device 121. Further, the base is connected to the output port 235 of the main control device 71. In this case, a power supply permission signal is output from the output port 235, and the output switching transistors 232a, 232b, and 232c are turned on / off by the power supply permission signal.

When the power supply permission signal is at the HI level, the transistors 232a, 232b, and 232c are turned on, and the output voltage (+ 5V, + 12V) from the voltage conversion circuit 230 is the payout control device 78, the voice emission control device 72, and the display. It is applied to the control device 121. In this case, a predetermined voltage is applied to the various lamp units 58a and 58b and the movable accessory 200 (accessory drive unit) via the voice emission control device 72.

When the power supply permission signal is at the LOW level, the transistors 232a, 232b, and 232c are turned off, and the output voltages (+ 5V, + 12V) from the voltage conversion circuit 230 are the payout control device 78 and the voice emission control device 72. , Is not applied to the display control device 121. Since the power is not supplied to the voice emission control device 72, the power supply to the various lamp units 58a and 58b and the power supply to the movable accessory 200 (accessory drive unit) are stopped.

In the power saving mode transition process described above, since the LOW level power supply permission signal is output as the power cutoff process (step S408 in FIG. 16), the payout control device 78, the voice emission control device 72, and the display control are accompanied by the signal output. The power supply to the device 121 is cut off, the operation of each of these control devices is stopped, and the power supply to the various lamp units 58a and 58b and the power supply to the movable accessory 200 (accessory drive unit) are also combined. Is stopped. Then, when the power supply to the movable accessory 200 (accessory drive unit) is stopped, as described in FIG. 9C, both the movable plates 201 and 202 are in a predetermined appearance position due to their own weight, that is, A power saving message described on the movable plate 201 for power saving notification notifies that the symbol display device 41 appears at the front position of the screen and has shifted to the power saving mode. At this time, the power saving message of the movable plate 201 appears on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, which is considered to be the most visible (easy to pay attention to) to the player in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the pachinko machine is for the player. It will be possible to easily grasp that 10 is currently in the power saving mode.

However, a part of the display control device 121 and the symbol display device 41 are supplied with power from the voltage conversion circuit 230 without going through the output switching circuit, and the voltage is output from the voltage conversion circuit 230. That is, the power supply state is always maintained when the power switch 135a is on.

The display control device 121 includes an image data determination unit 240 that determines an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and an output control unit 241 that outputs image data determined by the image data determination unit to the symbol display device 41. Have.

The image data determination unit 240 and the output control unit 241 are each composed of an arithmetic processor, and the image data determination unit 240 outputs information for generating image data displayed by the symbol display device 41. Output to 241. The output control unit 241 has a storage unit 241a capable of storing image data for one screen, and the image data generated based on the information output from the image data determination unit is stored in the storage unit 241a. Remember. After that, the output control unit 241 outputs the image data stored in the storage unit 241a to the symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 displays an image corresponding to the image data output from the output control unit 241. The image data determination unit 240 outputs the information of the image for switching to the output control unit 241 based on the switching timing of the display image. Every time the information from the image data determination unit is input to the output control unit 241 the contents of the storage unit are updated, and the image displayed on the symbol display device 41 is switched.

In the display control device 121, the configuration of the power supply system is different between the image data determination unit 240 and the output control unit 241, and the image data determination unit 240 is driven by the voltage conversion circuit 230 via the output switching circuit 231a. Is supplied, the output control unit 241 is configured to be supplied with drive power from the voltage conversion circuit 230 without going through the output switching circuit 231a.

In the power saving mode, the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 is cut off to the image data determination unit 240 in the display control device 121, and the power supply is maintained to the output control unit 241. Further, as already described, power is also supplied to the symbol display device 41 in the power saving mode. In the power saving mode, the power from the voltage conversion circuit 230 is supplied to the output control unit 241 and the symbol display device 41, so that the symbol display device 41 displays an image corresponding to the image data stored in the storage unit 241a. It is possible to do. In the power saving mode, the update of the contents of the storage unit 241a is stopped because the power to the image data determination unit 240 is cut off. As a result, during the power saving mode, the image corresponding to the content of the storage unit 241a last updated before the transition to the power saving mode is continuously displayed as a stop image on the symbol display device 41.

Then, as the power recovery process, when the power supply permission signal is returned to the HI level (step S505 in FIG. 17), the power supply to the payout control device 78, the voice emission control device 72, and the display control device 121 is restarted accordingly. NS. Therefore, the operation of each of these control devices is resumed, and the power supply to the various lamp units 58a and 58b and the power supply to the movable accessory 200 (accessory drive unit) are also resumed. At this time, the movable accessory 200 (accessory driving unit) returns from the notification state shown in FIG. 9C to the non-notification state shown in FIG. 9A, so that the player has canceled the power saving mode. Easy to grasp.

Further, in the circuit configuration of FIG. 18, when the power is turned on to each control device (payout control device 78, voice emission control device 72, and display control device 121), a predetermined period immediately after the power is turned on is set as a reset period, and the reset period is set. Each of these control devices is configured to start operation after the lapse of time. That is, the power supply unit 113 for power-on is provided with a reset circuit 236, and the reset circuit 236 inputs + 5V to the reset input of each control device immediately after the power is turned on to each control device. When + 5V is input to the reset input, the payout control device 78, the voice emission control device 72, and the display control device 121 enter the standby state and do not start the operation. When 0V is input to the reset input, a LOW level signal is input, and the payout control device 78, the voice emission control device 72, and the display control device 121 start operating.

The reset circuit 236 is a circuit that instructs the start of operation of the payout control device 78, the voice emission control device 72, and the display control device 121, and includes a delay circuit 237 and a reset transistor 238. The delay circuit 237 delays the change in the input voltage for a predetermined period and outputs the output voltage, and the output side is connected to the reset transistor 238. The reset transistor 238 is composed of an NPN transistor, the base is connected to the output side of the delay circuit 237, the collector is connected to the output side of the output switching circuit 231a, and the emitter is grounded. The reset transistor 238 is turned on when a HI level signal is input, and is turned off when a LOW level signal is input or is not input.

Since the reset circuit 236 is provided, the HI level power supply permission signal is output from the main controller 71, and the output of the output switching circuit 231a is delayed by a predetermined period from the timing when it becomes + 5V (HI level). Therefore, the input of the output switching circuit 231b can be set to 0V (LOW level), and the output of the output switching circuit 231b can be delayed from the output of the output switching circuit 231a to be set to the LOW level.

The main control device 71 has a reset circuit 239 in itself, and the reset circuit 239 generates a reset signal delayed from the voltage input from the voltage conversion circuit 230, and starts the operation.

By delaying the reset input to the payout control device 78, the voice emission control device 72, and the display control device 121 from the voltage input, it is possible to start the operation of the game machine in a state where the voltage to the voltage input is stable. Become.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 has the following characteristic configurations as configurations for power cutoff and recovery.

A main control device 71, a payout control device 78, a voice emission control device 72, and a display control device 121 are provided as a plurality of control means, and the main control device 71 provided as the first control means is provided with a voltage conversion circuit 230. While the electric power is directly supplied, the electric power from the voltage conversion circuit 230 is supplied to the control devices other than the main control device 71 provided as the second control means via the output switching circuit 231. .. The voltage conversion circuit 230 generates electric power for driving each control device as a drive electric power generation circuit. The output switching circuit 231 is a power cutoff circuit capable of cutting off the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the second control means.

The main control device 71 executes a process (processes of steps S402, S405, and S504) for determining whether or not the transition condition to the power saving mode or the release condition of the power saving mode is satisfied, and determines whether or not power saving is necessary. Used as a means. When the transition condition to the power saving mode is satisfied, the main control device 71 outputs a LOW level power supply permission signal from the output port 235 to the output switching circuit 231 to cause another control device from the voltage conversion circuit 230. Cut off the power supply to. When the power saving mode release condition is satisfied, the voltage conversion circuit 230 supplies power to other control devices by outputting the HI level power supply permission signal from the output port 235 to the output switching circuit 231. Cut off. In this way, the main control device 71 can control the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the other control device by controlling the power supply permission signal.

Further, the main control device 71, which is the first control means, executes a power-on wait process (step S101) when supplying an external power source to issue a power supply command to the output switching circuit 231. A level power supply permission signal is output to execute power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to another control device. The process for the power supply command executed in the power-on wait process is the same process as the power return process (step S505) executed when returning from the power saving mode.

Further, a touch detection unit 225 is connected to the main control device 71 as a means for monitoring the game state of the player. Based on the detection result (game state monitoring result) of the touch detection unit 225, the main control device 71 determines that the player is in a non-game state in which the player has not played a game, thereby shifting to the power saving mode. I do.

Further, the main control device 71 sequentially updates the jackpot random number counter C1 within a predetermined numerical range in the normal mode in which the power is supplied from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the other control devices. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used when performing a lottery for whether or not to generate the open / close execution mode in the lottery random number update process in step S203 of the timer interrupt process. The main control device 71 executes the same process as the lottery random number update process in the counter update process of step S502 even during the power saving mode in which the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 is cut off to other control devices. doing.

Further, whether or not the main control device 71 gives a privilege to the player based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the wake of winning a prize in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34, which is a predetermined condition. Executes the processing of. Specifically, the jackpot lottery process is executed by the special figure special electric control process in step S215, and the jackpot lottery result is displayed by controlling the main display unit 43 provided as the lottery result display means.

The main control device 71 displays the main display unit 43 in a predetermined display mode in the power saving mode in which the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the control devices other than the main control device 71 is cut off. To control. Specifically, the special figure display process of step S501 for controlling the predetermined segment to continue to light in the light emitting mode is executed.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a movable accessory 200 as a notification means for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 is in the power saving mode in the power saving mode. The movable accessory 200 shifts from the non-notification state to the notification state as the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the voice emission control device 72 is cut off.

Further, as the main body of the power supply control of the plurality of control means when shifting to the power saving mode, the main control device 71 for determining whether or not to give the privilege to the player is defined. The other control device is a sub control device (payout control device 78, voice emission control device 72, and display control device 121) that executes various controls based on a control command from the main control device 71.

The pachinko machine 10 has the following characteristic configuration as a configuration of a movable accessory 200 provided as a notification means for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 is in the power saving mode.

On the front side of the pachinko machine 10, a symbol display device 41 and lamp units 58a and 58b are provided as operation units that operate in a manner visible to the player, and the operation units include a display control device 121 and a voice. It is controlled by the light emission control device 72. The display control device 121 and the voice emission control device 72 are connected to a power supply unit 113 for power-on as a power supply means for supplying drive power, and the display control device 121, the voice light emission control device 72, and the power supply unit for power-on are connected. An output switching circuit 231 capable of cutting off the power supply from the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the display control device 121 and the voice emission control device 72 is provided between the 113s. In the main control device 71, it is possible to detect that the pachinko machine 10 is in the non-gaming state by executing the processes of steps S402 and S405 in the power saving mode transition process as the gaming state detecting means. When it is detected that the pachinko machine is in a non-gaming state, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the power saving mode. When the mode shifts to the power saving mode, the output switching circuit 231 cuts off the power supply from the power supply unit 113 at the time of turning on to the display control device 121 and the voice emission control device 72. The movable accessory 200 is saving power to the player by shifting from the non-notification state to the notification state when the power supply to the display control device 121 and the voice emission control device 72 is cut off. Notify that.

Further, the movable accessory 200 is provided so as to be able to operate by supplying electric power from the power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on. The output switching circuit 231 supplies power via the display control device 121 and the voice emission control device 72 when the power supply from the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the display control device 121 and the voice emission control device 72 is cut off. The movable accessory 200 is also configured to cut off the power supply. The movable accessory 200 shifts from the non-notification state to the notification state as the power supply from the power supply unit 113 for power-on is cut off.

Further, the movable accessory 200 is provided with a movable plate 201 for notification provided with an information display unit 203 as notification information for the player to visually recognize that the power saving mode is in progress, and a power supply unit 113 for power-on. The movable plate 201, which is driven by electric power, is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 at the first position (specifically, the actual appearance position) and the second position is not visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 (specifically). Is provided with a drive unit 205 that moves with and from the game basic position). The movable plate 201 can be moved to the first position as the power supply from the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the drive unit 205 is cut off by the output switching circuit 231.

Further, the movable plate 201 is configured to be movable to the first position by its own weight and to be moved to the second position by being driven by the drive unit 205.

Further, the movable accessory 200 is provided with a movable plate 202 for production that can be moved between a position that can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10 and a position that cannot be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the production according to the progress of the game. The movable plate 202 is operated as.

Further, as the operation unit, a symbol display device 41, which is a display means for variablely displaying a symbol related to the game effect on the display screen G provided as a display area, is provided. The first position is a position in front of the pachinko machine 10 of the display screen G, and the second position is a position behind the center frame 42 provided as an enclosure surrounding the display screen G.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the movable accessory 200 as the first notification means, while the second notification means capable of notifying that the power saving mode is in the state where the power is supplied from the power supply unit 113 for power-on. The main display unit 43 is provided as a main display unit 43. When the power supply to the voice emission control device 72 is cut off by the output switching circuit 231, the power supply from the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the movable accessory 200 is cut off, and the power supply unit 113 for power-on Power is supplied to the main display unit 43.

Further, the main display unit 43, which is the second notification means, gives the player a privilege based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 when the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34, which is a predetermined condition, is won a prize. It is connected to the main control device 71 that determines whether or not to give. The main display unit 43 is provided as a lottery result display means whose display mode is controlled by the main control device 71 in order to display the lottery result of the privilege grant. When the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the power saving mode, the power supply from the power-on power supply unit 113 to the main control device 71 is continued, and the main display unit 43 is supplied with power from the power-on power supply unit 113. In the state of being in, it notifies that it is in the power saving mode.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 has the following characteristic configuration as a configuration for displaying the symbol display device 41 in the power saving mode.

The symbol display device 41 is provided as a symbol display means for variablely displaying a symbol, and the display content thereof is controlled by a display control device 121 as a display control means. A power supply unit 113 for turning on is provided as a power supply means for supplying driving power to the symbol display device 41 and the display control device 121. In the display control device 121, a first image display control means for determining the image data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 while being sequentially updated, and an image data determined by the first image display control means are input. A second image display control means is provided, which stores the image data in the storage unit each time the input is made and outputs the stored image data to the symbol display device 41. Specifically, an image data determination unit 240 is provided as the first image display control means, a storage unit 241a is provided as the storage unit, and an output control unit 241 is provided as the second image display control means.

The power supply unit 113 for power-on separately includes a supply path for supplying power to the image data determination unit 240 as the first image display control means and the output control unit 241 as the second image display control means. ing. When it is detected that the pachinko machine 10 is in a non-gaming state in the processing of steps S402 and S405 in the power saving mode transition processing of the main control device 71, the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the image data determination unit 240. While the power supply in the supply path is cut off, the power supply in the supply path to the output control unit 241 is continuously performed.

<Display control when the power is turned on>
In the present embodiment, when the power is turned on to the display control device 121 when the power switch 135a is turned on or returned from the power saving mode, it is used for the display effect on the display control device 121 immediately after the power is turned on. Of all the image data to be processed, the predetermined image data defined as regular data is transferred from the ROM area to the RAM area, and is displayed depending on whether the data transfer is before or after the completion. The composition is such that the content of the production is changed. Specifically, the display effect will be simplified before the data transfer is completed. For example, no notice is displayed, and normal reach is used instead for all reach production. The configuration related to the effect executed by the display control device 121 will be described below.

<Electrical configuration related to display control>
First, the electrical configuration related to the display control of the symbol display device 41 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 97 is mounted on the voice emission control board 72a provided in the voice emission control device 72. The MPU 97 is a ROM 98 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 97, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 98 is executed. A certain RAM 99, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built in.

The MPU 97 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. An effect operation device 60 and a main control device 71 are connected to the input side of the MPU 97, and various lamp units 58a and 58b, a speaker unit 59, a movable accessory 200, and a display control device 121 are connected to the output side of the MPU 97. It is connected.

The MPU97 includes game times control commands (game times control information) such as variable commands, type commands, and variable end commands, and jackpot production commands such as opening commands, ending commands, open commands, and closing commands (big hit effects). Commands such as information) are received from the main control device 71, and various lamp units 58a and 58b and the speaker unit 59 are driven and controlled based on the received commands.

Further, the MPU 97 transmits each of the above commands received from the main control device 71 to the display control device 121 while maintaining the information form. Further, the MPU 97 determines whether or not the operation generation signal is received from the effect operation device 60, thereby determining whether or not the effect operation device 60 is being operated, and is operated. If it is determined to be present, an operation occurrence command is transmitted to the display control device 121.

The display control device 121 includes a display control board 121a on which a display CPU 302, a program ROM 303, a work RAM 304, a video display processor (VDP) 305, a character ROM 306, and a VDP side RAM 308 are mounted. The display CPU 302 and each memory (program ROM 303, work RAM 304, etc.) used for controlling the display CPU 302 correspond to the image data determination unit 240 of FIG. 18, and the VDP 305 and the output port 336 correspond to the output control unit 241 of FIG. do.

The display CPU 302 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 121. Specifically, the display CPU 302 is connected to the input port 311 mounted on the display control board 121a via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the voice emission control device 72 are input to the display CPU 302 through the input port 311. Will be done. Further, the display CPU 302 is connected to the program ROM 303 and the work RAM 304 via a bus.

The program ROM 303 is a control non-volatile storage unit for storing control information such as various control programs executed by the display CPU 302 and fixed value data. The program ROM 303 is a non-volatile semiconductor memory, and in detail, a NOR type flash memory is used. The storage capacity is 256 Mbits, but such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display CPU 302 is satisfactorily executed. A part of the fixed value data is stored in advance in each area 303a to 303d of the program ROM 303. Details of each of these areas 303a to 303d will be described when the processing executed by the display CPU 302 is described.

The work RAM 304 is a control volatile storage unit for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the display CPU 302. The work RAM 304 is a volatile semiconductor memory, and DRAM is used in detail. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and SRAM may be used. The storage capacity is 64 Mbits, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display CPU 302 is satisfactorily executed. The work data, flags, and the like are stored in the areas 304a to 304d of the work RAM 304. Details of each of these areas 304a to 304d will be described when the process executed by the display CPU 302 is described.

The display CPU 302 uses the program ROM 303 and the work RAM 304 to execute arithmetic processing based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 72. Further, the display CPU 302 is connected to the VDP 305 via a bus. Then, the display CPU 302 executes a control for giving a predetermined instruction to the VDP 305 as a result of the above arithmetic processing.

The VDP 305 has a control ROM 331 and a control RAM 332, and has a function of transferring a part of the data stored in the character ROM 306 to the VDP side RAM 308 based on the instruction by the display CPU 302. Further, the VDP 305 has a function of performing drawing processing on the symbol display device 41 by specifically processing the data using the data stored and held in the character ROM 306 and the VDP side RAM 308 based on the instruction by the display CPU 302. have. Specifically, the VDP 305 is a kind of drawing circuit (drawing means or drawing control unit) that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP305 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing.

The character ROM 306 is a non-volatile storage unit for image data (image information) for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 41 and background data. The character ROM 306 is a non-volatile semiconductor memory, and in detail, a NAND flash memory is used. Since the character ROM 306 is provided with two 8 Gbit NAND flash memories, the storage capacity is 16 Gbits. The character ROM 306 stores and holds bitmap format image data of various characters, a color palette table to be referred to when determining a display color at each dot of the bitmap image, and a JPEG format for a background image. Image data is stored and retained.

The VDP 305 is connected to the VDP side RAM 308 via a bus. The VDP side RAM 308 is a volatile storage unit for image base data (image information) for temporarily storing and holding the base data for image data generation stored and held in the character ROM 306 for reading the data in the VDP 305. .. The VDP-side RAM 308 is a VRAM (video RAM) made of a volatile semiconductor memory, and in detail, SDRAM is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM or dual port RAM may be used. The storage capacity is 512 Mbits because two 256 Mbit SDRAMs are provided as the VDP side RAM 308. That is, the storage capacity of the VDP side RAM 308 is set to be smaller than the storage capacity of the character ROM 306.

The VDP 305 accesses the VDP side RAM 308 based on the instruction by the display CPU 302 (the image data determination unit 240 in FIG. 18), and draws the image data for display output corresponding to the instruction by the display CPU 302 in the control RAM 332 of the VDP 305. It is created in the area 335 (storage unit 241a in FIG. 18). The drawing area 335 can store data for one frame in the symbol display device 41. Further, the VDP 305 is connected to an output port 336 mounted on the display control board 121a, and the output port 336 is connected to the symbol display device 41. Then, the VDP 305 (output control unit in FIG. 18) outputs a drawing signal to the symbol display device 41 based on the image data stored in the drawing area 335, and is predetermined on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. Display the image.

By the way, the voltage from the voltage conversion circuit 230 is always supplied to the VDP 305, the output port and the symbol display device 41, and the LOW level power supply permission signal is output from the output port 235 to the output switching circuits 231a and 231c. Even in this case, it is possible to display a predetermined image on the symbol display device 41 based on the image data stored in the drawing area 335.

As described above, by using the NAND flash memory as the character ROM 306, it is possible to increase the capacity while suppressing the manufacturing cost as compared with the configuration using the NOR flash memory. Further, by using the NAND flash memory, rewriting can be repeated at the development stage of the pachinko machine 10, and the development cost can be suppressed.
However, the NAND type flash memory has a slower data transfer speed than the NOR type flash memory. For example, the NOR type flash memory has 360 Mbit / sec, while the NAND flash memory has 60 Mbit / sec.

On the other hand, since the reading RAM such as the VDP side RAM 308 is provided as described above, the image base data necessary for generating the display output image data can be read into these RAM 308 in advance. Therefore, at the drawing timing in the VDP 305, the image data in the VDP 305 can be satisfactorily created by reading the image base data from the VDP side RAM 308 instead of the character ROM 306.

The storage capacity of the character ROM 306 and the specific storage capacity of the VDP side RAM 308 are arbitrary. Further, the individual storage capacity and the number of memories of each memory constituting the character ROM 306 are arbitrary, and the independent storage capacity and the number of memories of each memory constituting the VDP side RAM 308 are also arbitrary.

Here, a regular area 337 is set in the VDP side RAM 308. Of the various image base data stored in the character ROM 306, the image base data corresponding to the drawing instructions frequently used by the display CPU 302 is stored in the regular area 337, and the image stored in the regular area 337 is stored. The data will basically be resident.

Specifically, the regular data group stored in the regular area 337 is stored and retained as long as the situation in which the drawing instruction of the corresponding image can be generated continues. Further, even if a drawing instruction of the corresponding image is generated and the image is displayed once, the memory is retained in a situation where a new drawing instruction may be generated thereafter. Furthermore, at least a part of the regular data group is stored and retained until a predetermined erasing condition is satisfied, even if it is no longer possible to generate a drawing instruction of the corresponding image. Since the regular area 337 is provided, even if the display CPU 302 frequently gives a drawing instruction, the VDP 305 can satisfactorily draw an image corresponding to the drawing instruction by accessing the regular area 337. ..

Next, the software configuration of the character ROM 306 will be described. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the software configuration of the character ROM 306.

The character ROM 306 has a large number of unit areas for storing unit data. Unit data is stored individually for each of the large number of unit areas. Then, a data group for displaying an image pattern to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 over a predetermined period is configured by the unit data of a predetermined combination, and one for a plurality of types of image patterns. Data groups are set in a one-to-one correspondence.

The plurality of types of data groups include a first background data group, a normal symbol data group, a second background data group, a third background data group, a demo display data group, and a notice A data group. At least a group, a data group for advance notice B, a data group for normal reach, a data group for super reach, a data group for probabilistic jackpot, and a data group for normal jackpot are set.

The first background data group, the second background data group, and the third background data group are data groups for displaying a background image in a situation where variable display by a normal symbol is performed. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which the display mode is switched according to the operation of the effect operation device 60, and the first background data group displays the background image corresponding to the first display mode. The second background data group is a data group for displaying a background image corresponding to the second display mode.

The normal symbol data group is a data group for displaying a normal symbol. As shown in FIG. 6, the normal symbol includes nine types of main symbols and one type of sub-symbol, and a data group corresponding to each symbol is set.

The demo display data group is a data group for displaying an image when the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo display state.

The data group for the notice A and the data group for the notice B are data groups for displaying an image of the notice display which is a kind of expected effect in the middle of the game. In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of notice displays are set in different display modes, specifically, two types of notice A and notice B, and a data group is set corresponding to each notice display. ing.

The normal reach data group is a data group for displaying an image of the normal reach display among the reach displays which is a kind of expected effect in the middle of the game round.

The data group for super reach is a data group for displaying an image of the super reach display among the reach displays which is a kind of expected effect in the middle of the game. By the way, the super reach display is a reach display for expecting the player to generate a jackpot result more than in the case of the normal reach display, and when the super reach display occurs, the normal reach display is used.

The probability variation jackpot data group is a data group for displaying an image of the jackpot effect performed by the symbol display device 41 during the opening / closing execution mode when the probability variation jackpot result is obtained. The jackpot production corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result includes a jackpot start production, a production corresponding to each round, and a jackpot end production, and the data group for the probability variation jackpot is used to display an image of each of these effects. Contains data groups.

The normal jackpot data group is a data group for displaying an image of a jackpot effect performed by the symbol display device 41 during the opening / closing execution mode when a normal jackpot result is obtained. The jackpot effect corresponding to the normal jackpot result includes a jackpot start effect, an effect corresponding to each round, and a jackpot end effect, and the normal jackpot data group is used to display an image of each of these effects. Contains data groups.

Of the above data groups, the first background data group, the normal symbol data group, the second background data group, the third background data group, and the demo display data group are the pachinko machine 10. This is a regular data group that is transferred to the regular area 337 of the VDP side RAM 308 and stored (resident) in the regular area 337 when the power is turned on.

Since each background data group and the normal symbol data group are set as the regular symbol data group, the symbol display device 41 can immediately start the variable display of the symbol when the start condition of the game round is satisfied. It will be possible. That is, the winning of the operating ports 33 and 34 provided in the game area occurs at an arbitrary timing, and the winning of the operating ports 33 and 34 is newly generated in the situation where the hold information is not stored. When the hold information is acquired, the game times related to the hold information will be started immediately. In this case, if the background data group and the normal symbol data group are read from the character ROM 306 to the VDP side RAM 308 after the acquisition of the hold information is specified, the reading speed of the character ROM 306 is slow. As a result, the start of the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 is delayed accordingly.

On the other hand, since each background data group and normal symbol data group are set as regular data groups, even if a prize is generated in the operation ports 33 and 34 at an arbitrary timing, each of them at that time. Since the background data group and the normal symbol data group are read out in the regular area 337, it is possible to immediately display the image of the variable display of the symbol.

<Processing configuration related to display control of the symbol display device 41>
Next, the processing configuration related to the display control of the symbol display device 41 will be described. In the display control device 121, various processes are executed by the display CPU 302, and various processes are executed by the VDP 305 based on the instruction by the display CPU 302 to control the display of the symbol display device 41.

The processing executed by the display CPU 302 includes a main processing executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and a normal processing executed after the main processing, and each processing is predetermined for the VDP 305. The instructions are executed. Hereinafter, the main process of the display CPU 302 and the process of the VDP 305 executed based on the instruction in the main process will be described, and then the normal process of the display CPU 302 will be described.

<Main processing of display CPU 302>
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the display CPU 302. As shown in FIG. 21, in step S601, the instruction processing of the initial setting of the regular data group is executed.
In the instruction processing, the initial setting command for the VDP 305 read from the command storage area (instruction information storage means) 303a of the program ROM 303 is transmitted to the VDP 305.
By receiving the initial setting command, the VDP 305 executes a process for transferring the regular data group from the character ROM 306 to the regular area 337 of the VDP side RAM 308.

After executing the instruction processing of the initial setting of the regular data group in step S601, the process proceeds to step S602. In step S602, it is determined whether or not the transfer of the first background data group to the regular area 337 is completed. The determination is made by determining whether or not the write completion signal corresponding to the first background data group is received from the VDP 305.

When the transfer of the first background data group to the regular area 337 is not completed, the process of step S602 is repeatedly executed, and the transfer of the first background data group to the regular area 337 is completed. To step S603. In step S603, the drawing instruction processing of the first background image is executed. Specifically, the drawing list information corresponding to the first background image is read from the drawing list information storage area 303b of the program ROM 303 so that the first background image is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. , The read drawing list information is transmitted to VDP305.

Here, the drawing list information is information in which drawing instructions for one frame on the display screen G are set, and is a color palette for determining the data information of the bitmap image and the display color of each dot of the bitmap image. Contains table information.

In the following step S604, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the display of the first background image. The measurement of the end timing is performed by using the end timing counters of the various counter areas 304c provided in the work RAM 304, and when the end timing counter is first executed with the drawing instruction processing of the inspection image. Information on the end reference value is set.
Then, every time a negative determination is made in step S604, the value of the end timing counter is updated to be subtracted by 1, and when the value of the end timing counter becomes "0", it is affirmed in step S604. Make a judgment. The configuration related to the measurement of the end timing is the same in step S607, which will be described later.

If it is determined in step S604 that it is not the end timing, the drawing instruction processing of the first background image is executed again in step S603. In the drawing instruction processing of the inspection image in this case, it is determined whether or not it is the drawing instruction timing of the new first background image, and if it is the drawing instruction timing, the drawing list information corresponding to the inspection image is again displayed as VDP305. Send to. That is, the drawing list information corresponding to the inspection image is transmitted to the VDP 305 every time the drawing instruction timing is reached until the end timing is reached. If it is determined in step S604 that the end timing is reached, the process proceeds to step S605.

In the following step S605, it is determined whether or not the transfer of the normal symbol data group to the regular area 337 is completed. The determination is performed by determining whether or not a write completion signal corresponding to the normal symbol data group is received from the VDP 305.

If the transfer of the normal symbol data group to the regular area 337 is not completed, the process of step S605 is repeatedly executed, and if the transfer of the normal symbol data group to the regular area 337 is completed, the transfer is completed. , Step S606. In step S606, the drawing instruction processing of the normal symbol image is executed. Specifically, the drawing list information corresponding to the normal symbol image is read from the drawing list information storage area 303b of the program ROM 303 so that the normal symbol image is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. The read drawing list information is transmitted to the VDP 305.

In the following step S607, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the display of the normal symbol image. Similar to step S604, such end timing measurement is performed using end timing counters of various counter areas 304c provided in the work RAM 304.

If it is determined in step S607 that it is not the end timing, the drawing instruction processing of the normal symbol image is executed again in step S606. When it is determined in step S607 that the end timing is reached, the main process is shifted to the normal process.

In addition, in FIG. 21, the order of each process is arbitrary, and for example, the process of steps S602 to S604 and the process of steps S605 to S607 may be interchanged before and after.

<Process executed by VDP305 at the time of initial setting>
Next, the process executed by the VDP 305 at the time of the initial setting instruction process (step S601) by the display CPU 302 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the initial transfer process in the VDP 305. In VDP305, the VDP side main process including a plurality of types of processes is repeatedly started in a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec), and the initial transfer process is set as a part of the VDP side main process. ..

As shown in FIG. 22, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the initial setting command is received from the display CPU 302. If the initial setting command has not been received, in step S702, it is determined whether or not the normal data group is in the initial setting state. If it is not in the initial setting state of the regular data group (step S702: NO), the initial transfer process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the initial setting command is received (step S701: YES), the state of VDP305 is set to the initial setting state of the regular data group in step S703. Here, when setting various states, the setting flag corresponding to the state to be set is stored in the control RAM 332 of the VDP 305, and when releasing various states, the setting flag corresponding to the state to be released is deleted. .. This also applies to the setting and cancellation of other states.

Further, in step S703, the initial transfer table corresponding to the initial setting is read from the control ROM 331 of the VDP 305 to the control RAM 332. In the initial transfer table, address information of an area to be referred to when reading data from the character ROM 306 and reference order information when the address information is sequentially referred to are set.

After executing the process of step S703, the process proceeds to step S704. Further, when it is determined in step S702 that the normal data group is in the initial setting state, the process proceeds to step S704.

In step S704, a writing process for writing the unit data to be read in the character ROM 306 to the regular area 337 of the VDP side RAM 308 is executed. In this case, in the initial transfer table, information for specifying in the VDP 305 which address unit area in the regular area 337 the unit data is to be written is set. In VDP305, when the unit data is written in the regular area 337, the unit data is written in the unit area of the regular area 337 defined in advance. At this time, writing is performed for each predetermined unit data for any of the data groups included in the regular data group.

In the following step S705, it is determined whether or not the writing of the group of image data groups is completed. The determination is made by referring to the initial transfer table to determine whether or not it is the timing when writing is completed for the unit data in the last order among a large number of unit data set as a group of image data groups. Do by.

If the writing is not completed, the initial transfer process is terminated as it is. When the writing is completed, in step S706, a writing completion signal for causing the display CPU 302 to recognize that the writing to the regular area 337 is completed for the predetermined image data group is transmitted to the display CPU 302. .. The write completion signal is set so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with each image data group, and in step S706, the corresponding write completion signal is transmitted to the display CPU 302.

In the following step S707, the write completion process is executed. In the writing completion process, a process for making the image data group stored in the regular area 337 identifiable by the VDP 305 is executed. Specifically, the control RAM 332 of the VDP 305 is set with a data group flag storage area in which there is a one-to-one correspondence with the image data group that may be written in the regular area 337. In the writing completion process, the data group flag is stored in the data group flag storage area corresponding to the image data group for the image data group determined in step S705 that the writing to the regular area 337 is completed. The flags stored in each data group flag storage area are deleted when the corresponding image data group is deleted from the regular area 337.

In the following step S708, it is determined whether or not the initial setting is completed. The determination is made by referring to the initial transfer table to determine whether or not it is the timing when writing is completed for the image data group in the last order among the plurality of image data groups set as the regular data group. Do it by. If the initial setting is not completed, the initial transfer process is terminated as it is, and if the initial setting is completed, the initial setting state of the regular data group is canceled in step S709, and then the initial transfer process is performed. finish.

<Processing executed by VDP305 for drawing instructions>
Next, the process executed by the VDP 305 in response to the drawing instruction will be described. As the processing executed by the VDP 305 in response to the drawing instruction, a drawing data setting process and a drawing signal output process are set. Hereinafter, the drawing data setting process will be described first, and then the drawing signal output process will be described.

<Drawing data setting process>
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a drawing data setting process in the VDP 305.
In step S801, it is determined whether or not the drawing list information is received from the display CPU 302. If it has not been received, the present setting process is terminated as it is, and if it has been received, the process proceeds to step S802.

In step S802, it is determined whether or not the data corresponding to the information in the drawing list is stored in the regular area 337. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the data group flag related to the data corresponding to the information in the drawing list is stored in the control RAM 332 of the VDP 305.

When the data corresponding to the information of the drawing list is stored in the regular area 337, the necessary data is read from the regular area 337 in step S803, and the read data is read out in the drawing area 335 of VDP305 in step S804. Write to. After that, in step S805, it is determined whether or not the creation of the image data corresponding to the information of the drawing list this time is completed. If the creation is not completed, the processes of steps S803 and S804 are repeatedly executed. If the creation is completed, the setting process of the drawing data is terminated.

On the other hand, when the data corresponding to the information in the drawing list is not stored in the regular area 337 (step S802: NO), in step S806, the necessary data is read from the change area, that is, the character ROM 306. Then, the read data is written in the drawing area 335 of the VDP 305 in step S807. After that, in step S808, it is determined whether or not the creation of the image data corresponding to the information of the drawing list this time is completed. If the creation is not completed, the processes of steps S806 and S807 are repeatedly executed. If the creation is completed, this setting process ends.

The drawing data created by the processes of steps S806 to S808 is executed when the drawing list information is output based on the drawing instruction processing such as the notice display and the reach display.

<Output processing of drawing signal>
Next, the output processing of the drawing signal will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not it is the output timing of the drawing data. The information on the output timing of the drawing data is included in the information on the drawing list corresponding to the drawing data. If it is not the output timing of the drawing data, the main output process is terminated as it is. If it is the output timing of the drawing data, the process proceeds to step S902.

In step S902, the drawing area 335 is referred to, and in step S903, the drawing signal corresponding to the referred data is output to the symbol display device 41 through the output port 336. After that, in step S904, it is determined whether or not the drawing process of the image corresponding to the drawing data of this time is completed. If the drawing process is not completed, the processes of step S902 and step S903 are repeatedly executed. When the drawing process is completed, the output process of the main drawing signal is terminated.

<Normal processing of display CPU 302>
Next, processing in the normal processing of the display CPU 302 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing normal processing. The normal process is executed after the main process is completed, and is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec) after the main process is completed.

In step S1001, the game turn control process for displaying the effect for each game turn on the symbol display device 41 is executed. In the following step S1002, the jackpot control process for displaying the effect for the open / close execution mode on the symbol display device 41 is executed.

The jackpot control process includes an effect control process for controlling the effect for the jackpot from the end of the game round that results in the probability variation jackpot until the end of the open / close execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result, and the normal jackpot result. An effect control process for controlling the effect for the jackpot from the end of the game round to the end of the open / close execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result is set.

In the following step S1003, a background image control process for displaying any one of the first background image, the second background image, and the third background image as the background image displayed on the symbol display device 41 is executed. In the background image control process, a process of determining the background image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is performed according to the value of the counter provided for the background. The value of the counter provided for the background is updated based on the occurrence of the operation of the effect operation device 60.

In the following step S1004, a demo display process for displaying the effect for demo display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. In the demo display process, it is first determined whether or not a demo start command has been received from the main control device 71. When the demo start command is received, the display CPU 302 gives a drawing instruction for the demo display to the VDP 305, so that the image for the demo display is displayed on the symbol display device 41. After that, this normal processing is terminated.

<Game times control process of display CPU 302>
First, the game rotation control process of step S1001 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the variation command transmitted from the main control device 71 and relayed by the voice emission control device 72 is received. Here, the command received from the voice emission control device 72 is stored in the command storage area 304a provided in the work RAM 304. The command storage area 304a is a ring buffer that has a plurality of areas for storing commands, writes commands to the area set by the write pointer, and reads commands from the area set by the read pointer.

If a change command has been received, in step S1102, the change start process based on the normal symbol is executed, and then the game turn control process ends.

Hereinafter, the fluctuation start processing using the normal symbol in step S1102 will be described.

<Fluctuation start processing by normal symbol in display CPU 302>
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing by the normal symbol.

First, in step S1201, based on the received fluctuation command and type command, information on whether or not a jackpot has been won, information on the jackpot type when a jackpot result occurs, and information on the fluctuation display time are grasped and grasped. The information is stored in the register of the display CPU 302.

In the following step S1202, the stop information setting process is executed. In the stop information setting process, a process for determining the information of the combination of symbols to be finally stopped in the current game round is executed.

Specifically, the work RAM 304 is provided with a symbol update counter and a symbol information acquisition area. The symbol update counter is provided with a counter for the upper symbol row, a counter for the middle symbol row, and a counter for the lower symbol row, and these counters are provided with each symbol row Z1 in the symbol display device 41. Counter values corresponding to the number of symbols set in ~ Z3 are set.

That is, as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 have a counter for the upper symbol row corresponding to the fact that 18 symbols are set as the total number of the main symbol and the sub symbol. A numerical range of "0 to 17" is set in the counter for the lower symbol sequence. Further, in correspondence with the fact that 20 symbols are set as the total number of the main symbol and the sub symbol in the middle symbol row Z2, the counter for the middle symbol row has a numerical range of "0 to 19". Is set. The counter value for each symbol sequence is updated at different cycles. The value of the counter for each symbol string corresponds to the type of symbol that stops on the left line in the corresponding symbol string. Then, in a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec), all the updated information in the counter for each symbol string is acquired, and the acquired information is stored in the symbol information acquisition area.

The symbol information acquisition area includes a probability variation jackpot area, a normal jackpot area, an out-of-reach area, and a complete out-of-court area. Then, it is determined whether or not the information acquired from all the counters for each symbol sequence corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result, the normal jackpot result, the off reach, or the complete off, and the symbol information acquisition area. The information of the corresponding area is updated.

In the stop information setting process of step S1202, first, it is determined whether the game round this time is a probability variation jackpot result, a normal jackpot result, a missed reach result, or a complete missed result.
Then, the information of the combination of symbols to be finally stopped is acquired from the area corresponding to the determination result in the symbol information acquisition area, and is stored in the register of the display CPU 302. The information of the combination of the symbols includes the combination of the symbols of the probability variation jackpot result, the combination of the normal jackpot results, and the information of the effective line for stopping the combination of the out-of-reach symbols.

By the way, the combination of symbols corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result is a mode in which the same odd-numbered symbols (specific symbols) are stopped and displayed on one effective line. In addition, the combination of symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot result is a mode in which the same even-numbered symbols (non-specific symbols) are stopped and displayed on one effective line. In addition, the combination of symbols corresponding to the out-of-reach is an aspect in which the reach is out-of-reach in a mode different from the above-predetermined mode.

In the following description, the stop information corresponding to the jackpot result is the stop information corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result.

In the following step S1203, the lottery process for displaying the notice is executed. In the lottery process of the notice display, the establishment lottery counter of the work RAM 304 and the establishment lottery table stored in the program ROM 303 are used. The establishment lottery counter is configured to be able to store a counter value of "0 to 99", and is configured to add 1 each time the normal process (FIG. 25) is started, that is, in a cycle of about 4 msec. , It is configured to be initialized to "0" after reaching the maximum value.

In addition, the winning lottery table is set corresponding to each of the probability variation jackpot result, the normal jackpot result, the out-of-reach, and the complete out-of-court. These winning lottery tables are set so that the notice display is won at 100% in the winning lottery table corresponding to each jackpot result and the missed reach, and the order of the missed reach → the normal jackpot result → the probability variation jackpot result. It is set so that the probability that the notice B is selected is high. In addition, the probability that both the notice A and the notice B will not be performed is the highest in the established lottery table corresponding to the complete deviation, the probability of the notice A is the highest, and the probability of the notice B is the lowest. It has become. The probability of this notice B is set lower than in the case of out-of-reach.

In addition, in the case where the result is completely deviated and the shorter the variable display time is selected as the number of pending information is larger, the result is completely deviated and the variable display time is shorter than the predetermined time. The lottery process of the notice display is not executed, and the execution of the notice display may be restricted.

In step S1203, first, it is determined whether the current game round is a probability variation jackpot result, a normal jackpot result, a missed reach result, or a complete missed result, and the winning lottery table corresponding to the judgment result is read and established. Read the counter value for the lottery. Then, with reference to the establishment lottery table, whether or not the read-out counter value for the establishment lottery corresponds to either the notice A or the notice B, or whether or not both the notice A and the notice B are performed. To judge. In the following step S1204, the result information of the lottery process of the notice display in step S1203 is acquired and stored in the register of the display CPU 302.

In the following step S1205, it is determined whether or not the reach display occurs in this game round. When the reach display occurs, in step S1206, the reach pattern setting process for determining the reach pattern in the current game round is executed.

In the reach pattern setting process, the reach pattern table stored in the program ROM 303 is used. The reach pattern table is a table for determining the reach pattern according to the fluctuation display time information (variation display time determined by the main control device 71) grasped in step S1201. Specifically, a mode in which only the normal reach is performed and a mode in which the super reach is performed after the normal reach are set in association with the information of the variable display time. In step S1205, the reach pattern information is referred to, and the reach type information corresponding to the current variation display time is acquired and stored in the register of the display CPU 302.

As described above, the fluctuation display time of each game round is determined by the main control device 71, and the main control device 71 determines whether or not to generate the reach display in each game round, and the determination is made. The variable display time is determined according to the result.

If the reach display does not occur in the current game times (step S1205: NO) or after the processing of step S1206 is executed, in step S1207, if the current game times and the jackpot result occur, the effect for the jackpot is produced. In, a process for setting a display table to be appropriately referred to when performing display control of the symbol display device 41 is executed.
The display table will be described in detail later.

In the following step S1208, the information on the fluctuation display time grasped in step S1201 is set in the measurement counter as the fluctuation time measurement means for display provided in the various counter areas 304c of the work RAM 304.

In the following step S1209, a background counter provided as a display mode grasping means in various counter areas 304c of the work RAM 304 is referred to. The background counter is a storage means for grasping the type of background image currently set in the display CPU 302, and the counter value is set in the background counter in a one-to-one correspondence with each display mode. Has been done.

Specifically, as display modes, a first display mode in which the first background image is displayed, a second display mode in which the second background image is displayed, and a third background image are displayed. Since the third display mode is set, the counter values of the background counter are set to "0", "1", and "2" corresponding to these. The counter value of the background counter is alternately switched based on the operation of the effect operating device 60 in the situation where the game times and the opening / closing execution mode are not executed. The process related to this switching will be described later.

In the following step S1210, after executing the process of starting the effect for the game round by the normal symbol on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, the present variation start process is ended. In step S1210, the information of the drawing list at the start of fluctuation is specified based on the reference result of the background counter in step S1209 while referring to the display table set in step S1207, and the information of the specified drawing list is drawn. Read from the list information storage area 303b. Then, the read drawing list information is transmitted to the VDP 305.

The VDP 305 executes a drawing data setting process and a drawing signal output process, and displays an image at the start of fluctuation on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. In this case, if each background data group and normal symbol data group are stored in the regular area 337, the image at the start of fluctuation can be displayed immediately without requiring reading of the image data from the character ROM 306. can.

<Table configuration and processing configuration related to display table settings>
Here, the table configuration and the processing configuration related to the setting of the display table will be described. The display table includes information for specifying the timing of outputting the drawing list information to the VDP 305 and the type of the drawing list information in the middle of the game round or the production for the jackpot.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the VDP 305 reads out the image data from the character ROM 306 when the display control of the symbol display device 41 is performed at the time of the advance notice and the reach display. In this case, the storage capacity of the RAM 308 on the VDP side is a storage capacity that cannot store all of the data groups (the regular data group and the change data group in FIG. 20) corresponding to the effects for each game and the jackpot at one time. There is. For example, in the game round when the super reach is displayed, the storage capacity of the data group required to display a series of effects from the start to the end of the game round exceeds 3 Gbits, but the VDP side RAM308 The storage capacity of is about 1.5 Gbit.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, a series of effects is divided into a plurality of effect ranges, and the data group corresponding to each effect range is sequentially transferred to the VDP side RAM 308, and is already stored in the VDP side RAM 308 at the time of the transfer. It is configured to overwrite the data group that is no longer needed. That is, the data group corresponding to the predetermined effect range is transferred to the VDP side RAM 308 in advance before the predetermined effect range is started. In this case, the front effect range set to be the execution target is executed before the predetermined effect range. Further, in a situation where the predetermined effect range is being executed, the data group corresponding to the rear side effect range set to be executed after the predetermined effect range is transferred to the VDP side RAM 308. In this case, the data group corresponding to the rear side effect range is overwritten with respect to the data group corresponding to the front side effect range. At the time of this overwriting, due to the relationship between the data group on the newly written side and the data group on the erased side, a part of the data group on the erased side is erased or the data on the erased side is erased. A situation occurs in which the entire group is erased.

In the display table, not only the timing for outputting the drawing list information and the information for specifying the type of the drawing list information, but also the information for specifying the transfer instruction timing of various data groups from the character ROM 306 to the VDP side RAM 308 is specified. Is included. When setting the display table, the variable display table storage area 303c provided in the program ROM 303 as the variable display information group storage means is referred to, and the program ROM 303 is provided as the jackpot effect information group storage means. The jackpot effect table storage area 303d is referred to.

Next, the display table setting process executed in step S1207 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28.

As shown in FIG. 28, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the reach display occurs in this game round. If the reach display does not occur, in step S1302, a process for acquiring the base table corresponding to the complete deviation is executed.

Here, the base table group is stored in the variable display table storage area 303c. The base table group includes a table group for complete disengagement and a table group for generating reach. In the table group for complete deviation, information for specifying the timing of outputting the drawing list information and the type of the drawing list information at the timing from the start of the variable display to the result of the complete deviation (hereinafter, such information is displayed). It contains a large number of completely out-of-order tables with information). These completely disengagement tables are prepared with a one-to-one correspondence with any combination of the variable display time and the stop information.

The reach generation table group includes a large number of reach generation tables showing display information at the timing from the start of the variable display to the occurrence of the reach. These reach generation tables are prepared with a one-to-one correspondence with any combination of the variable display time and the reach symbol.

Further, the image of the variable display of the symbol in the case of complete deviation and from the start of the variable display to the occurrence of reach is composed of only the background image and the image of the normal symbol.

In step S1302, among the base table groups, a completely out-of-order table corresponding to the combination of the variable display time and the stop information in the current game round is acquired, and the acquired table information is stored in the display table storage area 304b. do.

After that, in step S1303, it is determined whether or not all the data transfer of the regular data group is completed. If a negative determination is made in step S1303, the setting process of this display table is terminated. With the above configuration, when all the data transfer of the regular data group is not completed, it is possible not to display the notice even if there is a notice request. By limiting the content of the effect executed during the data transfer, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the requested display is possible during the data transfer, and the display control process can be simplified.

When step S1303 becomes NO, that is, when all the data transfer of the regular data group is not completed, the information writing to the notice table (steps S1306 and S1307) becomes unnecessary. Therefore, in such a case, the lottery process related to the notice display (step S1203 in FIG. 27) may not be performed.

In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the transfer is completed for each data, but instead, the completion of data transfer may be determined based on, for example, the time required from the start of data transfer. The determination value (time width for determining the required time) for determining the completion of data transfer may be determined based on the amount of data in the regular data group. The same applies to step S1309 described later and step S1503 of FIG.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S1303, it is determined in step S1304 whether or not the notice A is generated in the current game round, and in step S1305, whether or not the notice B is generated in the current game round. Judge whether or not.

When the notice A occurs (step S1303: YES), the process for acquiring the notice A table is executed in step S1306. When the notice B occurs (step S1305: YES), the process for acquiring the notice B table is executed in step S1307. If both the notice A and the notice B do not occur (step S1305: NO), the present setting process is terminated as it is.

Here, the notice table group is stored in the variable display table storage area 303c. The notice table group includes a notice A table and a notice B table. The notice A table shows display information necessary for displaying the image of the notice A at the timing from the start of the variation display to the stop of the variation display of the symbols in the first symbol sequence. The notice B table shows display information necessary for displaying the image of the notice B at the timing from the start of the change display to the stop of the change display of the symbols in the first symbol sequence.

Further, in each of the notice A table and the notice B table, information for specifying the transfer instruction timing for transferring the notice A data group or the notice B data group from the character ROM 306 to the VDP side RAM 308 is set. Has been done. In the pachinko machine 10, the transfer instruction timing is set so that the transfer instruction of the data group for the notice A or the data group for the notice B is given immediately after the start of the variable display of the symbol. In this case, among the completely off table and the reach generation table included in the base table group, the table that can be selected when the notice display is executed is the table in the first symbol column from the start of the variable display. As the period until the variable display is stopped, a sufficient period is secured for both the notice A and the notice B to complete the notice display after the transfer of the notice data group is completed.

If the transfer of the data group corresponding to the notice display can be completed by the start of the notice display, the transfer instruction timing is not limited to the above and is arbitrary.

In step S1306, the notice A table is acquired from the variable display table storage area 303c, and the acquired table information is overwritten with the base table information stored in the display table storage area 304b. Further, in step S1307, the notice B table is acquired from the variable display table storage area 303c, and the acquired table information is overwritten with the base table information stored in the display table storage area 304b.

Since the notice A and the notice B are effects that are executed at the same time as the design portion in the situation where the fluctuation display of the design is performed based on the base table, the design is to be displayed in order to display the image corresponding to the design. It is necessary to set the drawing list information for displaying both the variable display and the notice display at the same time. In this case, in the process of acquiring the notice table, the base already stored in the display table storage area 304b so that the drawing list information for simultaneously displaying both the variable display of the symbol and the notice display can be set. Overwrite the information in the notice table with respect to the information in the table.

Further, in the display table storage area 304b, a display area for storing display information and a transfer instruction area for storing transfer instruction timing information are set, and a notice table is acquired. In the process, the transfer instruction timing information is stored in the transfer instruction area. Specifically, in the transfer instruction area, a flag storage area is individually set for the possible transfer instruction timing, and the data group to be transferred that can be assumed corresponding to each transfer instruction timing. On the other hand, the flag storage area is set individually. When storing transfer instruction timing information in the transfer instruction area, a flag is stored for the area corresponding to the transfer instruction timing to be set this time, and the area corresponding to the data group to be transferred to be set this time. The flag is stored for the area set in association with the transfer instruction timing. The configuration related to the setting of information in the transfer instruction area is the same when the configuration is based on the acquisition of other tables such as the normal reach table, the super reach table, and the jackpot effect table.

Returning to the description of the display table setting process (FIG. 28), if reach display occurs in the current game round (step S1301: YES), the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, a process for acquiring the base table corresponding to the reach display is executed. Specifically, among the base table groups already described, a reach generation table corresponding to the combination of the variable display time and the reach symbol in this game round is acquired, and the acquired table information is displayed in the display table storage area. Store in 304b.

In the following step S1309, it is determined whether or not the data transfer of the regular data group is completed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1309, the process proceeds to step S1310.

In step S1310, it is determined whether or not the notice A is generated in this game round.
When the notice A occurs, in step S1311, the table for the notice A is acquired from the variable display table storage area 303c, and the acquired table information is stored in the variable display table storage area 304b for the base table. Overwrite the information in. If the notice A does not occur, the notice display will surely occur in the game times in which the reach display occurs this time, and the notice display will surely occur in the game times in which the reach display occurs. Therefore, in step S1312, the table for variable display is stored. The notice B table is acquired from the area 303c, and the acquired table information is overwritten with the base table information stored in the variable display table storage area 304b. The processing content related to the acquisition of these notice tables is the same as in the cases of step S1306 and step S1307.

After executing the process of step S1311 or step S1312, in step S1313, it is determined whether or not only normal reach occurs in this game round and super reach does not occur. When only the normal reach occurs or when a negative determination is made in step S1309, the process for acquiring the normal reach table is executed in step S1314. With the above configuration, if all the data transfer of the regular data group is not completed, it is possible to prevent the notice display and the display corresponding to the super reach even if there is a notice request or a super reach request. Become. By limiting the content of the effect executed during the data transfer, it is not necessary to determine whether the requested display is possible during the data transfer, and the display control process can be simplified.

If it is determined in step S1313 that super reach will occur in this game round, the process proceeds to step S1315. In step S1315, a process for acquiring the super reach table is executed.

After the execution of step S1314 or step S1315, it is determined in step S1316 whether or not a jackpot result is generated in the current game round, and if no jackpot result is generated, the present setting process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step S1316 that a jackpot result will occur in this game round, an affirmative determination is made and the process proceeds to step S1317. In step S1317, it is determined whether or not a probabilistic jackpot result is generated in the current game round, and further, in step S1318, it is determined whether or not a normal jackpot result is generated in the current game round.

When the probability variation jackpot result occurs (step S1317: YES), the present setting process ends after the process for acquiring the probability variation jackpot table is executed in step S1319. If a normal jackpot result occurs (step S1318: YES), the setting process ends after executing the process for acquiring the normal jackpot table in step S1320. When neither the probabilistic jackpot nor the normal jackpot occurs (step S1318: NO), this setting process ends.

Returning to the description of the game time control process (FIG. 26), when the variation command is not received (step S1101: NO), it is determined in step S1103 whether or not the variation is being displayed by the normal symbol. .. The determination is made by determining whether or not the normal fluctuation flag is stored in the normal fluctuation flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 304d of the work RAM 304. The normal fluctuation flag is stored at the start of the change according to the normal symbol, and is cleared at the end of the game round.

If the fluctuation display by the normal symbol is not being performed, the main game times control process is terminated as it is. When the variation display by the normal symbol is being displayed, the game rotation control process is terminated after the variable processing process by the normal symbol is executed in step S1104.

<Processing during fluctuation by normal symbol>
Next, the process during fluctuation by the normal symbol in step S1104 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the processing during fluctuation by the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 29, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the variation end command transmitted from the main control device 71 and relayed by the voice emission control device 72 is received. If the variable end command has not been received, the measurement counter of the work RAM 304 is referred to in step S1402, and the display table of the work RAM 304 is referred to in step S1403.

In the following step S1404, the information on the elapsed time of the game times specified in step S1402 is collated with the display table specified in step S1403, and it is determined whether or not it is the setting timing of the drawing list.

When it is the drawing list setting timing, the drawing list setting process is executed in step S1405.

The drawing list information of the contents set in the drawing list setting process is output to VDP305 in the following step S1406. As a result, in the VDP 305, a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

When the process for outputting the drawing list information (step S1406) is executed or when it is determined that the timing is not the setting timing of the drawing list (step S1404: NO), after the data transfer instruction process is executed in step S1407. , Ends the processing during this change.

In the data transfer instruction process, the transfer command for the data to be transferred is read from the command storage area 303a of the program ROM 303, and the read command is transmitted to the VDP 305.

On the other hand, if the variable end command is received (step S1401: YES), the process proceeds to step S1408. In step S1408, the currently stored display table is referred to, drawing list information corresponding to the one set as the final setting timing in the display table is read from the drawing list information storage area 303b, and the read drawing is performed. The list information is output to VDP305. In VDP305, drawing data setting processing and drawing signal output processing are executed, and the last image in the game round is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. As a result, the variable display of the symbols for one game is completed.

After that, in step S1409, after executing the variation end process for executing the process such as erasing the flag stored in the work RAM 304 in order to advance the effect for the game round, the process during the variation is terminated.

<Background image control processing of display CPU 302>
Next, the background image control process in step S1003 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the production for the game round is in progress. If the production for the game round is in progress, the background image control process is terminated as it is, and if the production for the game round is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S1502. In step S1502, it is determined whether or not the jackpot production is in progress. If the jackpot effect is being produced, the background image control process is terminated as it is, and if the jackpot effect is not being produced, the process proceeds to step S1503.

In step S1503, it is determined whether or not the transfer of the regular data group is completed. When the transfer of the regular data group is not completed, in step S1504, the type of drawing list information corresponding to the first display mode is specified, and the specified drawing list information is stored in the drawing list information storage area of the program ROM 303. Read from 303b and output to VDP305.
After that, the standby image control process is terminated. In VDP305, by receiving the drawing list information output in step S1504, the drawing data setting process and the drawing signal output process are executed, and the image for the first background is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. Display it.

Here, in the situation where the transfer of the regular symbol data group is not completed, the situation where the transfer of the normal symbol data group is completed means that the first background data group and the normal symbol data group are regularly used when the power is turned on. Although the transfer to the area 337 is completed, the transfer of the second background data group and the third background data group to the regular area 337 is not completed. That is, when the power is turned on, the transfer of the data group corresponding to the all display modes is not completed, but the transfer of the data group corresponding to the reference display mode is completed. In such a situation, by executing the display of the image for the first background regardless of the display mode, even if there is a request for displaying an image for the background other than the image for the first background, the display according to the request is made. It is possible not to do. By limiting the content of the effect executed during the data transfer, it is possible to reliably execute the display without determining whether or not the requested display is possible during the data transfer.

On the other hand, when the transfer of the regular data group is completed (step S1503: YES), the process proceeds to step S1505. In step S1505, it is determined whether or not an operation generation command is received from the voice emission control device 72. When the operation occurrence command is received, the background counter update process is executed in step S1506. As described above, the display modes include a first display mode in which the first background image is displayed, a second display mode in which the second background image is displayed, and a third display mode in which the third background image is displayed. Three types are set. Therefore, in step S1506, when the counter value corresponds to the first display mode, the counter value corresponds to the second display mode, and when the counter value corresponds to the second display mode, the third display is performed. It is updated to the counter value corresponding to the mode, and when it is the counter value corresponding to the third display mode, it is updated to the counter value corresponding to the first display mode.

When a negative determination is made in step S1505 or after the execution of step S1506, the background counter reading process is executed in step S1507. In the reading process, the value of the background counter is confirmed and temporarily stored in the work RAM 304.

In the following step S1508, a process of outputting drawing list information corresponding to the value of the background counter temporarily confirmed in step S1507 is executed. Specifically, first, it is determined which display mode the value of the background counter corresponds to. The value of the background counter corresponds to the first display mode if it corresponds to "0", and corresponds to the second display mode if it corresponds to "1", and corresponds to "2". If so, it corresponds to the third display mode. Next, the type of drawing list information corresponding to the background image of the display mode corresponding to the value of the background counter and the current stop symbol in each symbol string is specified, and the specified drawing list information is used as the drawing list information of the program ROM 303. It is read from the storage area 303b and output to the VDP 305. After that, the present effect control process is terminated. In VDP305, by receiving the drawing list information output in step S1508, the drawing data setting process and the drawing signal output process are executed, and the standby using the background image of the display mode corresponding to the value of the background counter is used. The image is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

Here, the first background data group, the second background data group, and the third background data group referred to for displaying the background image in the VDP 305 are the character ROM 306 as the regular data group when the power is turned on. Is transferred to the regular area 337 of the RAM 308 on the VDP side, and the state is maintained in a situation where the effect for the game round or the effect for the jackpot is not performed while the power is turned on. Assuming a configuration in which these background data groups are not stored in the regular area 337, it becomes necessary to read image data from the character ROM 306 each time the display mode is switched, and a NAND flash memory is used for the character ROM 306. In such a configuration, there is a concern that the timing at which the display mode is switched is delayed with respect to the operation timing of the effect operating device 60 due to the slow transfer speed. On the other hand, since each background data group is stored in the regular area 337 as described above, the display mode can be switched immediately when the effect operating device 60 is operated.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A main control device 71, a payout control device 78, a voice emission control device 72, and a display control device 121 are provided as a plurality of control means, and the main control device 71 provided as the first control means is provided with a voltage conversion circuit 230. While the electric power is directly supplied, the electric power from the voltage conversion circuit 230 is supplied to the control devices other than the main control device 71 provided as the second control means via the output switching circuit 231. .. The voltage conversion circuit 230 generates electric power for driving each control device as a drive electric power generation circuit. The output switching circuit 231 is a power cutoff circuit capable of cutting off the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the second control means.

The main control device 71 executes a process (processes of steps S402, S405, and S504) for determining whether or not the transition condition to the power saving mode or the release condition of the power saving mode is satisfied, and determines whether or not power saving is necessary. Used as a means. When the transition condition to the power saving mode is satisfied, the main control device 71 outputs a LOW level power supply permission signal from the output port 235 to the output switching circuit 231 to cause another control device from the voltage conversion circuit 230. Cut off the power supply to. When the power saving mode release condition is satisfied, the voltage conversion circuit 230 supplies power to other control devices by outputting the HI level power supply permission signal from the output port 235 to the output switching circuit 231. Cut off.

According to the above configuration, when the pachinko machine 10 is set to the power saving mode, for example, when a player is not playing a game, the main control device 71 supplies power from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to another control device. The state of the output switching circuit 231 is controlled so as to cut off the power consumption of other control devices, and electric devices and the like (movable accessories 200 and various types) to which power is supplied via the other control devices. The power consumption in the lamp portions 58a, 58b) is reduced. Further, when the power saving mode is canceled, for example, when a game by a player is newly started, the output is switched so that the main control device 71 supplies power from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to another control device. The state of the circuit 231 is controlled, whereby the pachinko machine 10 returns to the normal mode (non-power saving mode).

In such a case, the main control device 71, which is defined as the main body of the power supply control among the plurality of control devices, is supplied with power from the voltage conversion circuit 230 without going through the output switching circuit 231. In that state, the main control device 71 Controls the power consumption of other control devices and the like. Therefore, even when the external power supply is supplied (the power switch 135a is turned on), the power consumption of the gaming machine can be reduced. Further, after the power saving mode is entered, the power saving mode can be canceled as appropriate.

Further, the main control device 71, which is the first control means, executes a power-on wait process (step S101) when supplying an external power source to issue a power supply command to the output switching circuit 231. A level power supply permission signal is output to execute power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to another control device. The process for the power supply command executed in the power-on wait process is the same process as the power return process (step S505) executed when returning from the power saving mode.

According to the above configuration, the processing of the main control device 71 is the same when the supply of the external power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is started and when the power supply from the power saving mode is restored (when the power cutoff to the other control devices is released). In each case, the output processing of the HI level power supply permission signal to the output switching circuit 231 is performed. In this case, it is not necessary to individually require a circuit or the like for power cutoff at the time of starting the supply of the external power supply and at the time of returning from the power saving mode, and it is configured to carry out the control for the power supply at each time. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of complications.

Further, a touch detection unit 225 is connected to the main control device 71 as a means for monitoring the game state of the player. Based on the detection result (game state monitoring result) of the touch detection unit 225, the main control device 71 determines that the player is in a non-game state in which the player has not played a game, thereby shifting to the power saving mode. I do.

According to the above configuration, power saving of the pachinko machine 10 can be preferably performed in a non-gaming state in which the player is not playing a game. Since the player is not playing the game during the power saving mode, there is no problem even if the power supply to the control devices other than the main control device 71 that controls the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, which is good. It is possible to reduce power consumption.

Further, the main control device 71 sequentially updates the jackpot random number counter C1 within a predetermined numerical range in the normal mode in which the power is supplied from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the other control devices. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used when performing a lottery for whether or not to generate the open / close execution mode in the lottery random number update process in step S203 of the timer interrupt process. The main control device 71 executes the same process as the lottery random number update process in the counter update process of step S502 even during the power saving mode in which the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 is cut off to other control devices. doing.

Here, the power saving mode in which the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the other control device is cut off is a non-gaming state, and it is not necessary to perform update processing for numerical information such as so-called lottery random numbers. .. However, in the above configuration, numerical information such as lottery random numbers is updated even in the power saving mode. This makes it possible to take measures against fraud in the power saving mode.

Further, whether or not the main control device 71 gives a privilege to the player based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the wake of winning a prize in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34, which is a predetermined condition. Executes the processing of. Specifically, the jackpot lottery process is executed by the special figure special electric control process in step S215, and the jackpot lottery result is displayed by controlling the main display unit 43 provided as the lottery result display means.

The main control device 71 displays the main display unit 43 in a predetermined display mode in the power saving mode in which the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the control devices other than the main control device 71 is cut off. To control. Specifically, the special figure display process of step S501 for controlling the predetermined segment to continue to light in the light emitting mode is executed.

In the power saving mode in which the power supply to the other control devices is cut off, the result of the lottery is not displayed on the main display unit 43. That is, the display on the main display unit 43 is unnecessary.
However, in the above configuration, the display is performed by the main display unit 43 even in the power saving mode. Here, the display operation of the main display unit 43 is controlled by the main control device 71, and the fact that the display of the predetermined light emitting mode is continuously displayed on the main display unit 43 means that the operation of the main control device 71 It means that it is being continued. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player and the like that the power of the gaming machine itself is not turned off and the gaming can be restarted under the implementation of power saving.

In the state where the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the other control device is cut off (power saving mode), the main display unit 43 is in the power saving mode in a mode different from that at the time of displaying the lottery result. The display should be carried out. For example, when the lottery result is displayed, the light emitting member such as an LED is blinked to display, and when the power saving mode is displayed, the light emitting member such as an LED is continuously turned on to display.

By the way, the main display unit 43 is connected to the main control device 71 via a signal line, and the main display unit 43 displays the result of the jackpot lottery according to the control signal from the main control device 71. There is.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a movable accessory 200 as a notification means for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 is in the power saving mode in the power saving mode. The movable accessory 200 shifts from the non-notification state to the notification state as the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the voice emission control device 72 is cut off.

According to the above configuration, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power saving mode (non-gaming state), the player (for example, a game machine newly played in the game hall) is selected by the notification of the movable accessory 200. The player) can grasp that the pachinko machine 10 is in the power saving mode, and can suppress the hindrance to selecting the game machine and the like.

Further, as the main body of the power supply control of the plurality of control means when shifting to the power saving mode, the main control device 71 for determining whether or not to give the privilege to the player is defined. The other control device is a sub control device that executes various controls based on a control command from the main control device 71.

According to the above configuration, of the main control device 71 and the sub control device, the main control device 71 is defined as the main body of the power supply control. Then, in the power saving mode, the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 is continued to the main control device 71, and the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 is cut off to the sub control device. In this case, the main control device 71 can be operated even while power saving is being performed, and a process for suppressing fraud can be appropriately performed.

On the front side of the pachinko machine 10, a symbol display device 41 and lamp units 58a and 58b are provided as operation units that operate in a manner visible to the player, and the operation units include a display control device 121 and a voice. It is controlled by the light emission control device 72. The display control device 121 and the voice emission control device 72 are connected to a power supply unit 113 for power-on as a power supply means for supplying drive power, and the display control device 121, the voice light emission control device 72, and the power supply unit for power-on are connected. An output switching circuit 231 capable of cutting off the power supply from the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the display control device 121 and the voice emission control device 72 is provided between the 113s. In the main control device 71, it is possible to detect that the pachinko machine 10 is in the non-gaming state by executing the processes of steps S402 and S405 in the power saving mode transition process as the gaming state detecting means. When it is detected that the pachinko machine is in a non-gaming state, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the power saving mode. When the mode shifts to the power saving mode, the output switching circuit 231 cuts off the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the display control device 121 and the voice emission control device 72. The movable accessory 200 is saving power to the player by shifting from the non-notification state to the notification state when the power supply to the display control device 121 and the voice emission control device 72 is cut off. Notify that.

According to the above configuration, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the non-gaming state, the power saving mode is set, and in such a mode, the power supply to the display control device 121 and the voice emission control device 72 is cut off, so that the power consumption is consumed. Can be reduced. At this time, the power supply to the display control device 121 and the voice emission control device 72 is cut off in the power saving mode, so that the display is stopped, for example, in the symbol display device 41 as the operating unit, and the same display is performed. Any of the power saving treatments will be performed, such as leaving the lamps as they are, reducing the illuminance of the light emission at the lamp units 58a and 58b as the operating parts, stopping the light emission, and so on. It may not be possible to grasp whether or not a certain pachinko machine 10 is playable, but the notification of the movable accessory 200 causes the player (for example, a player who selects a new game machine to play in the game hall) to play the pachinko machine. It is possible to grasp that 10 is in a power saving state, and it is possible to suppress an obstacle to selecting a gaming machine or the like.

Further, the movable accessory 200 is provided so as to be able to operate by supplying electric power from the power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on. The output switching circuit 231 supplies power via the display control device 121 and the voice emission control device 72 when the power supply from the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the display control device 121 and the voice emission control device 72 is cut off. The movable accessory 200 is also configured to cut off the power supply. The movable accessory 200 shifts from the non-notification state to the notification state as the power supply from the power supply unit 113 for power-on is cut off.

According to the above configuration, when the power supply from the power-on power supply unit 113 to the display control device 121 and the voice emission control device 72 is cut off, the power supply from the power-on power supply unit 113 to the movable accessory 200 is also performed. It is blocked. Then, when the power supply from the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the movable accessory 200 is cut off, the movable accessory 200 is in the notification state. In this case, the use of electric power is not essential for information notification for power saving. Therefore, the configuration is more desirable from the viewpoint of power consumption.

Further, the movable accessory 200 is provided with a movable plate 201 for notification provided with an information display unit 203 as notification information for the player to visually recognize that the power saving mode is in progress, and a power supply unit 113 for power-on. The movable plate 201, which is driven by electric power, is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 at the first position (specifically, the actual appearance position) and the second position is not visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 (specifically). Is provided with a drive unit 205 that moves with and from the game basic position). The movable plate 201 can be moved to the first position as the power supply from the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the drive unit 205 is cut off by the output switching circuit 231.

According to the above configuration, when the power supply from the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the drive unit 205 of the movable accessory 200 is cut off, the movable plate 201 is moved to the first position (a position that can be visually recognized by the player). ). In this case, by shifting from the power supply state to the power cutoff state, that is, by shifting from the normal mode (non-power saving state) to the power saving mode, the movable plate 201 can be moved from the second position, which cannot be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 will move to the first position that can be visually recognized from the front. At this time, since the movable plate 201 that is not visually recognized in the normal mode is visually recognized in the power saving mode, the player can grasp the power saving mode depending on the presence or absence of the movable plate 201. In other words, with such a configuration, the power saving mode can be recognized at a glance, and the recognition level can be raised. Therefore, it is suitable for making each player recognize the notification information for power saving.

Further, the movable plate 201 is configured to be movable to the first position by its own weight and to be moved to the second position by being driven by the drive unit 205.

According to the above configuration, the movable plate 201 can be held in the first position (a position that can be visually recognized by the player) by utilizing the weight of the movable plate 201 in the power saving state. In addition, by using the gravity that is constantly generated in the natural world to move the movable plate 201 to the first position, the movable plate 201 can be reliably moved to the first position even when power is not supplied to the drive unit 205. It becomes possible to move it.

Further, the movable accessory 200 is provided with a movable plate 202 for production that can be moved between a position that can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10 and a position that cannot be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the production according to the progress of the game. The movable plate 202 is operated as.

According to the above configuration, in the movable accessory 200 which is an effect device, the movable plate 202 can be moved between a position where it can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10 and a position where it cannot be seen, and it can be moved during the game. The movement of the board 202 has attracted a great deal of attention from players. Further, the movable accessory 200 can be moved between a position where it can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10 (first position) and a position where it cannot be seen (second position), like the movable plate 202, for notification. Movable plate 201 is provided. In this case, the movable plate 202 and the movable plate 201 operate in substantially the same manner, and the movable plate 201 can be attracted more attention by the player in the power saving mode (non-gaming state).

Further, as the operation unit, a symbol display device 41, which is a display means for variablely displaying a symbol related to the game effect on the display screen G provided as a display area, is provided. The first position is a position in front of the pachinko machine 10 of the display screen G, and the second position is a position behind the center frame 42 provided as an enclosure surrounding the display screen G.

According to the above configuration, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power saving mode, the movable plate 201 moves to a position in front of the pachinko machine 10 on the display screen G (that is, a position overlapping the front of the pachinko machine 10). In this case, the display screen G in which the pattern is variablely displayed during the game on the pachinko machine 10 is a part that tends to be noticed by the player, and the movable plate 201 is present at a position in front of the pachinko machine 10 on the display screen G. As a result, there is an increased possibility that the notification information (information display unit 203 indicating that the power saving mode is set) attached to the movable plate 201 can be seen by the player. Therefore, the player can suitably recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the power saving mode.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the movable accessory 200 as the first notification means, while the second notification means capable of notifying that the power saving mode is in the state where the power is supplied from the power supply unit 113 for power-on. The main display unit 43 is provided as a main display unit 43. When the power supply to the voice emission control device 72 is cut off by the output switching circuit 231, the power supply from the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the movable accessory 200 is cut off, and the power supply unit 113 for power-on Power is supplied to the main display unit 43.

According to the above configuration, in the power saving mode (non-gaming state), in the movable accessory 200 which is the first notification means, the power saving notification is performed in a state where the power supply from the power supply unit 113 at the time of turning on is cut off. In the main display unit 43, which is the second notification means, power saving notification is performed under the state where the power is supplied from the power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on. In this case, by performing the notification using both the movable accessory 200 and the main display unit 43, (1) the power supply by the power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on is cut off by the power cutoff means for power saving. Is it in a state, or is it (2) a state in which the power supply itself of the power supply unit 113 for power-on is stopped (for example, a state in which the power switch 135a is off, a state in which the power supply system is out of order, etc.)? Can be determined.

More specifically, in the state of (1) above, both the movable accessory 200 and the main display unit 43 are in the notification state, whereas in the state of (2) above, the movable accessory 200 is in the notification state. 200 is in the notification state, and the main display unit 43 is in the non-notification state. Therefore, the above (1) and (2) can be discriminated.

Further, the main display unit 43, which is the second notification means, gives the player a privilege based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 when the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34, which is a predetermined condition, is won a prize. It is connected to the main control device 71 that determines whether or not to give. The main display unit 43 is provided as a lottery result display means whose display mode is controlled by the main control device 71 in order to display the lottery result of the privilege grant. When the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the power saving mode, the power supply from the power-on power supply unit 113 to the main control device 71 is continued, and the main display unit 43 is supplied with power from the power-on power supply unit 113. In the state of being in, it notifies that it is in the power saving mode.

Here, the power saving mode is a non-game state, and the result of the lottery is not displayed on the main display unit 43. That is, the display on the main display unit 43 is unnecessary. However, in the above configuration, in the power saving mode, the main display unit 43 displays as one means of power saving notification. Here, the display operation of the main display unit 43 is controlled by the main control device 71, and it is desirable that the power supply to the main control device 71 is continued even when power saving is performed from the viewpoint of fraud prevention and the like. Considering this, it can be said that it is convenient to use the main display unit 43 as the second notification means.

In the state where the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the second control means is cut off (power saving mode), the main display unit 43 is in the power saving mode in a mode different from that at the time of displaying the lottery result. The display should be carried out. For example, when the lottery result is displayed, the light emitting member such as an LED is blinked to display, and when the power saving mode is displayed, the light emitting member such as an LED is continuously turned on to display.

The symbol display device 41 is provided as a symbol display means for variablely displaying a symbol, and the display content thereof is controlled by a display control device 121 as a display control means. A power supply unit 113 for turning on is provided as a power supply means for supplying driving power to the symbol display device 41 and the display control device 121. In the display control device 121, a first image display control means for determining the image data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 while being sequentially updated, and an image data determined by the first image display control means are input. A second image display control means is provided, which stores the image data in the storage unit each time the input is made and outputs the stored image data to the symbol display device 41. Specifically, an image data determination unit 240 is provided as the first image display control means, a storage unit 241a is provided as the storage unit, and an output control unit 241 is provided as the second image display control means.

The power supply unit 113 for power-on separately includes a supply path for supplying power to the image data determination unit 240 as the first image display control means and the output control unit 241 as the second image display control means. ing. When it is detected that the pachinko machine 10 is in a non-gaming state in the processing of steps S402 and S405 in the power saving mode transition processing of the main control device 71, the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the image data determination unit 240. While the power supply in the supply path is cut off, the power supply in the supply path to the output control unit 241 is continuously performed.

According to the above configuration, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the non-gaming state, power is not supplied from the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the display CPU 302 of the image data determination unit 240, so that the period during which the game is not played is used. It is possible to reduce power consumption. Further, in the power saving state in which the power consumption is reduced, the power supply to the VDP 305 and the symbol display device 41 of the output control unit 241 is continued, so that the control RAM 332, which is the storage unit 241a, stores the power even in the power saving state. It becomes possible to continue the display of the displayed image data in the pattern display means. As a result, it is possible to display a pattern in line with the intention even after the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the power saving mode while reducing the power consumption.

In the power supply unit 113 for power-on, as a means for supplying power to the display CPU 302, for example, power is supplied to the display CPU 302 via an output switching circuit 231 as a power cutoff circuit, and the VDP 305 As a means for supplying electric power to the symbol display device 41, for example, the electric power is supplied to the VDP 305 and the symbol display device 41 without going through the output switching circuit 231.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the control device (control device that manages the power supply at the time of power saving) that outputs the power supply permission signal to the output switching circuit is the payout control device 78, unlike the first embodiment. When the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the power saving mode, power is supplied from the power supply unit 113 at the time of power supply to the control devices other than the payout control device 78, that is, the main control device 71, the voice emission control device 72, and the display control device 121. Is blocked. Further, in the present embodiment, the payout control device 78, not the main control device 71, is provided with a function of detecting the non-gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, when the power switch 135a is turned on, the method of supplying power from the power supply unit 113 for power-on to each control device is also different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, when the power switch 135a is changed from the OFF state to the ON state, in the first embodiment, power is supplied to the main control device 71 and then power is supplied to the other control devices. In contrast to the configuration, in the present embodiment, power is supplied to the main control device 71, the voice emission control device 72, the payout control device 78, and the display control device 121 all at once.

The above-mentioned different configurations will be described below. In the following description, the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be basically omitted. FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration for executing the power cutoff process and the power recovery process in the present embodiment.

Similar to the first embodiment, the power-on power supply unit 113 includes a main control device 71, a payout control device 78, a voice emission control device 72, a display control device 121, and a display control device 121 based on external power supplied from a commercial power source. The operating voltage is supplied to the symbol display device 41.

The AC 24V input from the commercial power supply to the power supply unit 113 at the time of power supply via the power supply switch 135a is converted into + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V by the voltage conversion circuit 230. + 5V and + 12V are directly input to the payout control device 78 from the voltage conversion circuit 230. Further, the signal of the handle touch sensor 224 is input to the payout control device 78, unlike the first embodiment.

Each voltage is input from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the main control device 71, the voice emission control device 72, and the display control device 121 via the output switching circuits 231a to 231d. Specifically, + 5V is input to the voice emission control device 72 and the display control device 121 via the output switching circuits 231a and 231b, and + 12V is input to the voice emission control device 72 and the display control device 121 via the output switching circuit 231c. + 24V is input to the main control device 71 via the output switching circuit 231d.

The output switching circuits 231a to 231d are provided with NPN transistors as output switching transistors 400a to 400d, respectively, and the collectors of the output switching transistors 400a to 400c are the output of the voltage conversion circuit 230, the sound emission control device 72, and the display. It is connected to the control device 121, the emitter is grounded, and the base is connected to the output port 401 of the payout control device 78. The collector of the output switching transistor 400d is connected to the output of the voltage conversion circuit 230 and the main controller 71, the emitter is grounded, and the base is connected to the output port 401.

The output switching transistors 400a to 400d are turned on when the HI level power supply permission signal is output from the output port 401 from the payout control device 78, and the main control device 71, the voice emission control device 72, and the voice emission control device 72 are turned on. Each input voltage to the display control device 121 becomes the LOW level, and the output voltage from the voltage conversion circuit 230 is not applied to the main control device 71, the voice emission control device 72, and the display control device 121. On the other hand, when the LOW level power supply permission signal is output from the output port 401 of the payout control device 78, it is turned off and the output voltage from the voltage conversion circuit 230 is the payout control device 78 and the voice emission control device 72. And applied to the display control device 121. A LOW level power supply permission signal is output from the output port 401 of the payout control device 78 in the initial state.

In the present embodiment, the logical level of the power supply permission signal when the pachinko machine 10 is set to the power saving mode is opposite to the configuration of FIG. 18, and when the power saving mode is set (when the power is cut off), the power is paid out. When the HI level power supply permission signal is output from the output port 401 of the control device 78 and the power saving mode is canceled (when power is restored), the LOW level power supply permission is permitted from the output port 401 of the payout control device 78. A signal is output.

As described above, the power supply circuit 112 is provided with a power supply unit 114 for power failure. Therefore, even if the power supply to the main control device 71 is cut off by the power supply permission signal output from the payout control device 78, the backup power is supplied from the power supply unit 114 at the time of power failure, and the RAM in the main control device 71 The stored information etc. will not be deleted unintentionally.

The reset circuit 236 is a circuit that instructs the start of operation of the voice emission control device 72 and the display control device 121, and includes a delay circuit 237 and a reset transistor 238. The reset transistor 238 is composed of an NPN transistor, the base is connected to the output side of the delay circuit 237, the collector is connected to the output side of the output switching circuit 231a, and the emitter is grounded.

The main control device 71 includes a reset circuit 239 as in the first embodiment. In the main control device 71, a LOW level reset signal is output from the reset circuit 239 to the MPU 92 at a timing delayed from the timing at which + 5V is input to the main control board 91 via the power failure monitoring board 96, and the reset is performed. The main control device 71 starts operating with the output of the signal.

The payout control device 78, like the main control device 71, has its own reset circuit 402. A LOW level reset signal is output from the reset circuit 402 to the MPU of the payout control device 78 at a timing delayed from the timing at which + 5 V is input from the voltage conversion circuit 230, and the payout control device is accompanied by the output of the reset signal. 78 starts the operation.

Next, the processing executed by the main control device 71 and the payout control device 78 when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power saving mode will be described.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the main control device 71 of the present embodiment. This timer interrupt process is carried out by replacing it with FIG. 14 described above. In this timer interrupt process, the processes executed in steps S1603 to S1617 are the same as the processes executed in steps S203 to S217, and the processes executed in steps S1619 to S1624 are steps S220 to S220. Since it is the same process as the process executed in step S225, the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the power failure information storage process is executed in step S1601. The power failure information storage process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33.

In the power failure information storage process, first, in step S1701, the process of reading the information of the power failure signal received in the input port of the MPU 92 is executed. In this case, when a power failure signal (LOW level power failure signal) corresponding to the fact that the power is not cut off is received, "0" information is stored in the input port as non-power failure information. When a power failure signal (HI level power failure signal) corresponding to the occurrence of power cutoff is received, the information "1" is stored in the input port as the power failure occurrence information. In step S1701, the process of reading the information of the power failure signal into the register of the MPU 92 is executed.

In the following step S1702, it is determined whether or not the power failure signal read in step S1701 is at the HI level. If the power failure signal is at the LOW level, the power failure flag of the RAM 94 is set to "0" in step S1703, and then the power failure power saving process is terminated.

If the power failure signal is at the HI level in step S1702, the process proceeds to step S1704. In step S1704, the power failure flag of the RAM 94 is set to "1", and in the following step S1705, the special figure display process is executed. In the special figure display process, the main display unit 43 is displayed and controlled so that the plurality of segment light emitting units continue to light in a predetermined light emitting mode.

In the following step S1706, the counter update process is executed. In the counter update process, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory are released by executing the same process as the lottery random number update process executed in step S1603 of the timer interrupt process. The counter C4 is updated.

In the following step S1707, the checksum calculation process is executed. The checksum calculated here is stored in the RAM 94. After that, the power failure information storage process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 32), it is determined in step S1602 whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S1602, the processes after step S1603 are executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, this timer interrupt process ends.

Next, the demo display process executed in step S1618 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. This demo display process is carried out in place of FIG. 15 described above. In the demo display process, steps S1801 to S1808 are the same processes as steps S301 to S308 in FIG. 15, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, after setting the demo display state in step S1807, in addition to the process of setting the demo start command as the output target in step S1808, in step S1809. Set the demo display signal to HI level. The demo display signal is a signal transmitted from the main control device 71 to the payout control device 78, and is a signal for allowing the payout control device 78 to recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo display state. ..
The demo display signal is set to the HI level when the demo display flag is "1", and is set to the LOW level when the demo display flag is "0".

Next, each process executed periodically (for example, 4 msec) by the payout control device 78 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the power saving mode control process, FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the power saving mode transition process, and FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the process during the power saving mode.

As shown in FIG. 35, the power saving mode control process determines in step S1901 whether or not the power saving mode in-progress flag is set in the RAM provided in the payout control device 78. The power saving mode flag is a flag indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is in the power saving mode, is set when the transition condition to the power saving mode is satisfied, and is cleared when the release condition is satisfied. The transition condition and release condition of the power saving mode will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S1901, the power saving mode transition process is executed in step S1902.

In the power saving mode transition process, as shown in FIG. 36, first, whether or not the demo display signal input from the main control device 71 in step S2001 is at the HI level and there is no input from the handle touch sensor 224. To judge.

If a negative determination is made in step S2001, the non-operation counter is cleared to "0" in step S2002. The non-operation counter is provided in the RAM of the payout control device 78, and is a counter that indicates the elapsed time since the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo display state and there is no input from the handle touch sensor 224. The non-operation counter is incremented by 1 for each timer interrupt process when the affirmative judgment is made in step S2001, and is cleared to "0" when the negative judgment is made in step S2001. After executing step S2002, the power saving mode transition process ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, the value of the non-operation counter is added by 1 in step S2003.

After the execution of step S2003, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not the value of the non-operation counter is "7500" (corresponding to 30 sec). If a negative determination is made in step S2004, the power saving mode transition process is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2004, the process proceeds to step S2005, the power saving mode flag is set, and the non-operation counter is cleared in the following step S2006. In the following step S2007, the power cutoff process is executed.

In the power cutoff process, the payout control device 78 sets the power supply permission signal to the power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on to the HI level. The power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on stops the power supply to the control devices other than the payout control device 78 by setting the power supply permission signal to the HI level. After that, the power saving mode transition process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the power saving mode control process (FIG. 35), the power saving mode control process ends after the power saving mode transition process in step S1902 is executed.

If it is determined in step S1901 that the power saving mode flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1903 to execute the power saving mode processing.

In the power saving mode processing, as shown in FIG. 37, first, in step S2101, the repetition counter provided in the RAM of the payout control device 78 is cleared. In the following step S2102, it is determined whether or not 4 msec has elapsed. If 4 msec has not elapsed, the process of step S2102 is executed again. This time is measured by counting the number of processes in step S2102. For example, if the time required from the negative determination in step S2102 to the execution of the process of step S2102 again is 0.1 msec, the count value becomes 40 times, and 4 msec elapses from the process of step S2101. It is determined that it has been done.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, the level of the signal output from the handle touch sensor 224 is confirmed and whether or not the detection signal is output from the handle touch sensor 224 is confirmed in step S2103. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a HI level signal is input to the terminal connected to the handle touch sensor 224.

If a negative determination is made in step S2103, the processes of steps S2101 to S2103 are repeatedly executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, the power recovery process is executed in step S2104.

In the power recovery process, the power supply permission signal output from the output port 401 is set to the LOW level. Upon receiving the LOW level power supply permission signal, the power-on power supply unit 113 starts supplying power to the main control device 71, the voice emission control device 72, and the display control device 121. In the following step S2105, the power saving mode flag is cleared, and the power saving mode processing ends.

Returning to the description of the power saving mode control process (FIG. 35), after the power saving mode processing in step S1903 is executed, the power saving mode control process ends.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has the following characteristic configurations as configurations for power cutoff and restoration.

Unlike the first embodiment, the payout control device 78, which is a sub control device, is directly supplied with electric power from the voltage conversion circuit 230 as the first control means, and determines whether or not to give the player a privilege. The main control device 71 is supplied with electric power from the voltage conversion circuit 230 via the output switching circuit 231 as the second control means. Further, the payout control device 78, which is the first control means, is defined as the main body of the power supply control of the plurality of control means when shifting to the power saving mode.

According to the above configuration, the payout control device 78, which is a sub control device among the main control device 71 and the sub control device, is defined as the main body of the power supply control. It is preferable that any control device (payout control device 78, voice emission control device 72 or display control device 121) among the plurality of sub control devices is defined as the main body (first control means) of the power supply control. Then, in the power saving mode, the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 is continued to the sub control device, and the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 is cut off to the main control device 71. In this case, when the main control device 71 and the sub control device are compared, the former has a larger calculation processing load and therefore a larger power consumption. In this respect, the power consumption can be reduced by continuing the power supply to the sub control device and cutting off the power supply to the main control device 71 under the implementation of power saving.

Further, as an auxiliary power supply means for temporarily supplying auxiliary power to the main control device 71 when the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the main control device 71 is cut off, the power supply unit 113 for power-on Is provided.

According to the above configuration, in the power saving mode, the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 is continued to the sub control device, and the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 is cut off to the main control device 71. Even if it is below, the main control device 71 can be operated, and a process for suppressing fraud can be appropriately performed.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the control regarding the display image of the symbol display device 41 in the state where the pachinko machine 10 has shifted to the power saving mode will be described. In the present embodiment, even if the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the power saving mode, the display control device 121 does not immediately stop the update process of the display image in the symbol display device 41, but displays until a predetermined stop image is displayed. Continue the image update process.
When the predetermined stop image is displayed, the display control device 121 stops the update process.

Specifically, the power saving mode transition process (FIG. 16) executed in step S219 of the timer interrupt process in the main control device 71 and the normal process (FIG. 25) executed in the display control device 121 are the above-mentioned first. It is different from the embodiment. The different configurations will be described below. In the following description, the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

First, the electrical configuration of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the display control of the symbol display device 41 in the present embodiment. The configuration shown in FIG. 38 is substantially the same as the configuration shown in FIG. 18, and a part thereof is modified.

As described above, in the display control device 121, the configuration of the power supply system differs between the image data determination unit 240 (see FIG. 18) including the display CPU 302 and the output control unit 241 (see FIG. 18) including the VDP 305. The display CPU 302 (image data determination unit 240) is supplied with drive power from the voltage conversion circuit 230 via the output switching circuit 231a, while the output switching is performed on the VDP 305 and the output port 336 (output control unit 241). The drive power is directly supplied from the voltage conversion circuit 230 without going through the circuit 231a. Further, the drive power is directly supplied to the symbol display device 41 from the voltage conversion circuit 230 as well as the VDP 305. As a result, even if the main control device 71 sets the power supply permission signal output to the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the LOW level, the power is continuously supplied to the VDP 305, the output port 336, and the symbol display device 41. It will be supplied. In other words, the image data can be output from the VDP 305 to the symbol display device 41 even in the power saving mode.

Further, the display control device 121 is provided with a backup power supply 420 as an auxiliary power supply means. The backup power supply 420 includes a capacitor as a power storage means, and is charged while power is being supplied to the display control device 121 from the power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on. When the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the display CPU 302 (image data determination unit 240) is cut off by the backup power supply 420, auxiliary power is temporarily supplied to the display CPU 302 (image data determination unit 240). It is supposed to be done. That is, since the main control device 71 is in the power saving mode, the display CPU 302 (image data determination unit 240) can be temporarily operated even when the power supply to the display control device 121 is cut off. ing. For example, it is possible to process a command for a power saving mode transmitted from the main control device 71. The time during which power is supplied to the display control device 121 by the backup power supply 420 is set to be longer than the time required to execute the effect for demo display (effect time for demo display).

<Power saving mode transition process of main controller 71>
Next, the power saving mode transition process (step S219 of FIG. 14) of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39. The process of FIG. 39 is replaced with the process of FIG. The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a power saving mode transition command is transmitted to the display control device 121 when the transition condition to the power saving mode is satisfied. The power saving mode transition command is a command for causing the display control device 121 to recognize that the pachinko machine 10 has shifted to the power saving mode.

Here, since steps S2201 to S2207 are the same processes as steps S401 to S407 in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

When it is determined in steps S2201 to 2205 that the condition for shifting to the power saving mode is satisfied, the power saving mode shift command is set as an output target to the voice emission control device 72 in step S2208. By setting the power saving mode transition command as the output target, the power saving mode transition command is transmitted to the display control device 121 via the voice emission control device 72. In the following step S2209, the power cutoff process is executed by setting the power supply permission signal to the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the LOW level.

In step S2208 described above, the wait process is executed in addition to the process of setting the power saving mode transition command as the output target. By the wait process, the period from the execution of step S2208 to the start of execution of step S2209 can be adjusted. In the present embodiment, after the process of step S2208 is executed, the power saving mode transition command set as the output target is received by the display control device 121, and the process executed based on the reception of the power saving mode transition command is completed. Step S2209 is executed after the lapse of time required by the time. As a result, when the power supply permission signal becomes the LOW level, the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the voice emission control device 72 is cut off, and it is possible to prevent the power saving mode transition command from reaching the display control device 121.

<Normal processing executed by display CPU 302>
In the present embodiment, the display control device 121 executes a specific process in the normal process based on the power saving mode transition command received from the main control device 71. The specific process executed in the normal process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 40 to 42. This normal processing is carried out in place of FIG. 25 described above.

As shown in FIG. 40, the normal process in the present embodiment is provided with the power saving display process for executing the display in the power saving mode, and the normal process in the first embodiment (FIG. 25). ) Is different. Here, since steps S2301 to S2303 in FIG. 40 are the same processes as steps S1001 to S1003, description thereof will be omitted. Hereinafter, the demo display process executed in step S2304 and the power saving display process executed in step S2305 will be described in detail.

<Demo display processing>
In the demo display process executed in step S2304, as shown in FIG. 41, it is first determined in step S2401 whether or not a demo start command has been received from the main controller 71.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, the display table for demo display is read from the program ROM 303 in step S2402 and stored in the display table storage area 304b of the work RAM 304, and is provided in the work RAM 304 in the subsequent step S2403. Set the demo display flag. The demo display flag is a flag indicating that the symbol display device 41 is displaying the demo, and is cleared when the game times control process of step S2301 executed in the normal process is started.

In the following step S2404, the demo display counter provided in the work RAM 304 is cleared. The demo display counter is a counter for counting the time elapsed since the start of the demo display, and is incremented by 1 each time the normal process is executed. The effect for demo display is configured to repeatedly execute a series of displays over a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), and the demo display counter has a series of demo display effect times (30 seconds) as one cycle. It is a counter, and it is configured to be cleared every time the production time elapses.

By checking the value of the demo display counter, the display CPU 302 can grasp the time elapsed since the start of a series of demo displays. Here, it is possible to associate the time elapsed since the start of the demo display with the image displayed on the symbol display device 41. Therefore, the display CPU 302 can grasp the content of the image displayed on the symbol display device 41 by checking the value of the demo display counter.

When a negative determination is made in step S2401 or after the execution of step S2404, it is determined in step S2405 whether or not the demo display flag is set. If a negative determination is made in step S2405, the demo display process is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2405, the process proceeds to step S2406, and the value of the demo display counter is incremented by 1.

In the following step S2407, it is determined whether or not it is the setting timing of the drawing list.
Specifically, by referring to the elapsed time of the effect measured by the demo display counter of the work RAM 304 and the display table currently stored in the display table storage area 304b, whether or not the setting timing of the drawing list is set or not. To judge. If a negative determination is made in step S2407, the demo display process ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2407, the process proceeds to step S2408. In step S2408, the information of the current drawing list is specified by collating the table information stored in the display table storage area 304b with the information of the demo display counter, and the information of the specified drawing list is stored in the drawing list information storage area. Read from 303b. Then, the read drawing list information is transmitted to the VDP 305. As a result, the VDP 305 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 23) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 24) already described, and the image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 so that the demo display proceeds. To update. After the execution of step S2408, the demo display process ends.

<Display processing during power saving>
Next, the power saving display process executed in step S2305 of FIG. 40 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42.

First, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the power saving mode transition command transmitted from the main control device 71 is received.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2501, the power saving mode flag provided in the work RAM 304 is set in step S2502. The power saving mode flag is a flag for causing the display CPU 302 to recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the power saving mode.

When a negative determination is made in step S2501 or after the execution of step S2502, it is determined in step S2503 whether or not the power saving mode flag is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S2503, the power saving display process ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, it is determined whether or not the drawing list information currently output to the VDP 305 in step S2504 corresponds to the stop image. The drawing list information has information as to whether or not it corresponds to the stop image. Here, as the stop image, the title logo image displayed at the end of the series of demo displays is set. This title logo image is still displayed for a certain period of time, and consists of still images such as a model name and a manufacturer name. The stop image is not limited to the image displayed at the end of the series of demo displays, and may be an image displayed in the middle of the series of demo displays. In that case, it is advisable to set an image to be displayed at a well-separated timing such as the start or end of a predetermined operation even in the middle of a series of demo displays.

If a negative determination is made in step S2504, the power saving display process ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2504, the power saving mode flag is cleared in step S2505. Then, the infinite loop is continued until the backup power supply 420 provided in the display control device 121 is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has the following characteristic configuration as the configuration for the display of the symbol display device 41 in the power saving mode.

A series of predetermined continuous images as images for demo display can be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and when displaying the series of continuous images, a display which is a first image display control means in which power is not supplied during power saving. The CPU 302 sequentially determines the image data. The determined image data is output to the symbol display device 41 by the VDP 305, which is the second image display control means to which power is supplied during power saving.

The display control device 121 serves as an auxiliary power means for temporarily supplying auxiliary power to the display CPU 302 when the power supply from the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the display CPU 302 is cut off, such as when shifting to the power saving mode. It is equipped with a backup power supply 420. The display CPU 302 executes the processes of steps S2503 to S2505 of the power saving display process (FIG. 42) during the period in which the display CPU 302 is operated by supplying the auxiliary power from the backup power source 420, so that the display CPU 302 can be selected from the images for demo display. The image data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is selectively determined.

According to the above configuration, by providing the backup power supply 420, the display CPU 302 supplies auxiliary power even when the power supply to the display CPU 302 by the power supply unit 113 for power-on is cut off, such as when shifting to the power saving mode. In response to this, it becomes possible to operate temporarily. As a result, even if the power supply to the display CPU 302 by the power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on is cut off, the image data is continuously updated by the display CPU 302 for a while, and eventually the image stored in the control RAM 332 in the VDP 305. Data updates will continue. In this case, unlike the configuration in which the update of the image data is stopped immediately when the power supply to the display CPU 302 by the power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on is cut off, the update stop timing of the image data is set after the power cutoff. Can be adjusted. Therefore, when the gaming machine is in the non-gaming state (power saving mode), it is possible to arbitrarily select an image in the symbol display device 41, that is, to display a desired image.

In addition, as a display image by the symbol display device 41, an image for production that displays the lottery result when a big hit lottery is performed due to the occurrence of a prize in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34, and the above lottery. An image for demo display, which is a standby image that is displayed regardless of the result, is set. The image for demo display is a series of continuous images displayed on the symbol display device 41 during the period when the image for production is not displayed. The display CPU 302 determines as image data for displaying one of the images for demo display on the symbol display device 41 during the period of operation by supplying the auxiliary power from the backup power supply 420.

When the pachinko machine 10 being played by the player shifts to the non-gaming state, the symbol display device 41 switches from the image for directing to the image for demo display, and the image for demo display is displayed. Under such a state, it is conceivable that the non-gaming state is detected by the power saving mode transition process (FIG. 39). In this regard, according to the configuration in which one of the demo display images is displayed on the symbol display device 41 in the non-gaming state as described above, when the display CPU 302 stops updating the image data, it remains as it is. The display image in the non-game state can be determined. Therefore, the processing can be simplified.

In the above configuration, it is not necessary to newly prepare a display image (dedicated image) in the non-gaming state, which is advantageous in preparing image data.

In addition, a title logo image is included in a part of the image for demo display. The display CPU 302 determines the title logo image among the images for demo display as image data for displaying on the symbol display device 41 during the period of operation by supplying the auxiliary power from the backup power supply 420.

According to the above configuration, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the non-gaming state (power saving mode), the title logo image is continuously displayed on the symbol display device 41. In this case, if the still image at the halfway timing of the series of continuous images remains displayed, the player who sees the still image may feel uncomfortable, and in some cases, the gaming machine may be mistakenly recognized as being out of order. There is a risk that it will be done. In this regard, by keeping the title logo image displayed as described above, it is possible to suppress inconveniences such as a player feeling uncomfortable.

The title logo image is, for example, a still image that is stationary for a certain period of time, and includes a model name, a maker name, a feature of the machine, an explanation of the game content, and the like in the image. In addition, a message or an image urging the player to perform the game, such as "Good luck" or "The big hit is coming soon", may be included.

Further, after the display CPU 302 selectively determines the image data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 from the series of continuous images during the period in which the display CPU 302 is operated by supplying the auxiliary power from the backup power supply 420, , Do not update the image data.

According to the above configuration, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the non-gaming state (power saving mode), after the image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is determined, the image data update process becomes unnecessary. This makes it possible to eliminate extra power consumption.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, drive power is supplied from the power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on to the main control device 71 that executes the jackpot lottery while the external power supply is being supplied. The power-on power supply unit 113 includes a voltage conversion circuit 230 as a drive power generation circuit for generating each drive power of the symbol display device 41, the display control device 121, and the main control device 71. The power supply path between the voltage conversion circuit 230 and the display CPU 302 of the display control device 121 is provided with an output switching circuit 231 as a power cutoff circuit that cuts off the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the display CPU 302. .. Power is supplied to the VDP 305 of the display control device 121 from the voltage conversion circuit 230 without going through the output switching circuit 231. The main control device 71 cuts off the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the display CPU 302 when it is detected that the pachinko machine 10 is in a non-gaming state while the external power supply is being supplied.

According to the above configuration, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the non-gaming state, the main control device 71 controls the state of the output switching circuit 231 so as to cut off the power supply from the voltage conversion circuit 230 to the display CPU 302. As a result, the power consumption of the display control device 121 can be reduced. Further, the power supply management of the display CPU 302 and VDP 305 of the display control device 121 in the non-gaming state (power saving mode) can be appropriately performed.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the drive power continues to be supplied to the drive units 205 and 206 while the movable plates 201 and 202 of the movable accessory 200 are held at positions hidden behind the center frame 42. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the movable accessory can be held at the above position even if the drive power is not supplied to the drive unit. It is different from the form.

The above-mentioned different configurations will be described below. In the following description, the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

First, the configuration of the movable accessory according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44. FIG. 43 (a) is a front view of the variable display unit 36, and FIG. 43 (b) is a side view of the movable accessory as viewed from the right side. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the driving state of each driving unit and the position of each movable plate.

As shown in FIG. 43A, the variable display unit 36 is provided with a movable accessory 450. Like the movable accessory 200 in the first embodiment, the movable accessory 450 has movable plates 201 and 202 and drive units 205 and 206 connected to these movable plates 201 and 202. Further, the movable accessory 450 includes a movable plate stopper 451 for holding the movable plates 201 and 202 at a position hidden behind the center frame 42, and a drive unit 452 for driving the movable plate stopper 451. It has. The drive unit 452 is controlled by the voice emission control device 72 like the drive units 205 and 206 for the movable plates 201 and 202.

Like the shaft portions 201a and 202a, the movable plate stopper 451 is formed as a shaft extending in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, and is located above the front opening 42a of the center frame 42 and on the back side of the front plate 42b. It is provided at a position on the rotation trajectory of the movable plates 201 and 202.

As shown in FIG. 43B, the movable plate stopper 451 is connected to the drive unit 452 and can be displaced in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, the non-contact position (the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 43B) where the movable plate stopper 451 and the movable plate 201, 202 do not hit even if the movable plates 201 and 202 rotate, and the movable plate. When the 201 and 202 rotate, the movable plate stopper 451 and the movable plate 201 and 202 can be displaced at the contact position (the position indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 43B).

As shown in FIG. 44 (a), during the game of the pachinko machine 10, the movable plates 201 and 202 of the movable accessory 450 are both held behind the center frame 42 as the basic game position, and the pachinko machine 10 It is invisible from the front. The movable plate stopper 451 is arranged at the contact position by the drive unit 452, and can support the movable plates 201 and 202 from below.

When the movable plate stopper 451 supports the movable plates 201 and 202 from below, the rotational operation of the movable plates 201 and 202 is restricted, so that the movable plates 201 and 202 are not driven by the drive units 205 and 206. However, it does not appear at a position in front of the display screen G. This makes it possible to reduce the power consumed by the drive units 205 and 206 in order to hold the stop positions of the movable plates 201 and 202.

Then, as the predetermined game effect is performed during the game of the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), the movable plate 202 for the game effect appears at a position in front of the display screen G. .. In this case, by first energizing the drive units 205 and 206, both movable plates 201 and 202 are held at the current position (position behind the center frame 42) by the motor driving force, and in that state, the movable plate stopper 451 is not removed. By displacing to the contact position, the rotation restriction of both movable plates 201 and 202 is released. After that, the movable plate 202 can be made to appear in front of the display screen G by the drive control according to the content of the predetermined game effect. During the execution of the predetermined game effect, the movable plate 201 for power saving notification is held by the drive unit 205 at the position behind the center frame 42 so as not to appear in front of the display screen G. Is controlled by. When the above-mentioned predetermined game effect is completed, a notification stop command for instructing the control of arranging the movable plates 201 and 202 at the game basic position is transmitted from the main control device 71 to the voice emission control device 72. The movable plates 201 and 202 are in the state shown in FIG. 44 (a).

On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or in the power saving mode, both the drive units 205 and 206 are in the non-drive state, and the movable plate stopper 451 is arranged in the non-contact position by the drive unit 452, so that it is movable. Both the boards 201 and 202 appear in front of the display screen G due to their own weight. In this case, the information display unit 203 of the movable plate 201 arranged in front of the movable plate 202 can be visually recognized by the player.

Next, a configuration for driving the movable accessory 450 will be described with reference to FIG. 45.
FIG. 45 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration related to driving the movable accessory 450.

Voltages of + 5V and + 12V are supplied to the voice emission control device 72 from the output switching circuits 231a to 231c of the power supply unit 113 for power supply. The voice emission control device 72 supplies a voltage of + 12 V to the drive units 205 and 206 and the drive unit 452 of the movable accessory 450 as drive power. The voice emission control device 72 outputs a drive signal to the drive units 205 and 206 and the drive unit 452 based on receiving a command sent from the main control device 71. As described above, since the drive power is supplied from the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the drive units 205, 206 and the drive unit 452 via the voice emission control device 72, either when the external power supply is off or in the power saving mode. In this case as well, the drive power to the drive units 205 and 206 and the drive unit 452 is cut off.

Next, the power saving mode transition process (step S219 in FIG. 14) executed by the timer interrupt process of the MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This power saving mode transition process is executed instead of the power saving mode transition process (FIG. 16) described in the first embodiment. This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that when the mode shifts to the power saving mode, the drive processing of the drive units 205 and 206 and the drive unit 452 is executed and then the power cutoff process is executed.

Here, since steps S2601 to S2607 are the same processes as steps S401 to S407 in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

If it is determined in steps S2601 to 2605 that the conditions for shifting to the power saving mode are satisfied, the power saving notification command is set as the output target in step S2608. The power saving notification command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 72. Upon receiving the power saving notification command, the voice emission control device 72 outputs a drive signal to the drive units 205, 206 and the drive unit 452 so that the movable plate 201 for power saving notification is arranged in front of the display screen G.

In step S2608, the wait process is executed in addition to the process of setting the power saving notification command as the output target. In the wait process, after the power saving notification command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 72 in step S2608, the drive control corresponding to the power saving notification command is performed by the voice emission control device 72, and the movable accessory 450 is used for the power saving mode. Waits without proceeding to the next process until the time until the state of is elapsed.

In the following step S2609, the power cutoff process is executed by setting the power supply permission signal to the power supply unit 113 for power-on to the LOW level.

Next, the movable accessory drive process executed by the voice emission control device 72 to drive and control the movable accessory 450 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 47.

In the movable accessory drive process, first, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not a notification stop command for arranging the movable plates 201 and 202 at the game basic position has been received from the main control device 71. The notification stop command is a power-on setting process executed in the main process (FIG. 13) in the main control device 71, a power recovery process executed in the power saving process (FIG. 17), and a movable plate 202 for game production. After the predetermined game effect to be used is completed, it is transmitted from the main control device 71 to the voice emission control device 72.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2701, the movable plate stopper 451 is arranged at the non-contact position by driving the drive unit 452 in step S2702. By driving the drive units 205 and 206 in the following step S2703, the movable plates 201 and 202 are arranged from the front of the display screen G to the back position of the center frame 42. By driving the drive unit 452 in the following step S, the movable plate stopper 451 is arranged at the contact position. In the following step S2705, the drive units 205 and 206 are brought into the non-drive state, and the present movable accessory drive process is completed.
As a result, the movable accessory 450 is in the state shown in FIG. 44 (a).

If a negative determination is made in step S2701, it is determined in step S2706 whether or not an effect system command corresponding to the effect using the effect movable member has been received from the main control device 71. The effect system command is transmitted from the main control device 71 to the voice emission control device 72 based on the lottery result for the game round accompanying the acquisition of the hold information.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2706, the movable plates 201 and 202 are held behind the center frame 42 by driving the drive units 205 and 206 in step S2707. In the following step S2708, the movable plate stopper 451 is arranged at the non-contact position as in step S2702.

Here, the drive units 205 and 206 are predetermined by holding the movable plates 201 and 202 at positions that do not appear in front of the display screen G in a situation where the movable plate stoppers 451 are in the non-contact position. It is in a state of preparation for game production. The voice emission control device 72 drives and controls the drive unit 206 according to the content of the predetermined game effect, so that the movable plate 202 appears in front of the display screen G or behind the center frame 42 at a predetermined timing. It is possible to place it in a position. As a result, the movable accessory 450 can be brought into the state shown in FIG. 44 (b). During the execution of the predetermined game effect, the drive unit 205 is in the drive state and keeps holding the movable plate 201 at a position where it does not appear in front of the display screen G. After the execution of step S2708, the present movable accessory drive process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S2706, it is determined in step S2709 whether or not the power saving notification command has been received from the main control device 71. The power saving notification command is transmitted from the main control device 71 to the voice emission control device 72 when shifting to the power saving mode in the power saving mode transition process (FIG. 46).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2709, the movable plate stopper 451 is arranged at the non-contact position in step S2710 as in steps S2702 and S2708. In the following step S2711, as in step S2705, the drive units 205 and 206 are brought into the non-drive state, and the present movable accessory drive process is terminated. As a result, the movable accessory 450 is in the state shown in FIG. 44 (c).

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has the following characteristic configuration as a configuration for holding the movable plate 201 provided on the movable accessory 450 in the notified state or the non-notified state.

In the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the movable plate stopper as a holding means for holding the movable plate 201 in the second position when the movable plate 201 comes into contact with the drive unit 205 in the non-driving state. 451 is provided. When the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal mode, the movable plate stopper 451 holds the movable plate 201 in a second position that cannot be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

According to the above configuration, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the power saving mode, that is, when it is not in the non-gaming state, the movable plate 201 is seconded even if the driving unit 205 of the movable accessory 450 is not supplied with power. It can be held in a position (a position that cannot be seen from the front of the gaming machine). As a result, the power consumption can be further reduced.

<Other embodiments>
The content is not limited to the description of each of the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied independently to the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments, or may be applied to the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments in a predetermined combination.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the symbol display device 41 that displays the effect requires power to hold the screen display, not the liquid crystal display device that requires power to hold the screen display (image display state). It may be configured to display on electronic paper. Electronic paper is a display medium that does not require power to hold the screen display and can rewrite the screen with low power.

According to this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 in the power saving mode, the screen display can be continued even if the power supply to the symbol display device 41 is cut off. Further, since it is not necessary to supply power to the symbol display device 41, power is supplied to the output control unit (VDP305 and output port 336) that outputs image data corresponding to the display contents of the symbol display device 41 in the power saving mode. Can be blocked. As a result, it becomes possible to further reduce the electric power in the pachinko machine 10 in the power saving mode.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, as the symbol display device 41 for displaying the effect, the display is performed on a semi-transmissive liquid crystal display that makes it possible to visually recognize the displayed contents using a backlight and external light. It may be configured. Semi-transmissive liquid crystal is a method that combines the transmissive type and the reflective type by sandwiching a material such as a magic mirror behind the liquid crystal panel, and by using the backlight in dark places and the outside light in bright places. , A liquid crystal display device that takes advantage of both. By using the semi-transmissive liquid crystal, the display of the symbol display device 41 can be recognized by utilizing the reflection of external light, and the symbol display device 41 is displayed even if the backlight of the liquid crystal display device is turned off in the power saving mode. Can be recognized. As a result, it is possible to further reduce the electric power in the pachinko machine 10 in the power saving mode.

(3) In the third embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power saving mode, the display CPU 302 continues to update and transmit the image data by supplying power from the backup power supply 420 to the display CPU 302. The image data that is sequentially updated and transmitted is stored in the control RAM 332 of the VDP 305 as image data for power saving display, but this has been changed to update the image data on the display CPU 302 and to update the image data in the power saving mode. The image data for display at the time of power saving may be provided from other than the display CPU 302 without transmission. The following configurations can be considered as the configuration.

When the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the power saving mode and the transmission of the drawing list from the display CPU 302 to the VDP 305 is stopped, the VDP 305 switches the pachinko machine 10 to the power saving mode based on the detection of the transmission stop. Is detected. Further, the control ROM 331 of the VDP 305 stores image data (image data for displaying during power saving) corresponding to a predetermined image for causing the player to recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the power saving mode. When the VDP305 detects the transition to the power saving mode, the VDP 305 transmits data corresponding to the predetermined image to the symbol display device 41 based on the predetermined image data stored in the control ROM 331. In this case, the symbol display device 41 displays the predetermined image on the display screen G by receiving the data corresponding to the predetermined image.

With the above configuration, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power saving mode, that is, when the power supply to the display CPU 302 by the voltage conversion circuit 230 is cut off, in the VDP 305, the predetermined image data stored in the control ROM 331 is displayed. Based on this, a predetermined image is displayed on the symbol display device 41. As a result, even after the power supply to the display CPU 302 by the voltage conversion circuit 230 is cut off, the symbol display device 41 can notify that the power saving mode is in progress. In this case, in the power saving mode, all the power supply to the display CPU 302 including the supply of the backup power supply 420 may be stopped, so that the backup power supply 420 becomes unnecessary and further reduction of power consumption is realized. can.

(4) In the first embodiment, the movable accessory 200 is configured to move the movable plate 201 from a second position that cannot be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10 to a first position that can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10 due to its own weight. .. The present invention is not limited to this, and the movable accessory 200 may be configured to constantly urge the movable plate 201 to a predetermined appearance position (position in front of the screen of the symbol display device 41) by an urging means such as a spring. That is, an urging means such as a spring is provided on the movable accessory 200, and the urging force constantly urges the movable plate 201 in a direction to move the movable plate 201 to a predetermined appearance position (first position), and the drive unit 205. By the driving force, the movable plate 201 is kept at the game basic position (second position), which is the position behind the center frame 42, against the urging force of the urging means. In this case, in the normal mode of the pachinko machine 10, the movable plate 201 is held at a position invisible from the front of the pachinko machine. Then, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power saving mode and the drive unit 205 is de-energized, the movable plate 201 is moved to a position that can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine by the urging force of the urging means. As a result, power saving notification is performed by the movable plate 201 in the power saving mode.

(5) In the third embodiment, in order to display the title logo of the demo display image on the symbol display device 41 during the period in which the display CPU 302 is operated by supplying the auxiliary power from the backup power supply 420. Although the configuration is determined as the image data of, it does not have to be limited to the title logo.

For example, as an image for demo display, a low power consumption image in which the instantaneous power consumption in the display state on the symbol display device 41 is smaller than that of other images is included, and the low power consumption image is displayed on the symbol display device 41. A configuration that uses data is conceivable. When the image for demo display includes an image using a background color with low power consumption (for example, white) and an image using a background color with higher power consumption (for example, black), the former It is advisable to define the image as a low power consumption image. Further, when images including images having different power consumption due to the difference in brightness are included, one of the images may be defined as a low power consumption image.

According to the above configuration, when the gaming machine is in the non-gaming state (power saving mode), the low power consumption image is continuously displayed on the symbol display device 41. In this case, it is possible to reduce the power consumption of the symbol display device 41.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, as a means for detecting the non-gaming state, for example, the detection result of a motion sensor that detects the presence or absence of a player in front of the pachinko machine 10 may be used. For example, a sensor for detecting infrared rays may be provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 10, or a sensor for detecting weight using a piezoelectric element or the like may be provided on a chair for each gaming machine.

(7) The main control device 71 and the sub control device (payout control device 78, display control device 121, and voice emission control device 72) shown in the second embodiment are provided, and one of the sub control devices is the other. In the configuration for performing power management of the control device, a sub-control device other than the payout control device 78, that is, the display control device 121 or the voice emission control device 72 may be configured to perform power management for the other control devices. In this case, the handle touch sensor 224 is connected to the sub-control device that performs power management, and the sub-control device that performs the power management determines whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the gaming state or the non-gaming state. The configuration is to be made.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, a configuration other than the movable accessory 200 may be used as a notification means for notifying the player that the player is in a power saving state. That is, in the movable accessory 200 as the notification means, the movable plate 201 as the notification movable portion cannot be visually recognized from the first position (front position of the display screen G) that can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine and from the front of the gaming machine. The movable plate 201 is arranged at the first position in the power saving mode, but the configuration is changed so that the movable plate 201 is moved at the second position (the position behind the center frame 42). For example, an information display board to which notification information is attached is arranged at a position where it can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine in both power saving and non-power saving modes (for example, the front position of the display screen G), and the state of the arrangement. As it is, it is preferable to shift the information display board to the information display state in the power saving mode and to the information non-display state in the non-power saving mode (normal mode). In this case, as a means for switching the information display board between the information display state and the information non-display state, a configuration in which the front surface to which the notification information is given and the back surface to which the notification information is not given are inverted, or a light emitting means (lamp). Etc.) can be turned on / off to switch between the information display state and the information non-display state.

(9) It is also possible to use a screen device (roll screen device or the like) having a case and a screen that can be taken in and out of the case as the notification means. In this case, a screen device is provided on the front side of the gaming machine, and a message or the like indicating that power is being saved is written on the screen. For example, the screen may be taken in and out in front of the front glass of the pachinko machine. Then, in the normal mode in which power saving is not performed, the screen is stored in the case, and the screen is pulled out from the case when the power saving mode is changed. In this case, the screen device shall move the screen in and out according to the power supply, and the screen is housed (wound) in the case by driving the drive unit accompanying the power supply, and the screen is self-weighted by cutting off the power supply. It is good to pull it out.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the movable accessory 200 is not provided with both the movable plate 202 for game production and the movable plate 201 for power saving notification, but the movable plate 202 for game production and power saving notification. The movable plate 201 may be provided separately. In this case, it is preferable that the movable plate 201 for power saving notification appears at a position different from the position where the movable plate 202 for game production appears.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power saving mode, the main control device 71 is configured to display a predetermined display mode on the main display unit 43, but is peculiar to other gaming machines. The pachinko machine 10 may be configured to notify that the pachinko machine 10 is playable by using the configuration of.

As the above configuration, for example, a configuration using the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 and the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 can be considered. In the power saving mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened and closed, and the pachinko machine 10 is configured to perform a simulated effect for the power saving mode as if it is in the high frequency support mode. The operation is performed, and a simulated effect for the power saving mode is performed as if the open / close execution mode is in progress. As a result, the player who has seen the above-mentioned simulated effect is urged to start the game, and the player can easily select the pachinko machine 10.

(12) The ball lending device Y (see FIG. 11) may be included as an electric device whose power is cut off when power is saved. That is, when the main control device 71 performs the power cutoff process (step S408 in FIG. 16), the power supply to the ball lending device Y is stopped, and the power recovery process (step S505 in FIG. 17) is performed to perform the ball. The power supply to the rental device Y is restarted.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. A display unit that makes a part of the patterns visible, a starting operation means that starts rotation of the orbiting body when operated, and a drive that is provided for each orbiting body and rotates each orbiting body. The means, the stop operation means for stopping the rotation of each orbiting body when operated, the lottery means for drawing a winning combination when the start operation means is operated, and the start operation means are operated. In this case, the drive control means for driving and controlling each drive means to start the rotation of each circuit body and stop the rotation of each circuit body when the stop operation means is operated, and the lottery. It may be applied to a game machine such as a slot machine, which is provided with an effect display means for displaying the effect content based on the lottery result of the means, and displays the lottery result of the lottery means according to the stop mode of each orbiting body.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. A plurality of control means (main control device 71, voice emission control device 72, payout control device 78, and display control device 121) for controlling various operations of the gaming machine, and
A power supply means (power supply unit 113 for power-on) that supplies the driving power required by each of the control means to the plurality of control means while the game machine is supplied with an external power source is provided.
The plurality of control means include a first control means (main control device 71) and a second control means (voice emission control device 72, etc.).
The power supply means
A drive power generation circuit (voltage conversion circuit 230) that generates the drive power, and
A power cutoff circuit (output switching circuit 231) provided in the power supply path between the drive power generation circuit and the second control means to cut off the power supply from the drive power generation circuit to the second control means. The first control means is supplied with power from the drive power generation circuit without going through the power cutoff circuit.
Any of the plurality of control means has a power saving necessity determining means (for example, a function of executing steps S402, S405, S504 in the main control device 71) for determining the necessity of power saving in the gaming machine.
The first control means is the second control from the drive power generation circuit when it is determined by the power saving necessity determination means that power saving is to be performed in a state where the external power supply is supplied to the game machine. The power supply to the means is cut off, and when the determination that power saving is to be performed by the power saving necessity determination means is canceled, the power is supplied from the drive power generation circuit to the second control means. A gaming machine characterized by controlling the state of a power cutoff circuit.

According to the feature A1, the first control means cuts off the power supply from the drive power generation circuit to the second control means when the game machine is in the power saving state, for example, when the game is not performed by the player. The state of the power cutoff circuit is controlled so as to reduce the power consumption of the second control means and the power consumption of the electric device or the like to which the power is supplied via the second control means. .. Further, when the power saving state is released, for example, when a game by a player is newly started, the power is cut off so that the first control means supplies power from the drive power generation circuit to the second control means. It controls the state of the circuit, which returns the gaming machine to the normal state (non-power saving state).

In such a case, the first control means defined as the main body of the power supply control among the plurality of control means is supplied with power from the drive power generation circuit without going through the power cutoff circuit, and in that state, the first control means The power consumption of other control means (second control means) and the like is controlled. Therefore, even when an external power source is supplied to the gaming machine (a state in which the power switch is turned on), the power consumption of the gaming machine can be reduced. Further, after the power saving state is reached, the power saving can be released as appropriate.

Feature A2. The first control means
At the start of supply of the external power supply, the power supply command signal (power supply permission signal) is output to the power cutoff circuit to supply power from the drive power generation circuit to the second control means. Power supply start control means (function to execute step S101 in the main control device 71) and
When the power supply to the second control means is cut off by the power cutoff circuit and the power cutoff is released, the power supply command signal is output to the power cutoff circuit. The feature A1 is characterized in that it includes a power supply return control means (a function of executing step S505 in the main control device 71) for supplying electric power from the drive power generation circuit to the second control means. Game machine.

According to the feature A2, the processing of the first control means is the same when the supply of the external power supply to the gaming machine is started and when the power supply is restored from the power saving state (when the power cutoff to the second control means is released). , In each case, the output processing of the power supply command signal to the power cutoff circuit is performed. In this case, it is not necessary to individually require a circuit or the like for power cutoff at the time of starting the supply of the external power supply and at the time of returning from the power saving state, and it is configured to carry out the control for the power supply at each time. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of complications.

Feature A3. Equipped with a monitoring means (touch detection unit 225) for monitoring the game state of the player
The power saving necessity determination means is characterized in that it determines that power saving is performed by determining that the player is in a non-gaming state in which no game is played, based on the monitoring result by the monitoring means. Features The gaming machine according to A1 or A2.

According to the feature A3, the power saving of the gaming machine can be suitably performed as described above in the non-gaming state in which the player is not playing the game. Since the player is not playing the game during the power saving state, there is no problem even if the power supply of the second control means for controlling the operation of the gaming machine is cut off, and the power consumption is good. It becomes possible to reduce the amount of electricity.

Feature A4. When either the first control means or the second control means sequentially updates the numerical information (big hit random number counter C1 or the like) within a predetermined numerical range and the predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied. , The main control means (main control device 71) for acquiring the numerical information and performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the acquired numerical information.
The main control means includes means (function of executing step S502) for executing the update processing of the numerical information when the power supply from the drive power generation circuit to the second control means is cut off. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3.

According to the feature A4, the following effects are exhibited. The power saving state in which the power supply to the second control means is cut off is, for example, a non-gaming state, and it is not necessary to perform update processing for numerical information such as so-called random numbers. However, in the above configuration, numerical information such as random numbers is updated even in the power saving state. This makes it possible to take countermeasures against fraud in a power-saving state.

Feature A5. When either the first control means or the second control means sequentially updates the numerical information (big hit random number counter C1 or the like) within a predetermined numerical range and the predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied. , The main control means (main control device 71) for acquiring the numerical information and performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the acquired numerical information.
A lottery result display means (main display unit 43) whose display mode is controlled by the main control means to display the lottery result is provided.
The main control means controls the lottery result display means to display in a predetermined display mode when the power supply from the drive power generation circuit to the second control means is cut off. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, which comprises means for performing (a function of executing step S501).

According to the feature A5, the following effects are exhibited. The power saving state in which the power supply to the second control means is cut off is, for example, a non-gaming state, and the lottery result is not displayed in the lottery result display means. That is, it is not necessary to display the lottery result by the lottery result display means. However, in the above configuration, the lottery result display means is used even in the power saving state. Here, the display operation of the lottery result display means is controlled by the main control means, and the operation of the main control means is continued when the lottery result display means displays in a predetermined display mode. It means that it is. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player and the like that the power of the gaming machine itself is not turned off and the gaming can be restarted under the implementation of power saving.

In the state where the power supply from the drive power generation circuit to the second control means is cut off (power saving state), the lottery result display means is in the power saving state in a manner different from that at the time of displaying the lottery result. The display should be carried out. For example, when the lottery result is displayed, the light emitting member such as an LED is blinked to display, and when the power saving state is displayed, the light emitting member such as an LED is continuously turned on to display.

Incidentally, the lottery result display means (main display unit 43) is connected to the main control means (main control device 71) via a signal line, and the lottery result display means responds to the control signal input from the main control means. The result of the privilege grant lottery is displayed.

Feature A6. A notification means (movable accessory 200) for notifying the player that the power is being saved is provided.
A1 to A5, wherein the notification means shifts from a non-notification state to a notification state when the power supply from the drive power generation circuit to the second control means is cut off. The gaming machine according to any one.

According to the feature A6, when the gaming machine is in the power saving state (non-gaming state), the player (for example, the player who selects a new gaming machine to play in the gaming hall) is notified by the notification means. Can grasp that the gaming machine is in a power saving state, and can suppress the hindrance to selecting the gaming machine.

Feature A7. As the plurality of control means, various types are based on a main control means (main control device 71) that determines whether or not to give a privilege to the player according to the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and a control command from the main control means. The sub-control means (voice emission control device 72, payout control device 78, and display control device 121) for carrying out the control of the above is provided.
While using the main control means as the first control means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, wherein the sub-control means is used as the second control means.

According to the feature A7, of the main control means and the sub control means, the main control means is defined as the main body of the power supply control. Then, in the power saving state, the power supply from the drive power generation circuit is continued to the main control means, and the power supply from the drive power generation circuit is cut off to the sub control means. In this case, the main control means can be operated even while power saving is being performed, and a process for equalizing profits for the player and a process for suppressing fraud can be appropriately executed.

Feature A8. As the plurality of control means, various types are based on a main control means (main control device 71) that determines whether or not to give a privilege to the player according to the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and a control command from the main control means. The sub-control means (voice emission control device 72, payout control device 78, and display control device 121) for carrying out the control of the above is provided.
While the sub control means (payout control device 78) is used as the first control means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, characterized in that the main control means is used as the second control means.

According to the feature A8, the sub control means among the main control means and the sub control means is defined as the main body of the power supply control. When a plurality of sub control means are provided, one of them may be defined as the main body of power supply control (first control means). Then, in the power saving state, the power supply from the drive power generation circuit is continued to the sub control means, and the power supply from the drive power generation circuit is cut off to the main control means. In this case, when the main control means and the sub control means are compared, the former has a larger calculation processing load and therefore a larger power consumption. In this respect, the power consumption can be reduced by continuing the power supply to the sub control means and cutting off the power supply to the main control means under the implementation of power saving.

Feature A9. It is provided with an auxiliary power supply means (power supply unit 114 for power failure) that temporarily supplies auxiliary power to the main control means when the power supply from the drive power generation circuit to the main control means is cut off. The gaming machine according to feature A8.

According to the feature A9, in the power saving state, the power supply from the drive power generation circuit is continued to the sub control means, and the power supply from the drive power generation circuit is cut off to the main control means. Even if there is, the main control means can be operated, and a process for suppressing fraud can be appropriately performed.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. An operating unit (design display device 41, lamp units 58a, 58b) provided on the front side of the gaming machine and operating in a manner visible to the player, and
Control means (display control device 121, voice emission control device 72) for controlling the operation unit, and
A power supply means (power supply unit 113 for power-on) that supplies drive power to the control means, and
A game state detection means (a function of executing steps S402 and S405 in the main control device 71) for detecting a non-game state in which the player has not played a game, and
When the gaming state detecting means detects that the gaming machine is in a non-gaming state, the power cutting means (main control device) that cuts off the power supply from the power supply means to the control means in order to put the gaming machine into a predetermined power saving state. The function to be executed in step S408 in 71, and the output switching circuit 231c) and
A notification means (movable accessory 200) for notifying the player of the power saving state is provided.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the notification means shifts from a non-notification state to a notification state when the power supply to the control means is cut off by the power cutoff means.

According to the feature B1, when the gaming machine is in the non-gaming state, the gaming machine is in a predetermined power saving state, and in such a state, the power supply to the control means is cut off to reduce the power consumption. Can be planned. At this time, the power supply to the control means is cut off under the power saving state, so that the display is stopped, for example, in the display device (symbol display device 41) as the operating unit, and the same display remains. At first glance, any power saving treatment will be performed, such as reducing the illuminance of light emission or stopping the light emission at the lamp units (lamp units 58a, 58b) as operating units. It may not be possible to know whether or not a certain gaming machine is playable, but the notification of the notification means causes the player (for example, a player who selects a new gaming machine to play in the gaming hall) to save power. It is possible to grasp that the situation is the same, and it is possible to suppress the hindrance to the selection of a gaming machine.

Feature B2. The notification means can be operated by supplying electric power from the power supply means.
The power cutoff means also cuts off the power supply of the notification means when the power supply from the power supply means to the control means is cut off.
The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the notification means shifts from a non-notification state to a notification state when the power supply to the notification means is cut off.

According to the feature B2, when the power supply from the power supply means to the control means is cut off, the power supply from the power supply means to the notification means is also cut off. Then, when the power supply from the power supply means to the notification means is cut off, the notification means is put into the notification state. In this case, the use of electric power is not essential for information notification for power saving. Therefore, the configuration is more desirable from the viewpoint of power consumption.

Feature B3. The notification means is
A movable portion for notification (movable plate 201) to which notification information for making the player visually recognize that the power saving state is given is provided.
A drive unit (drive) that is driven by power supply from the power supply means and moves the notification movable unit between a first position that is visible from the front of the gaming machine and a second position that is invisible from the front of the gaming machine. Part 205) and
The moving unit for notification is characterized in that it can be moved to the first position when the power supply from the power supply means to the drive unit is cut off by the power cutoff means. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature B3, when the power supply from the power supply means to the drive unit of the notification means is cut off, the moving unit for notification moves to the first position (the position where the player can see). In this case, by shifting from the power supply state to the power cutoff state, that is, by shifting from the non-power saving state to the power saving state, the moving part for notification can be seen from the front of the gaming machine from the second position, which cannot be seen from the front of the gaming machine. It will move to the first visible position. At this time, since the moving part for notification that is not visually recognized in the non-power saving state is visually recognized in the power saving state, the player can grasp the power saving state depending on the presence or absence of the movable part for notification. In other words, with such a configuration, the power saving state can be recognized at a glance, and the recognition level can be raised. Therefore, it is suitable for making each player recognize the notification information for power saving.

Feature B4. The gaming machine according to feature B3, wherein the moving portion for notification is movable to the first position by its own weight and is moved to the second position by being driven by the driving portion.

According to the feature B4, the notification movable portion can be held in the first position (a position that can be visually recognized by the player) by utilizing the weight of the notification movable portion in the power saving state. In addition, by using the gravity that is constantly generated in the natural world to move the moving part for notification to the first position, it is possible to reliably move to the first position even when power is not supplied to the driving part. It becomes possible to move.

Feature B5. The moving portion for notification can be moved to the first position by the urging force of the urging means (spring or the like), and the driving portion is driven against the urging force of the urging means. The gaming machine according to feature B3, which is characterized in that it moves to a second position.

According to the feature B5, in the power saving state, the moving portion for notification can be held in the first position (the position where the player can see) by utilizing the urging force of the urging means.

Feature B6. A production device (movable accessory 200) having a production movable part (movable plate 202) that can be moved between a position that can be seen from the front of the game machine and a position that cannot be seen is provided as an effect according to the progress of the game. A gaming machine that operates the movable part for production.
The gaming machine according to any one of features B3 to B5, wherein the effect device is provided with a movable portion for notification.

According to the feature B6, in the effect device, the movable part for effect can be moved between the position where it can be seen from the front of the gaming machine and the position where it cannot be seen, and the movement of the movable part for effect can be moved during the game. It has attracted a great deal of attention from players. In addition, the effect device has a movable unit for notification that can be moved between a position that can be seen from the front of the gaming machine (first position) and a position that cannot be seen (second position), similar to the movable unit for effect. Is provided. In this case, the movable part for production and the movable part for notification operate in substantially the same manner, and the movable part for notification should be attracted by the player in the power saving state (non-gaming state). Can be done.

Feature B7. As the operation unit, a display means (design display device 41) for variablely displaying a pattern related to the game effect on the display area (display screen G) is provided.
The first position is a position in front of the gaming machine in the display area, and the second position is a position behind an enclosure (center frame 42) surrounding the display area. The gaming machine according to any one of B3 to B6.

According to the feature B7, when the gaming machine is in the power saving state, the moving portion for notification moves to a position in front of the gaming machine in the display area (that is, a position overlapping the front of the gaming machine). In this case, the display area in which the pattern is variablely displayed during the game in the gaming machine is a portion that tends to be noticed by the player, and the notification is made by the presence of the movable portion for notification at a position in front of the gaming machine in the display area. It is more likely that the player will see the notification information (notification information indicating that the power is being saved) attached to the movable portion. Therefore, it is possible to make the player preferably recognize that the gaming machine is in a power saving state.

Feature B8. Further, a holding means (movable plate stopper 451) for holding the notification movable portion at the second position by contacting the notification movable portion in the non-driving state of the driving unit is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of features B3 to B7, wherein the notification movable portion is held at the second position by the holding means when the gaming machine is not put into the power saving state.

According to the feature B8, when the gaming machine is not in the power saving state, that is, when it is not in the non-gaming state, the notification movable unit is placed in the second position (game) even if the driving unit of the notification means is not supplied with power. It can be held in a position where it cannot be seen from the front of the machine). As a result, the power consumption can be further reduced.

Feature B9. While the notification means is provided as the first notification means, the second notification means (main display unit 43) capable of notifying that the power saving state is achieved while power is being supplied from the power supply means is provided.
When the power supply to the control means is cut off by the power cutoff means, the power supply from the power supply means to the first notification means is cut off, and the power supply from the power supply means to the second notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B8.

According to the feature B9, in the power saving state (non-gaming state), the first notification means performs the power saving notification in a state where the power supply from the power supply means is cut off, and the second notification means is from the power supply means. The power saving notification is performed while the power is supplied. In this case, by performing the notification using both the first notification means and the second notification means, (1) is the power supply by the power supply means cut off by the power cutoff means for power saving? 2) It is possible to determine whether the power supply itself of the power supply means is stopped (for example, the power switch is off, the power supply system is out of order, etc.).

More specifically, in the state of (1) above, both the first notification means and the second notification means are in the notification state, whereas in the state of (2) above, the first notification is performed. The means is in the notification state, and the second notification means is in the non-notification state. Therefore, the states of the respective notification means are different in the above (1) and (2), and it is possible to discriminate between them (1) and (2).

Feature B10. Numerical information (big hit random number counter C1 etc.) is sequentially updated within a predetermined numerical range, and when a predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied, the numerical information is acquired and based on the acquired numerical information. , The main control means (main control device 71) that carries out a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to the player, and
A lottery result display means (main display unit 43) whose display mode is controlled by the main control means to display the lottery result is provided.
When the gaming machine is in the power saving state, the power supply from the power supply means to the main control means is continuously supplied.
The gaming machine according to feature B9, wherein the lottery result display means is used as the second notification means.

According to the feature B10, the following effects are exhibited. The power saving state is a non-gaming state, and the lottery result is not displayed by the lottery result display means. That is, it is not necessary to display the lottery result by the lottery result display means. However, in the above configuration, in the power saving state, the lottery result display means is used as one means of power saving notification. Here, the lottery result display means whose display operation is controlled by the main control means, and it is desirable that the power supply to the main control means is continued even when power saving is performed from the viewpoint of fraud prevention and the like. Considering this, it can be said that it is convenient to use the lottery result display means as the second notification means.

In the state where the power supply from the drive power generation circuit to the second control means is cut off (power saving state), the lottery result display means is in the power saving state in a manner different from that at the time of displaying the lottery result. The display should be carried out. For example, when the lottery result is displayed, the light emitting member such as an LED is blinked to display, and when the power saving state is displayed, the light emitting member such as an LED is continuously turned on to display.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. A pattern display means (design display device 41) that displays a variable pattern of a pattern, and
A display control means (display control device 121) that controls the display contents by the pattern display means, and
A power supply means (power supply unit 113 for power-on) that supplies driving power to the pattern display means and the display control means, and
It is provided with a game state detecting means (a function of executing steps S402 and S405 in the main control device 71) for detecting a non-game state in which the player has not played a game.
The display control means
A first image display control means (image data determination unit 240 (display CPU 302)) that determines while sequentially updating image data related to an image to be displayed on the pattern display means.
The image data determined by the first image display control means is input, and each time the input is performed, the image data is stored in a storage unit (control RAM 332), and the stored image data is stored in the pattern display means. It has a second image display control means (output control unit 241 (VDP305)) to output the data.
The power supply means has a means for supplying electric power to the first image display control means, a means for supplying electric power to the second image display control means, and the means for supplying electric power to the pattern display means.
When the gaming state detecting means detects that the game is in a non-gaming state, the power supply to the first image display control means is cut off, while the power supply to the second image display control means and the pattern display means is supplied. A gaming machine characterized by continuous implementation.

According to the feature C1, when the gaming machine is in the non-gaming state, the power supply means does not supply power to the first image display control means, so that the power consumption can be reduced by utilizing the period during which the gaming machine is not played. It will be possible. Further, in the power saving state in which the power consumption is reduced, the power supply to the second image display control means and the pattern display means continues, so that the picture of the image data stored in the storage unit is displayed even in the power saving state. It becomes possible to continue the display in the display means. As a result, it is possible to display a pattern in line with the intention even after the gaming machine shifts to the power saving state while reducing the power consumption.

In the power supply means (power supply unit 113 at the time of power-on), as a means for supplying power to the first image display control means (display CPU 302), for example, the first image is transmitted via a power cutoff circuit (output switching circuit 231). Power is supplied to the display control means, and as a means for supplying power to the second image display control means (VDP305) and the pattern display means (design display device 41), for example, a power cutoff circuit (output switching) is used. The electric power is supplied to the second image display control means and the pattern display means without going through the circuit 231).

Feature C2. A predetermined series of continuous images (images for demo display) can be displayed on the pattern display means, and when displaying the series of continuous images, the first image display control means sequentially determines image data. A gaming machine in which the determined image data is output to the pattern display means by the second image display control means.
An auxiliary power supply means (backup power supply 420) that temporarily supplies auxiliary power to the first image display control means when the power supply to the first image display control means by the power supply means is cut off. ,
The first image display control means selectively displays image data to be displayed on the pattern display means from the series of continuous images during a period of operation by supplying auxiliary power from the auxiliary power supply means. The gaming machine according to feature C1, which is characterized in that it is determined in.

According to the feature C2, by providing the auxiliary power supply means, the first image display control means has the auxiliary power even when the power supply to the first image display control means (display CPU 302) by the power supply means is cut off. It will be able to operate temporarily by receiving the supply of. As a result, even if the power supply to the first image display control means by the power supply means is cut off, the image data is continuously updated by the first image display control means for a while, and eventually the second image display control means ( The image data stored in the storage unit (control RAM 332) in the VDP 305) is also continuously updated. In this case, unlike the configuration in which the update of the image data is stopped immediately when the power supply to the first image display control means by the power supply means is cut off, the stop timing of the update of the image data is adjusted after the power cutoff. can. Therefore, when the gaming machine is in a non-gaming state (power saving state), it is possible to arbitrarily select an image in the pattern display means, that is, to display a desired image.

Feature C3. As the display image by the pattern display means, an image for production that displays the lottery result when a privilege granting lottery (big hit lottery) is carried out due to the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an image for display regardless of the lottery result are displayed. A gaming machine in which an image for standby (an image for demo display) is set, and the image for standby is displayed on the pattern display means while the image for production is not displayed. And
The standby image is the series of continuous images.
The first image display control means is for causing the pattern display means to display any image of the standby images during a period of operation by supplying auxiliary power from the auxiliary power supply means. The gaming machine according to feature C2, which is determined as image data.

According to the feature C3, the following effects are exhibited. When the gaming machine being played by the player shifts to the non-gaming state, the premise is that the pattern display means (design display device 41) changes from the image for production to the image for standby (image for demo display). Is switched, and the standby image is displayed. Under such a state, it is conceivable that the gaming state detecting means detects the non-gaming state. In this regard, according to the configuration in which one of the standby images is displayed on the pattern display means in the non-gaming state as described above, the image data is displayed in the first image display control means (display CPU 302). When the update of is stopped, the display image in the non-game state can be determined as it is. Therefore, the processing can be simplified.

In the above configuration, it is not necessary to newly prepare a display image (dedicated image) in the non-gaming state, which is advantageous in preparing image data.

Feature C4. A predetermined title logo image is included in a part of the standby image.
The first image display control means is for displaying the title logo image of the standby images on the pattern display means during a period of operation by supplying auxiliary power from the auxiliary power supply means. The gaming machine according to feature C3, which is determined as image data.

According to the feature C4, when the gaming machine is in the non-gaming state (power saving state), the title logo image is continuously displayed on the pattern display means. In this case, if the still image at the halfway timing of the series of continuous images remains displayed, the player who sees the still image may feel uncomfortable, and in some cases, the gaming machine may be mistakenly recognized as being out of order. There is a risk that it will be done. In this regard, by keeping the title logo image displayed as described above, it is possible to suppress inconveniences such as a player feeling uncomfortable.

The title logo image is, for example, a still image that is stationary for a certain period of time, and includes a model name, a maker name, a feature of the machine, an explanation of the game content, and the like in the image. In addition, a message or an image urging the player to perform the game, such as "Good luck" or "The big hit is coming soon", may be included.

Feature C5. The standby image includes a low power consumption image in which the instantaneous power consumption in the display state by the pattern display means is smaller than that of other images.
The first image display control means is for causing the pattern display means to display the low power consumption image of the standby images during a period of operation by supplying auxiliary power from the auxiliary power supply means. The gaming machine according to feature C3, which is determined as image data of the above.

According to the feature C5, when the gaming machine is in the non-gaming state (power saving state), the low power consumption image is continuously displayed on the pattern display means. In this case, it is possible to reduce the power consumption of the pattern display means.

For example, as an image for standby (an image for demo display), an image using a background color with low power consumption (for example, white) and an image using a background color with higher power consumption (for example, black). If is included, the former image may be defined as a low power consumption image. Further, when images including images having different power consumption due to the difference in brightness are included, one of the images may be defined as a low power consumption image.

Feature C6. The first image display control means selectively selects image data to be displayed on the pattern display means from the series of continuous images during a period of operation by supplying auxiliary power from the auxiliary power supply means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C2 to C5, wherein the image data is not updated after the determination is made.

According to the feature C6, when the gaming machine is in the non-gaming state (power saving state), after the image to be displayed by the pattern display means is determined, the image data update processing becomes unnecessary. This makes it possible to eliminate extra power consumption.

Feature C7. The second image display control means
With a determination means for determining that a non-gaming state has been detected by the gaming state detecting means (for example, a means for determining a non-gaming state due to the stop of data transmission from the display CPU 302 to the VDP 305). ,
A specific image data storage means (control ROM 331) that stores data of a specific image indicating that the game is in a non-gaming state, and
A means for causing the pattern display means to display the specific image based on the data of the specific image stored in the specific image data storage means when the determination means determines that the player is in the non-gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature C1, which comprises.

According to the feature C7, when the gaming machine is in a non-gaming state, that is, when the power supply to the first image display control means (display CPU 302) by the power supply means is cut off, the second image display control means (VDP305) ), The specific image is displayed on the pattern display means based on the specific image data stored in the specific image data storage means (memory owned by the VDP 305 itself). As a result, even after the power supply to the first image display control means by the power supply means is cut off, the pattern display means displays (notifies) that power saving is performed in a non-gaming state. can. (In this case, the backup power supply (backup power supply 420) is unnecessary because all the power supply to the first image display control means, including the backup power supply, may be stopped in the non-gaming state. However, further reduction in power consumption can be realized.)
Feature C8. A main control means (main control device 71) for carrying out a privilege grant lottery (big hit lottery) when a predetermined condition is satisfied is provided, and the main control means is driven from the power supply means in a state where an external power source is supplied. It is a gaming machine that is supplied with electric power.
The power supply means
A drive power generation circuit (voltage conversion circuit 230) that generates each drive power of the pattern display means, the display control means, and the main control means, and
A power cutoff circuit provided in the power supply path between the drive power generation circuit and the first image display control means of the display control means to cut off the power supply from the drive power generation circuit to the first image display control means. (Output switching circuit 231), and the second image display control means of the display control means is supplied with power from the drive power generation circuit without going through the power cutoff circuit. And
When the gaming state detecting means detects that the main control means is in a non-gaming state while the external power is being supplied, the driving power generation circuit transfers the driving power generation circuit to the first image display controlling means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7, characterized in that the power supply of the machine is cut off.

According to the feature C8, when the gaming machine is in the non-gaming state, the main control means controls the state of the power cutoff circuit so as to cut off the power supply from the drive power generation circuit to the first image display control means. As a result, it is possible to reduce the power consumption of the display control means. Further, for each image display control means of the display control means, power management in a non-gaming state (power saving state) can be appropriately performed.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a picture display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures, the variable display of the plurality of pictures is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a privilege is given to the player according to the symbols after the stop.
<Others>
For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a plurality of control devices such as a main control device, a payout control device, and a display control device are provided to execute processing regarding the progress of the game. Further, a prize detection sensor is connected to the main control device, a payout motor is connected to the payout control device, and a plurality of devices such as a symbol display device and a lamp are connected to the display control device (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The plurality of control devices are connected to a power supply device, and power is supplied from the power supply device (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-7465).
In recent years, it has been desired to reduce the power consumption of pachinko gaming machines and the like, and when the game has not been played for a predetermined period of time, the power consumption (power saving) of the device used for the production such as the symbol display device and the lamp is to be implemented. Is being considered.
However, with the existing technology, it has been difficult to optimize the state of the gaming machine during power saving. That is, it is difficult to control each of the plurality of control devices in a desired state in the power-saving gaming machine, or the gaming machine is in the power-saving state for the player from the state in front of the gaming machine. It may be difficult to recognize.
This technical idea was made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of optimizing the state of the gaming machine during power saving. ..
<Means>
The present technical idea requires a plurality of control means for controlling various operations of the game machine, and each of the control means for the plurality of control means while the game machine is supplied with an external power source. A power supply means for supplying driving power, and the plurality of control means include a first control means and a second control means, which are provided in the power supply means to generate the drive power. It is provided in the power supply path between the power generation circuit, the drive power generation circuit, and the control unit of the second control means, and suppresses the power supply from the drive power generation circuit to the control unit of the second control means. A suppression circuit is provided, and power is supplied to the control unit of the first control means from the drive power generation circuit without going through the suppression circuit, and power saving is performed in the game machine. The suppression circuit is provided with a power saving necessity determining means for determining the necessity of power saving, and it is determined that the suppression circuit will save power by the power saving necessity determining means in a state where the external power supply is supplied to the gaming machine. In this case, when the power supply from the drive power generation circuit to the control unit of the second control means is suppressed and the determination that power saving is performed by the power saving necessity determination means is canceled, the drive power generation circuit describes the power saving. It supplies electric power to the second control means, and the first control means sequentially updates numerical information within a predetermined numerical range in the control unit of the first control means, and is predetermined. It is a main control means that acquires the numerical information when the acquisition condition is satisfied and draws a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the acquired numerical information, and is a main control means from the drive power generation circuit. The numerical information is updated at the same cycle in both the case where the power is supplied to the control unit of the second control means and the case where the power supply is suppressed. The game machine is characterized by including a notification means for notifying the player that power is being saved when the power supply from the drive power generation circuit to the control unit of the second control means is suppressed. And.
<Effect>
According to this technical idea, it is possible to optimize the state of the gaming machine during power saving.

41 ... symbol display device, 42 ... center frame, 43 ... main display unit, 58a, 58b ... lamp unit, 71 ... main control device, 72 ... voice emission control device, 78 ... payout control device, 112 ... power supply circuit, 113 ... Power supply unit for power-on, 121 ... display control device, 200 ... movable accessory, 201, 202 ... movable plate, 203 ... information display unit, 205, 206 ... drive unit, 225 ... touch detection unit, 230 ... voltage conversion circuit , 231 ... Output switching circuit, 240 ... Image data determination unit, 241 ... Output control unit, 302 ... Display CPU, 305 ... VDP, 332 ... Control RAM, 335 ... Drawing area, 420 ... Backup power supply, 451 ... Movable plate stopper , C1 ... jackpot random number counter, C2 ... jackpot type counter, C3 ... reach random number counter, C4 ... electric accessory release counter, G ... display screen.

Claims (2)

Multiple control means for controlling various operations of the gaming machine,
With the external power supplied to the gaming machine, the power supply means for supplying the driving power required by each of the control means to the plurality of control means, and the power supply means.
With
The plurality of control means include a first control means and a second control means.
A drive power generation circuit provided in the power supply means and generating the drive power,
A suppression circuit provided in the power supply path between the drive power generation circuit and the control unit of the second control means to suppress power supply from the drive power generation circuit to the control unit of the second control means.
With
Power is supplied to the control unit of the first control means from the drive power generation circuit without going through the suppression circuit.
A means for determining the necessity of power saving in the gaming machine is provided.
When the suppression circuit determines that power saving is to be performed by the power saving necessity determination means in a state where the external power supply is supplied to the game machine, the drive power generation circuit determines that the second control means A device that suppresses the power supply to the control unit and supplies power from the drive power generation circuit to the control unit of the second control means when the determination that power saving is to be performed by the power saving necessity determination means is canceled. And
The first control means sequentially updates the numerical information within a predetermined numerical range in the control unit of the first control means, and acquires the numerical information when the predetermined acquisition conditions are satisfied. It is a main control means for carrying out a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the acquired numerical information, and power is supplied from the drive power generation circuit to the control unit of the second control means. The numerical information is updated at the same cycle in both cases where the power supply is suppressed and when the power supply is suppressed.
The gaming machine is provided with a notification means for notifying the player that power is being saved when the power supply from the driving power generation circuit to the control unit of the second control means is suppressed. A featured gaming machine. The gaming machine according to claim 1, which is a pachinko machine.

Images